b.tech civil engineering · 2021. 9. 1. · unit iii: engineering dynamics 10 lecture hours...

B.Tech Civil Engineering

School of Civil Engineering

Civil Engineering

2016-20

Rahul

Typewritten text

1.1.3

Programme Electives Courses

Sl. No Course Code Course Title L T P C Course

Prerequisite Version

1 CLE371 Socio-economic studies & EIA 3 0 0 3 - 1.03

2 CLE372 Ground Improvement Techniques 3 0 0 3 CLE218 1.03

3 CLE373 Pollution Control and Monitoring 3 0 0 3 EVS101 1.03

4 CLE374 Natural Disaster Mitigation and Management 3 0 0 3 - 1.03

5 CLE375 Engineering Hydrology 3 0 0 3 - 1.03

6 CLE463 Applications of Matrix Methods in Structural analysis

3 0 0 3 CLE322 1.03

7 CLE376 Renewable Sources of Energy& Hydro power Engineering

3 0 0 3 - 1.03

8 CLE377 Transport Planning and Management 3 0 0 3 CLE314 1.03

9 CLE378 Traffic Engineering 3 0 0 3 CLE314 1.03

10 CLE379 Open Channel Hydraulics 3 0 0 3 CLE214 1.03

11 CLE381 Architecture and Town Planning 3 0 0 3 - 1.03

12 CLE464 Design with STADD pro 1 0 4 3 CLE342 , CLE353 1.03

13 CLE382 Advanced Surveying 3 0 0 3 CLE213 1.03

14 CLE383 Economics and Project Finance for Civil Engineers 3 0 0 3 - 1.03

15 CLE384 Highway Pavement Design 3 0 0 3 CLE314 1.03

16 CLE385 Earthquake Engineering 3 0 0 3 - 1.03

17 CLE386 Structures on Expansive Soils 3 0 0 3 CLE324 1.03

18 CLE387 Advance Concrete Design 3 0 0 3 CLE313 1.03

19 CLE465 Dynamics of Structures 3 0 0 3 CLE322 1.03

20 CLE401 Industrial Wastes Treatment and Disposal 3 0 0 3 CLE323 1.03

21 CLE402 Air and Noise Pollution 3 0 0 3 - 1.03

22 CLE403 Ground water Engineering 3 0 0 3 CLE325 1.03

23 CLE404 River Engineering 3 0 0 3 CLE325 1.03

24 CLE405 Open Channel Flow 3 0 0 3 CLE214 1.03

25 CLE406 Mass Transport Management 3 0 0 3 CLE325 1.03

26 CLE467 Planning & Scheduling with Primavera Software 2 0 2 3 - 1.03

27 CLE407 Operation and Management of Irrigation & Drainage Systems

3 0 0 3 CLE325 1.03

28 CLE408 Water Resources Systems Engineering 3 0 0 3 CLE313 1.03

29 CLE409 Soil Dynamics and Machine Foundation 3 0 0 3 CLE324 1.03

30 CLE461 Advance hydraulic Structures design 3 0 2 3 CLE230 1.03

31 CLE462 Tunnel Engineering 3 0 0 3 CLE212 1.03

32 CLE468 Bridge Engineering 3 0 0 3 CLE313 1.03

33 CLE469 Advanced Steel structures 3 0 0 3 CLE413 1.03

*To be taken by special permission from Dean to limited number of students

*Any student can take maximum of three special electives in his entire curriculum

Credits to be earned: 15

SEMESTER-WISE COURSE STRUCTURE

I SEMESTER

Sl.

No.

Course

Code Course Title L T P C

Course

Prerequisit

e

1 LLL111 Basic English 0 0 4 2 -

2 MAT111 Matrices & Multivariable Calculus 3 1 0 4 -

3 PHY111 Modern Physics 3 0 0 3 -

4 PHY151 Physics Lab I 0 0 2 1 -

5 CHY111 General Chemistry 3 0 0 3 -

6 CHY151 Chemistry Lab I 0 0 2 1 -

7 GER101/F

RE101

/JAP101 or

HUM201

German/French/Japanese Language or

Psychology & Sociology 2 0 0 2 -

8 EEE101 /

CSE101

Basic Electrical and Electronics

Engineering /

Computer Programming and Problem

Solving

3 0 0 3 -

9 EEE151 /

CSE151

Basic Electrical and Electronics

Engineering Laboratory /

Computer Programming and Problem

Solving Laboratory

0 0 2 1 -

10 EVS 102 Or

LLL101

Environmental Science & Energy Or

Universal Human Values and Ethics 3 0 0 3 -

11 CLE151 /

MEE151

Engineering Graphics Or Workshop

Practice 0/0 0/0 4/2 2/1 -

Total credits 25/24

II SEMESTER

Sl.

No.

Course


Course

Prerequisit

e

1 LLL121 English Proficiency 0 0 4 2 LLL111

2 MAT121

Ordinary Differential Equations and Integral Transforms

3 1 0 4 MAT111

3 PHY121 Condensed Matter Physics 3 0 0 3 PHY111

4 PHY141 Physics Lab II 0 0 2 1 -

5

CHY121 / 122 /

123 / 124

Biological Chemistry / Nano Science and Nano Technology / Organic Chemistry / Physical

Chemistry

3 0 0 3 CHY111

6 CHY141 Chemistry Lab II 0 0 2 1 -

7

GER101/ FRE101/ JAP101

or HUM20

1

German / French / Japanese Language or Psychology &

Sociology 2 0 0 2 -

8 EEE101/ CSE101

Basic Electrical & Electronics Engineering/Computer

Programming and Problem Solving 3 0 0 3 -

9 EEE151 / CSE151

Basic Electrical and Electronics Engineering Laboratory / Computer Programming and Problem Solving Laboratory

0 0 2 1 -

10 EVS 102 Or LLL101

Environmental Science & Energy Or Universal Human Values and Ethics

3 0 0 3 -

11 CLE151 / MEE151

Engineering Graphics Or Workshop Practice

0/0 0/0 4/2 2/1 -

Total credits 24/25

III SEMESTER

Sl.

No.

Course


Course

Prerequisite

1 MAT212

Vector Calculus, Functions of Compleax Variable & PDE

3 1 0 4 MAT 121

2 LLL213

English Proficiency and Aptitude Building-2

0 0 4 2 LLL121

3 CLE211 Engineering Mechanics 3 0 0 3 -

4 CLE212 Engineering Geology 2 0 0 2 -

5

CLE213

Surveying 3 0 0 3 -

6 CLE214 Fluid Mechanics 3 0 0 3 -

7 CLE215

Building Materials and Technology

2 0 0 2 CLE212

8 CLE252 Engineering Geology Laboratory 0 0 2 1 CLE212

9 CLE253 Surveying Practices 0 0 2 1 CLE213

10 CLE254 Fluid Mechanics Laboratory 0 0 2 1 CLE214

11 CLP257 Civil CAD 0 0 2 1

Total credits 23

IV SEMESTER

Sl.

No.

Course


Course

Prerequisite

1 LLL222

English Proficiency and Aptitude Building-3

0 0 4 2 LLL213

2 MAT222 Numerical Methods 3 0 0 3 MAT212

3 CLE223 Strength of Materials 3 0 0 3 CLE211

4 CLE227

Principles and Design of Water Supply and Treatment Systems

3 0 0 3 CHY111

5 CLE229

Concrete Technology 2 0 0 2 -

6 CLE230 Hydraulics and Hydraulics Machines

3 0 0 3 CLE214

7 CLE231

Construction Planning and Management

3 0 0 3 -

8 CLE243 Strength of Materials Laboratory 0 0 2 1 CLE223

9 CLE244

Hydraulics and Hydraulic Machines Laboratory

0 0 2 1 CLE230

10 CLE247 Concrete Testing Laboratory 0 0 2 1 CLE311

11 CLE248 Water Analysis Laboratory 0 0 2 1 CLE227

12 MAT241 Numerical Methods lab 0 0 2 1 MAT222

Total credits 24

V SEMESTER

Sl.

No.

Course


Course

Prerequisite

1 LLL311

English Proficiency & Aptitude Building-4

0 0 4 2 LLL222

2 MAT311 Probability and Statistics 3 0 0 3 -

3 CLE312 Structural Analysis 3 0 0 3 CLE223

4 CLE313 Reinforced Concrete Structures 3 0 0 3

CLE229, CLE312

5 CLE314 Highway Engineering 3 0 0 3 -

6 CLE315 Soil Mechanics 3 0 0 3 -

7 CLE316 Water Resources Engineering 2 0 0 2 CLE 214

8 MGT302

Industrial Economics & Management

3 0 0 3 -

9 CLE355 Soil Mechanics Laboratory 0 0 2 1 CLE218

10 CLE356

Highway Engineering Laboratory

0 0 2 1 CLE314

Total credits 24

VI SEMESTER

Sl.

No.

Course


Course

Prerequisite

1 LLL 322 Campus to Corporate 0 0 4 2 LLL311

2 CLE321

Quantity Surveying and Estimating

2 0 0 2 -

3 CLE322 Advanced Structural Analysis 3 0 0 3 CLE312

4 CLE323

Principles and Design of Waste Water Treatment &Disposal Systems

3 0 0 3 CLE227

5 CLE324 Geotechnical Engineering 3 0 0 3 CLE218

6 CLE325 Transportation Engineering 3 0 0 3 CLE314

7 Elective I 3 0 0 3 -

8 CLE341 Structural Analysis Laboratory 0 0 2 1 CLE312

9 CLE342 CAD Lab-I 0 0 2 1

CLE353,CLE313

10 ITS318P

IT Skills in C & C++

Programming 0 0 2 1

11 ITS319P IT Skills in Databases 0 0 2 1

Total credits 23

VII SEMESTER

Sl.

No.

Course


Course

Prerequisite

1 CLE413 Design of Steel Structures 3 0 0 3

CLE312, CLE322

2 Elective II 3 0 0 3 -

3 Elective III 3 0 0 3 -

4 Elective IV 3 0 0 3 -

5 Elective V 3 0 0 3 -

6 CLE452 CAD Lab- II 0 0 2 1

7 CLE455 Industrial Internship - - - 1

8 CLE498 Project Work (part I) - - - 5 -

Total credits 22

VIII SEMESTER

Sl.

No.

Course


Course

Prerequisite

1 CLE499 Project Work (part II) - - - 15 -

Total credits 15

SECTION 4B

SYLLABI FOR PROGRAMME CORE AND

ELECTIVE COURSES

CLE211 Engineering Mechanics L T P C

Version1.03 Date of Approval 3 0 0 3

Pre-requisites//Exposure --

Co-requisites --

COURSE OBJECTIVES

1. To understand the concept of mechanics and equilibrium.

2. To learn the geometric properties of different shapes.

3. To understand the different methods for analyzing plane trusses.

4. To know the concept of stresses and strains.

COURSE OUTCOMES

On completion of this course, the students will be able to

1. Understand the concept of mechanics and equilibrium.

2. Determine the centroid, centre of gravity and moment of inertia of various surfaces and solids.

3. Calculate the forces in the members of plane truss.

4. Understand the concept of stresses and strains.

CATALOG DESCRIPTION

Engineering mechanics is a branch of applied mechanics that deals with behaviors of solid bodies subjected to various

types of forces or loadings. All those who seek to understand natural phenomena involving stressing, deformation,

flow and fracture of solids must be thoroughly familiar with Engineering Mechanics. There are two broad categories

of this subject:

(1) Mechanics of rigid bodies that deals with how forces are transferred on to members of structures and trusses and is

mainly concerned with the elastic and dynamic behavior of engineering components under external forces

(2) Mechanics of materials or strength of materials (deformable solids deals with internal stresses and strains in

components resulting from external forces that can cause deformation and fracture of the component.

TEXT BOOKS

1. Tayal.A.K. (2009), Engineering Mechanics – Statics and Dynamics, 12th Edition, Umesh Publications, ISBN: 9788188114016

REFERENCE BOOKS

1. Punamia B. C. (2010), Mechanics of Materials, 15th Edition, Laxmi publications (P) Ltd, ISBN: 9788131806463.

2. Shames I. H. (2006), Engineering Mechanics – Statics and Dynamics, 4th Edition, Prentice-Hall of India Private limited, ISBN- 9780133569247.

COURSE CONTENT

Unit I: Introduction to Mechanics & Equilibrium of Forces 10 lecture hours

Fundamental Principles - Vectorial Representation of Forces and Moments - Coplanar forces - Resolution and Composition of forces and equilibrium of particles – introduction of Forces on a particle in space - Equivalent system of forces - Principle of transmissibility - Single equivalent force - Free body diagram - Equilibrium of rigid bodies in two dimensions and three dimensions and Introduction to Friction: Laws of Coulomb Friction, Equilibrium of Bodies involving Dry-friction. Application

Unit II: Properties of Surfaces and Solids 7 lecture hours

Centroid - First moment of area – Theorems of Pappus and Guldinus – Second moment of area – Product of inertia of plane areas– Transfer Theorems - Polar moment of inertia – Principle axes – Mass moment of inertia

Unit III: Engineering Dynamics 10 lecture hours

Kinematics of particles- Newton’s second law, D’Alembert principle, analysis of lift motion, linear and angular momentum. Work and Energy: work done by a force and spring, kinetic energy and work-energy principle, application of the work and energy prin-ciple. Impulse and Moment: Introduction to momentum principle, conservation of total momentum of particle, application of principle of impulse and momentum.

Unit IV: Analysis of Plane Truss 9 lecture hours

Trusses: Introduction, Simple Truss and Solution of Simple truss, Method of Joints and Method of Sections – Method of Tension Coefficient

Unit V: Stresses and Strains 9 lecture hours

Simple Stress and Strain: Introduction - Normal and Shear stresses - Stress - Strain Diagrams, Solution of simple

problems –Tapered Section - One Dimensional Loading of members of varying cross-section – Concepts of Elastic

Constants.

Mode of Evaluation: The subject understanding of students will be evaluated from CAT – I ,II and SEE performance.

Components

Theory

Internal

SEE

Marks 50 50

Total Marks 100

Relationship between the Course Outcomes (COs) and Program Outcomes (POs)

Mapping between COs

and POs

Sl. No. Course Outcomes (COs)

Mapped Programme Outcomes

1

Understand the

concept

Concept of mechanics and

equilibrium. 1, 2

2 Determine the centroid, centre of gravity and moment of inertia of various surfaces and solids. 1, 2

3 Calculate the forces in the members of plane truss. 1, 2

4 Understand the concept of stresses and strains 1, 2, 12

En

gin

eeri

ng

Kn

ow

led

ge

Pro

ble

m a

nal

ysi

s

Des

ign

/dev

elop

men

t o

f so

luti

on

s

Co

nd

uct

in

ves

tig

atio

ns

of

com

ple

x

pro

ble

ms

Mo

der

n t

oo

l u

sag

e

Th

e en

gin

eer

and

so

ciet

y

En

vir

on

men

t an

d s

ust

ain

abil

ity

E

thic

s

Ind

ivid

ual

or

team

wo

rk

Co

mm

un

icat

ion

Pro

ject

man

agem

ent

and

fin

ance

Lif

e-lo

ng

Lea

rnin

g

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

CLE211 Engineering Mechanics 2 2 1

1=addressed to small extent

2= addressed significantly

3=major part of course

\

MODEL QUESTION PAPER

Name:

Admission No:

Batch No:

Semester End Examination

Course : CLE 211 - Engineering Mechanics


Programme: B. Tech Semester: Winter

Time: 3 Hrs. Max. Marks:100

PART – A (10 Marks)

Answer all the Questions

1. (a) ‘Force is a vector quantity’. Write your comments on the statement. [1X5=5]

(b) ‘Free body diagram is very much essential in Engineering Mechanics’. Justify your

answer.

2.

(c) ‘Centroid & centre of gravity are different’. Give reasons.

(d) ‘Newton’s second law is very much useful in Engineering Dynamics’. Justify your

answer.

(e) ‘Strain is dimensionless’. Give reasons.

(a) Define first moment of area . [2x2.5=5]

(b) State the relationship between bulk modulus and Young’s modulus.

PART – B (20 Marks)

3.

3. (a) Calculate forces in the members of the plane truss as shown in figure 1 by method of joints. AE is constant for all members. Explain mechanisms for any two chemical stabilizers for stabilizing expansive soil.

[10]

(b) Locate the centroid of the plane area as shown in figure 2. [10]

PART – C (40 Marks)

Answer any four questions

4. State the principle of transmissibility and the Laws of Coulomb Friction.

[10]

5. State parallel axis theorem and perpendicular axis theorem. [10]

6. Discuss in details about impulse and momentum.

[10]

7. Calculate forces in the members of the plane truss as shown in figure 2 by method of section. AE is constant for

all members.

[10]

8. A load of 2000 kN is applied on a short concrete column 525 mm X 525 mm. The column is reinforced with

eight steel bars of 16 mm diameter. Find the stresses in concrete and steel bars. Take E for steel as 2.1X105 N/mm2

[10]

and for concrete as 1.4X104 N/mm2.

PART – D (30 Marks)

9. A plane truss of 20 m span is to be built in NCR region. Draw a sketch of the truss. Also discuss briefly about the [15]

procedures to analyze the same.

10. Discuss briefly about the importance of calculation of moment of inertia for any structural section. Calculate [15]

the moment of inertia of the plane area as shown in figure 3.

CLE212 Engineering Geology L T P C

Version1.03 Date of Approval: 2 0 0 2

Pre-requisites --

Co-requisites --

COURSE OBJECTIVES

1. The overall objective of lecture portion of engineering geology is to demonstrate the importance of geology in

making engineering decisions.

2. Introduce the fundamentals of engineering properties of earth materials for their use in civil engineering

constructions.

3. Develop quantitative skills and frame work for solving basic engineering geology problems related to geological

features .

COURSE OUTCOMES


1. Characterize and classify various minerals and rocks on the basis of their engineering properties.

2. Assess geological hazards and develop mitigation frameworks.

3. Use seismic and electrical methods to investigate subsurface and develop a native construction plan incorporating all relevant

aspects of geology.

CATALOG DESCRIPTION

Engineering Geology is the application of the geological sciences to civil engineering practice for the purpose of recognizing the location, design, construction, operation and maintenance of engineering works.Students will be able to know the details of rock formation and rock cycle. Students will be able to identify different minerals and find their properties. They will understand the various geological features e.g. folds and faults.

TEXT BOOKS

1. P.C. Varghese (2012), Engineering Geology for Civil Engineers, PHI Learning private limited. ISBN: 978-81-203-4495-2.

2. Parbin Singh, (2004), Engineering & General Geology, S.K. Kataria and Sons- Delhi. ISBN: 978-93-501-4267-7.

REFERENCE BOOKS

1. Jerome Degraff R. B. Johnson (2011), Principles of Engineering Geology, Wiley India Pvt Ltd. ISBN: 978-81-265-3314-5.

2. Dr. D.V. Reddy (2010), Engineering Geology 1st Edition, Vikas Publishing House. ISBN: 978-81-259-1903-2.

3. Chadha S. K. (2009), Elements of Geological Maps for Geology, Geography & Civil Engineering, CBS Publishers &

Distributors- New Delhi. ISBN: 978-81-239-0372-9.

4. Gautam Mahajan (2011), Evaluation and Development of Ground Water, APH Publishers. ISBN: 978-81-313-0339-9.

COURSE CONTENT

Unit I: Minerals and Rocks 7 lecture hours

Relevance and importance of engineering geology in civil engineering, Minerals - their physical properties, rock forming minerals, Physical and engineering properties of igneous, metaphoric and sedimentary rocks.

Unit II: Interior and Structures of earth 6 lecture hours

Earth’s interior based on seismic models, Earth’s geomagnetic field, Plate tectonics and continental drift theory, Study of earth’s geological structures – fold, faults and joints, Geological factors affecting civil engineering constructions, Geological maps- their uses and interpretation.

Unit III : Weathering and soils 7 lecture hours

The atmosphere, Weather and climate, Ocean structure and composition, Rock decay and weathering, Soil origin and formation,

classification and its engineering importance, Slope stability, rock and soil slope stability analysis.

Unit IV:Ground Water 6 lecture hours

Characteristic of ground water, Global distribution of water, Hydro geological cycle, Darcy’s Law, laboratory permeability tests, Types of aquifers, Water level fluctuations, Surface and subsurface geophysical methods, Groundwater contamination, Artificial recharge of groundwater, Seawater intrusion and harvesting of rainwater.

Unit V: Earth Processes 5 lecture hours

Resources – minerals, water & energy, Natural hazards – Brief description on cause and formation of flood, cyclone, volcano, earthquake, tsunami and landslides, Global warming and the greenhouse effect, Future of the Earth.


Components

Theory

Internal

SEE

Marks 50 50

Total Marks 100


Mapping between COs and POs

Sl. No. Course Outcomes (COs) Mapped Programme Outcomes

1 Characterize and classify various minerals and rocks on the basis of their engineering properties. 7

2 Assess geological hazards and develop mitigation frameworks. 6,7

3 Use seismic and electrical methods to investigate subsurface and develop a native construction plan 6,7

incorporating all relevant aspects of geology.

En

gin

eeri

ng

Kn

ow

led

ge

Pro

ble

m a

nal

ysi

s

Des

ign

/dev

elo

pm

ent

of

solu

tio

ns

Co

nd

uct

in

ves

tig

atio

nso

f co

mp

lex

pro

ble

ms

Mo

der

n t

oo

l u

sag

e

Th

e en

gin

eer

and s

oci

ety

En

vir

on

men

t an

d s

ust

ain

abil

ity

Eth

ics

Ind

ivid

ual

or

team

wo

rk

Co

mm

un

icat

ion

Pro

ject

man

agem

ent

and

fin

ance

Lif

e-lo

ng

Lea

rnin

g

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

CLE212 Engineering Geology 1 1





Name:

Admission No:

Batch No:


Course : CLE 212: Engineering Geology

Department: Civil Engineering

Programme: B. Tech Semester:Winter

Time: 3 Hrs. Max.Marks:100



1. (a) Explain the term economic mineral deposit.

(b) Define soil? How are they formed in nature?

(c) Define the term earthquake and Tsunamis.

(d) Enlist the different types of Mass Failure

(e) Define true dip and apparent dip? [1X5=5]

2

.

2. (a) Explain the various processes which are believed to be responsible for formation of a great variety

of igneous rocks from the same type of magma?

(b)Discuss Bowen’s Reaction Series? What is its significance in the process of crystallization of

magma.

. [2x2.5=5]

PART – B (2 x 10 = 20 Marks)

3.

3. (a) Explain the civil engineering aspects of earthquakes reviewing the problem and common approach

to face it?

(b) Critically discuss the statement: “Water is always the cause and drainage the best cure of landslides”.

PART – C (4 X 10 = 40 Marks)


4. Explain the various structures exhibited by minerals in their natural habits? How far any of them can be taken as diagnostic

in their identification?

5. Give a critical account of classification of igneous rocks. Which is the most suitable classification for a field engineer and why?

6. . Sedimentary rocks are most widespread over the surface of earth. Discuss texture, structure and mode of formation of three most

common sedimentary rocks and their relative prevalence and engineering properties.

7. “An aquifer is a storage reservoir, a conduit and a filter” all at the same time. Critically examine the statement with suitable filed

example?

8 Give an account of physical and engineering properties of soil. Outline specific engineering problems expected to be encountered

in:-

(a) Aeolian Soils (b) Glacial Soils (c) Black Cotton Soil (d) Laterite soil

PART – D (2 x 15 = 30 Marks)

9. “Metamorphism is basically a process of changes in the pre- existing rocks and not a process of formation of new rocks”. Discuss the statement critically and draw your conclusion?

10. Explain the various geological characters that have to be established before a water supply project from an artesian source is

approved?

Disclaimer: The Model Question Paper is only provided as guide for the students to better understand the learning expectations from them. The

actual Question Paper will differ significantly in the questions that appear in the paper.

CLE213 Surveying L T P C


Pre-requisites --

Co-requisites --

COURSE OBJECTIVES

1. To teach the students basics of surveying and expose different techniques of surveying. 2. To help the students to learn the field applicability of the different survey methods. 3. To teach students about types of errors encountered in different types of surveying.

COURSE OUTCOMES


1. Learn about basics involved in different types of surveying like tape, compass, leveling, and theodolite (total station).

2. Measure distance & angles and do leveling, and curve setting.

2. Estimate distance between given points, area of a given plot and earthwork involved in cuttings and fillings.

3. Carry out tachometry, geodetic surveying wherever situation demands.

4. Apply error adjustment to the recorded reading to get an accurate surveying output.

CATALOG DESCRIPTION

Surveying is the most useful and necessary part in Civil Engineering. Students will understand the use of optical surveying instru-ments, Transits, Total Stations and Auto Levels, cloth tapes, steel tapes and electronic distance machines. Students will also un-derstand reduction of slope measurements to horizontal and vertical components, field data reduction and adjustment of a closed traverse, horizontal and vertical curves, earthwork, and coordinates.

TEXT BOOKS

1. Punmia B.C. (2005), Surveying, Volume 1, 16th Edition Laxmi Publications. ISBN: 9788170080794 2. Punmia B.C. (2005), Surveying, Volume 2, 15th Edition Laxmi Publications. ISBN: 9788170080800 3. Satheesh Gopi (2010), GPS Principles and Applications, Tata Mc Graw Hill publishing company Ltd. ISBN:

9780070141704

REFERENCE BOOKS

1 .Subramaniyan R. (2010), Surveying and Levelling, Oxford University Press. ISBN: 9780195684247.

2 Kanetkar T.P. (2006), Surveying and Levelling, Vol I, Pune. ISBN: 9788185825113.

3 Kanetkar T.P. (2008), Surveying and Levelling, Vol II, Pune. ISBN: 9788185825007

COURSE CONTENT

Unit I: Plane Surveying and Theodolite 10 lecture hours

Introduction to plane surveying, conventional tape measurement, electronic distance measurement – Meridians, Azimuths and bearings – Theodolites – Temporary and permanent adjustment – Horizontal and Vertical angle measurements – Electronic total station.

Unit II: Leveling and Contouring 9 lecture hours

20

Differential levelling, Longitudinal & cross section leveling, Refraction & curvature correction, Reciprocal leveling -Tachometry – Stadia tachometry, tangential tachometry & substance tachometry- Contouring.

Unit III: Calculation of Earthwork and GPS 9 lecture hours

Area, volume calculation of earth work – Introduction to Global positioning system – GPS surveying methods.

Unit IV : Curve Surveying 7 lecture hours

Definitions, designation of curve, elements of simple curve - Settings of simple circular curve, Compound and reverse curve- Tran-sition curve – Introduction to vertical curves.

Unit V: Geodetic surveying 10 lecture hours

Introduction to geodetic surveying, Triangulation surveying – Base line measurement & correction, Satellite station. Surveying adjustments – Principle of least square and adjustment of triangulation network.


Components

Theory

Internal

SEE

Marks 50 50

Total Marks 100


Mapping between Cos and POs


1 Learn about basics involved in different types of surveying like tape, compass, leveling, and theodolite 1,6

(total station).

2 Measure distance & angles and do leveling, and curve setting. 1, 2, 5

3 Estimate distance between given points, area of a given plot and earthwork involved in cuttings and 1, 2, 5

fillings.

4 Carry out tachometry, geodetic surveying wherever situation demands. 1, 2, 5

5 Apply error adjustment to the recorded reading to get an accurate surveying output. 2

En

gin

eeri

ng

Kn

ow

led

ge

Pro

ble

m a

nal

ysi

s

Des

ign

/dev

elo

pm

ent

of

solu

tio

ns

Co

ndu

ct i

nv

esti

gat

ion

s o

f co

mp

lex

pro

ble

ms

Mo

der

n t

oo

l u

sag

e

Th

e en

gin

eer

and s

oci

ety

En

vir

on

men

t an

d s

ust

ain

abil

ity

Eth

ics

Ind

ivid

ual

or

team

wo

rk

Co

mm

un

icat

ion

Pro

ject

man

agem

ent

and

fin

ance

Lif

e-lo

ng

Lea

rnin

g

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

CLE213 Surveying 2 3 3 2





Name:

Admission No:

Batch No:


Course: CLE 213-Surveying


Programme: B. Tech. Semester: Fall

Time: 3 Hours Max. Marks: 100

Note: All questions in Section A, B and D are compulsory. Attempt any four question from section C.

Assume missing data suitably, if any.

SECTION A

1.

(a) Compare between chain survey and compass survey.

(b) Describe Perpendicular offsets and Oblique offsets.

(c) Describe the differences between Declination and dip.

(d) Describe the differences between Isoclinic and Aclinic lines.

(e) Explain the different types of curves used in surveying.

1x5 = 5

2. (a) Define the following terms with neat sketch:

(i) Horizontal Equivalent and (ii) Grade contour.

(b) Describe the following terms using proper diagram:

(i) Contour interval and (ii) Contour gradient.

2.5x2=5

SECTION B

3.

a) A and B are two of the stations used in setting out construction lines of harbor works. The total latitude and departure of A, referred to the origin of the system, are respectively, +542.70 and -331.20 and those of B are

+713.00 and +587.80. A point C is fixed from A at a distance of 432 m on a bearing of 346°14’ and from it

a line CD, 1152 m in length, is set out parallel to AB as shown in Figure 3. It is required to check the position

of D by a sight from B. Calculate the bearing of D from B.

(a) What is transit Curve? Write down the linear methods of setting out the simple circular curve. A circular curve has

a 200 m radius and 65° deflection angle. What is its degree (A) by arc definition and (B) by chord definition? Also

calculate:

(i) Length of curve,

(ii) Tangent length,

(iii) Length of long Chord,

(iv) Apex distance, and

(v) Mid-ordinate.

2x10=20

SECTION C


4. What is GPS and how does it work? What are the applications of GPS? What are the uses of GPS in surveying? Describe

briefly.

10

5. As engineer, you are assigned to build a railway embankment. The embankment is 12 m wide. The ground is leveled in

a direction transverse to the centre line. Calculate the volume contained in a 100 m length by trapezoidal rule and

prismoidal rule, if the side slope is 1.5:1. The centre heights at 20 m interval are 3.7 m, 2.6 m, 4.0 m, 3.4 m, 2.8 m, 3.0m

and 2.2 m.

10

6. During the survey of a highway project it was found that two straights ‘AI’ and ‘BI’ meet at a Chainage of 3450 m. a

right handed simple circular curve of 250 m radius joins them. And deflection angle between the two straights is

500.Tabulate the necessary data to layout the curve by Rankine’s methods of deflection angles. Take the chord interval as

20 m.

10

7. You are on the field to carry out a triangulation survey project. Describe in detail your step-wise mode of operation 10

8.

Enumerate the commonly used triangulation layouts using suitable figures where necessary.

10

SECTION D

9. Compare the collimation method with rise and fall method.

The following consecutive readings were taken with a level and 4.0 m staff on a continuously sloping ground at a

15

common interval of 30 m.:

0.780, 1.535, 1.955, 2.430, 2.985, 3.480, 1.155, 1.960, 2.365, 3.640, 0.935, 1.045, 1.630 and 2.545.

The reduced level of the first point A was 180.750 m. Rule out a page of a level field book and enters the above readings.

Calculate the reduced levels of the points by the rise and fall system. Also calculate the gradient of the line joining the

first and the last points.

10

The following bearings were taken while conducting a close traverse with a compass in a place where local attraction was

suspected:

Line F.B. B.B.

AB N80°45’E S80°00’W

BC S49°30’E N48°25’W

CD S60°15’W N60°15’E

DA N69°30’W S69°50’

At what station do you suspect local attraction? Determine the include angles of the traverse. Find the corrected bearings

for local attraction and for declination of 1°30’W.

15

CLE214 Fluid Mechanics L T P C


Pre-requisites --

Co-requisites --

COURSE OBJECTIVES

1. Introduce concepts, laws, observations, models of fluids at rest and in motion and understanding fluid behavior for engi-neering design and control of fluid system.

1. Develop competence with mass, energy and momentum balances for determining resultant interactions of flows and en-gineered and natural systems.

2. The development of boundary layers and advancement of practical hydraulics and understanding the concept of advanced fluid mechanics.

COURSE OUTCOMES


1. To find frictional losses in a pipe when there is a flow between two places. 2. Calculate conjugate depth in a flow and analyse the model and prototype. 3. Find the dependent and independent parameters for a model of fluid flow. 4. Explain the various methods available for the boundary layer separation.

CATALOG DESCRIPTION

Fluid mechanics include fluid statics and dynamics; conservation of mass, momentum, and energy; incompressible inviscid flow; flow of a real fluid--including laminar and turbulent flow; dimensional analysis and similitude; applications to engineering prob-lems.

TEXT BOOKS

1. R.K. Bansal (2010), A Textbook of Fluid Mechanics and Hydraulic Machines 9th Edition. Laxmi Publication, ISBN-9788131808153.

REFERENCE BOOKS

1. P. N. Modi and S. M. Seth (2011), Hydraulics and Fluid Mechanics including Hydraulic Machines, Standard Publica-tions. ISBN- 9788189401269. 2. D.S. Kumar (2004), Fluid Mechanics and Fluid Power Engineering, Katson Publishing House, ISBN - 9788185749181. 3. V.L. Streeter, (2001), Fluid Mechanics, McGraw Hill Book Co. ISBN – 9780071156004.

COURSE CONTENT

Unit I: Fluid Properties and Hydrostatics 9 lecture hours

Density – Viscosity – Surface tension – compressibility – capillarity – Hydrostatic forces on plane – inclined and curved surfaces – buoyancy – centre of buoyancy – metacentre.

Unit II: Fluid Dynamics 10 lecture hours

Control volume – Fluid Kinematics - Types of flows; Steady flow, Unsteady flow, Uniform and Non Uniform flow, Rotational flow, Irrotational flow, 1-D, 2-D, 3-D flows– Streamline and Velocity potential lines- Euler and Bernoulli’s equations and their ap-plications – moment of momentum – Momentum and Energy correction factors – Impulse – Momentum equation-Navier-Stokes Equations-Applications.

Unit III: Open Channel Flow 10 lecture hours

211

Flow through pipes – Open Channels and Measurement pipe flow: Darcy’s law – Minor losses – Multi reservoir problems – pipe network design – Moody’s diagram – Hagen Poiseuille equation – Turbulent flow. Specific Energy – Critical flow concept – specific force – Hydraulic jump – uniform flow and gradually varying flow concepts. – Measurement of pressure – flow – velocity through pipes and open channels.

Unit IV:Dimensional Analysis 7 lecture hours

Dimensional homogeneity – Raleigh and Buckingham π theorems – Non-dimensional numbers – Model laws and distorted models-Module quantities-Specific quantities

Unit V: Boundary layers 9 lecture hours

Boundary layers – Laminar flow and Turbulent flow – Boundary layer thickness – momentum – Integral equation – Drag and lift-Separation of boundary layer-Methods of separation of boundary layer.

Mode of Evaluation: The subject understanding of students will be evaluated from CAT – I ,II and SEE performance..

Components

Theory

Internal

SEE

Marks 50 50

Total Marks 100



Sl. No.

Course Outcomes (COs)


1 To fi nd frictional losses in a pipe when there is a flow between two places. 1

2 Calculate conjugate depth in a flow and analyse the model and prototype. 1, 2, 12

3 Find the dependent and independent parameters for a model of fluid flow. 1, 2

4 Explain the various methods available for the boundary layer separation. 1, 2

En

gin

eeri

ng K

no

wle

dg

e

Pro

ble

m a

nal

ysi

s

Des

ign

/dev

elo

pm

ent

of

solu

tio

ns

Co

ndu

ct i

nv

esti

gat

ion

sof

com

ple

x p

rob

lem

s

Mo

der

n t

oo

l u

sag

e

Th

e en

gin

eer

and s

oci

ety

En

vir

on

men

t an

d s

ust

ain

abil

ity

Eth

ics

Ind

ivid

ual

or

team

wo

rk

Co

mm

un

icat

ion

Pro

ject

man

agem

ent

and

fin

ance

Lif

e-lo

ng

Lea

rnin

g

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

CLE214 Fluid Mechanics 2 2 1





Name:

Admission No:

Batch No:


Course: CLE 214-Fluid Mechanics




Part-A ( 10 marks)

Attempt ALL Questions

1. (a)The hydrostatic pressure of a fluid varies as a linear of depth, why?

(b) The value of coefficient of discharge, Cd for a venturimeter is higher than that for an orifice meter.

Explain logically.

© Specific energy of liquid flowing in an open channel is represented by . Give reasons.

(d) Before the design of a fluid machine, model study is carried out. Give logical reasons.

(e)“Boundary layer analysis is applied to flow around submerged bodies”. Justify the statement.

5X1=5

2. (a) Construct flow net for flow of a fluid through a gradually varying pipe section.

(b) Draw specific energy curve for flow in an open channel showing salient points

2X2.5=5

Part-B (4 x 10 = 40 mark

3. a. A 0.5 m diameter pipe 2240 m long is connected to a reservoir whose free surface is 85 m above the discharging end

of pipe. If for the last 1170 m, a second pipe of the same diameter be laid beside the first and connected to it, what

would be the increase in the discharge? The pipe is of cast iron with inside smooth surface having a friction factor as

0.02.

b. A rectangular channel carrying a super critical stream is to be provided with a hydraulic jump type of energy

dissipater. If it is desired to have an energy loss of 6.2 m in the jump at an inlet Froude number of 12.5, determine the

sequent depths.

Part-C (1 x 20 = 20 marks)

4. If the equation of velocity profile over a plate is represented by , in which v is the velocity in m/s at a

distance y above the plate, determine shear stress at y=0 and y=7.5 cm. Given µ=0.835 N.s/m2

5 Enlist various types of manometers used for the measurement of pressure of a flowing fluid. Also explain any

one of them in detail.

6 Define a venturiflume. Explain how it is used to estimate discharge through an open channel including its

practical application.

7. Calculate the friction drag on a plate 0.15 m wide and 0.45 m long placed longitudenally in a stream of oil

flowing with a free stream velocity of 6 m/s. Also find the thickness of boundary layer and shear stress at the

2X10=20

trailing edge. The specific gravity and kinematic viscosity of the oil are respectively 0.925 and 0.9X10-4 m2/s.

8. Calculate the depth of centre of pressure below the free surface of water of a plain lamina having a shape of a

circular ring with outer and inner diameters as 2.0 m and 1.0 m respectively. The lamina is immersed in the

water vertically with its top edge below the free surface at a depth of 1.0 m

10

Part-D (2 x 15 = 30 marks)

9. A Hydropower Plant requires suitable turbines for the generation of 9.6 MW of power. Model study

needs to be carried out on various turbines available in the market. A scale of 1:5 is recommended. A

model of Francis turbine develops 3kW at 306 rpm under a head of 1.77 m.

(a) Find the speed and power of the prototype (actual turbine) under a head of 57.0 m if the efficiency of model and

prototype is same as 76% and the scale ratio is considered.

(b) Determine the number of such turbine required for the project.

15

10. A irrigation canal is proposed for a part of Ganga River Basin extending in a length of 250 km under the following

conditions: (i) Command Area = 184300 km2, (ii) Type of soil= alluvium, (iii) Length of Canal= 248 km, (iv) Crop

period = Kharif, Rabi (Primary crops); Summer vegetable and fruits (additional), (v) Maxm discharge to be conveyed

by the canal is 150.6 m3/s, (vi) allowable slope of the canal = 1 in 4000, Manning’s roughness coefficient may be

taken as 0.011, (vii) permissible velocity = 1.1 m/s.

Carry out calculation for determining the dimension of the most efficient trapezoidal section of the canal.

15

21

CLE227 Principles and Design of Water Supply and Treatment Systems L T P C


Pre-requisites CHY111

Co-requisites --

COURSE OBJECTIVES

1.Understand the basic principles and concepts of unit operations and processes involved in water treatment. 2.Understand the disinfection process in water treatment. 3. Understand the details of water supply systems.

COURSE OUTCOMES


1.Know the type of unit operations and processes involved in water treatment plants.

2.Understand unit operations and processes required for satisfactory treatment of water.

3.Know the design of unit operation or process appropriate to the situation by applying physical, chemical, biological and engineering principles.

4.Design water treatments units in a cost effective and sustainable way and evaluate its performance to meet the desired health and environment related goals.

CATALOG DESCRIPTION

Water supply and its treatment system are attached with the life cycle of every human being. To identify the problems associated with the treatment of the water and its supply it is essential to have the knowledge this course. Students learn Effect of population dynamics on water demand, Physicochemical Principles applied in water treatment, Unit operations, principles and processes for pretreatment and treatment of raw water, Principles, functions and design of different treatment units and processes. Upon comple-tion, students should be able to design and construct the water treatment plant for the single unit, residential area or for society.

TEXT BOOKS

1 .Garg S.K. (2010), Environmental Engineering Vol. I Water Supply Engineering, Khanna Publishers. ISBN: 9788174091208 2. H.S.Peavy, D.R.Rowe & George Tchobanoglous (2005), Environmental Engineering, McGraw-Hill Company, New Delhi. ISBN: 9789380358246

REFERENCE BOOKS

1. Nathanson, Jerry A. (2007), Basic Environmental Technology: Water Supply, Waste Management, and Pollution Control, 5th ed., PHI Learning Private Limited ISBN: 978-81-203-3836-4

2. Rangwala (1999), Water supply & Sanitary Engineering, Charotar Publishing House, Anand-16th Edition. ISBN: 9788185594590

3. Metcalf and Eddy (2003), Wastewater Engineering, Treatment and reuse, Tata McGraw-Hill Edition, Fourth edition. ISBN:9780070495395

COURSE CONTENT

Unit I:Water sources- classification and Distribution 6 lecture hours

Water demand, Factors governing water demands and seasonal variations, Effect of population dynamics on water demand, Prin-ciples for forecasting of water-demand and its calculations, Self-purification of surface water bodies – Oxygen sag curve, permissible values for drinking water.

Unit II: Water Treatments Units 6 lecture hours

215

Physicochemical Principles applied in water treatment, Unit operations, principles and processes for pretreatment and treatment of raw water, pre-chlorination and chlorination, principles and objectives for designing chlorination systems, General design consid-erations for designing water treatment plants

Unit III: Unit Operations & Processes 9 lecture hours

Principles, functions and design of screen, grit chambers, flash mixers, flocculators, sedimentation tanks and sand filters- Slow sand and rapid sand filters, layouts – Flash mixer – Clariflocculator – Slow sand and rapid sand filters.

Unit IV : Disinfection Processes in Water treatment 6 lecture hours

Principles, Objectives, Unit Operations & Advanced Processes in Water treatment, Disinfection – Aeration – iron and manganese removal, Defluoridation and demineralization – Water softening.

Unit V: Water supply systems 3 lecture hours

Water Supply Systems, Water supply network, Water storage system


Components

Theory

Internal

SEE

Marks 50 50

Total Marks 100




1 Know the type of unit operations and processes involved in water treatment plants. 6

2 Understand unit operations and processes required for satisfactory treatment of water. 7

3 Know the design of unit operation or process appropriate to the situation by applying physical, 3

chemical, biological and engineering principles.

4 Design water treatments units in a cost effective and sustainable way and evaluate its performance to 3, 8

meet the desired health and environment related goals.

En

gin

eeri

ng

Kn

ow

led

ge

Pro

ble

m a

nal

ysi

s

Des

ign

/dev

elo

pm

ent

of

solu

tio

ns

Co

nd

uct

in

ves

tig

atio

nso

f co

mp

lex

pro

ble

ms

Mo

der

n t

oo

l u

sag

e

Th

e en

gin

eer

and s

oci

ety

En

vir

on

men

t an

d s

ust

ain

abil

ity

Eth

ics

Ind

ivid

ual

or

team

wo

rk

Co

mm

un

icat

ion

Pro

ject

man

agem

ent

and

fin

ance

Lif

e-lo

ng

Lea

rnin

g

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

CLE227 PDWATS 2 3 3 2

1=addressed to small

Extent

2= addressed

significantly



Name:

Admission No:

Batch No:


Course : CLE227-Principles and Design of Water Supply and Treatment Systems

Note: All questions in Section A, B and D are compulsory. Attempt any four question from

section C.


SECTION A

1.

(a) The quantity of water required for industries cannot be connected to

density of population. Justify logically.

(b) The extent of bacteria removal is more in slow sand filters as

compared to rapid sand filters but still rapid sand filters are preferred. Justify

reason.

(c) Define turbidity in terms of quality and standard values.

(d) Define recarbonation process in water softening.

(e) Intermittent supply system is largely employed in India in spite of its

limitations and disadvantages. Justify with reason.

1x5 = 5

2. (a) Write a short note on Ideal Population Growth Curve with neat

diagram.

(b) Mention basic working principle of sedimentation with neat

diagram.

2.5x2=5

SECTION B

3.

(a) The population of a city in three consecutive years i.e. 1991, 2001 and 2011 is 80,000;

250,000 and 480,000, respectively. Determine (a) The saturation population, (b) The equation

logistic curve, (c) The expected population in 2021.

(b) Enumerate various kinds of water demand and illustrate the factors which affect

demand.

SECTION C

(Answer any four questions)

4. The analysis of a hard water shows the following compositions:

Free Carbon dioxide = 3 mg/L

Alkalinity = 68 mg/L

Non-carbonate hardness = 92 mg/L

Total magnesium = 15 mg/L

Assume that it is possible to remove all but 35 mg/L of carbonate hardness with lime,

the treated water is to have a total hardness of 80 mg/L. Determine the amount of hydrated lime soda required for treatment per million litres of raw water.

5. Design the approximate dimensions of a set of rapid sand filters for treating water required population of 50,000; the rate of supply being 180 litres per day per person. The filters are to work 5000 litres per hour per m2. Assume whatever data are necessary and not given.

10

6. Describe the mechanism (with the help of chemical equations) by which the Iron and Manganese are removed from raw water in water treatment plant.

10

7. Discuss various methods of aeration during the treatment of raw water for removal of odour taste from the water.

10

8.

The distribution pipes are generally laid below the road pavements and hence their layouts generally follow the layouts of roads. Suppose you have been appointed as a Civil Engineer for the designing of layouts of pipe distribution network. What would be the different types of pipe network distributed for a particular place?

10

SECTION D

9.

A city discharges 20000 m3/day of sewage into a river whose rate of flow is 0.7 m

Determine D.O. deficit at 20 km from the following data:

River Sewage effluent

5 day B.O.D. at 200C = 3.4 mg/l 5 day B.O.D. at 200C = 45 mg/l

Temperature 230C Temperature 260C

D.O. = 8.2 mg/l D.O. = 2.0 mg/l

10.

Suppose the ground water containing 4 mg/L of hardness needs to be treated for drinking

purpose. Consider yourself as an environmental engineer, what should be the adopted methods

ing hardness for the available ground water?

Disclaimer: The Model Question Paper is only provided as guide for the students to better understand the learning expectations from them. The actual Question Paper will differ significantly in the questions that appear in the paper.

COURSE OBJECTIVES

1.The overall objective of the Lab portion of engineering geology is to identify the various geological formations and its importance in making engineering decisions. 2.Introduce the fundamentals of engineering properties of earth materials for their use in civil engineering constructions. 3.Develop quantitative skills and frame work for solving basic engineering geology problems related to geological features and geological hazards.

COURSE OUTCOMES


1.Characterize and classify various minerals and rocks on the basis of their engineering properties.

2.Assess geological hazards and develop mitigation frameworks.

3.Use seismic and electrical methods to investigate subsurface and develop a native construction plan incorporating all rel-evant aspects of geology.

4.Work in a multidisciplinary team to identify geological features of prospective civil engineering project sites.

5.Analyze ground water movements and deal with ground water problems.

CATALOG DESCRIPTION

Engineering Geology is the application of the geological sciences to civil engineering practice for the purpose of recognizing the location, design, construction, operation and maintenance of engineering works.Students will be able to know the details of rock formation and rock cycle. Students will be able to identify different minerals and find their properties. They will understand the various geological features e.g. folds and faults.

TEXT BOOKS

1.P.C. Varghese (2012), Engineering Geology for Civil Engineers, PHI Learning private limited. ISBN: 978-81-203-4495- 2.Parbin Singh, (2004), Engineering & General Geology, S.K. Kataria and Sons- Delhi. ISBN: 978-93-501-4267-7. 3. Lab manual

REFERENCE BOOKS

1.Jerome V. Degraff Robert B. Johnson (2011), Principles of Engineering Geology, Wiley India Pvt Ltd. ISBN: 978-81-265-3314-5. 2.Dr. D.V. Reddy (2010), Engineering Geology 1st Edition, Vikas Publishing House. ISBN: 978-81-259-1903-2. 3.Chadha S. K. (2009), Elements of Geological Maps for Geology, Geography & Civil Engineering, CBS Publishers & Distributors- New Delhi.ISBN: 978-81-239-0372-9. 4.Gautam Mahajan (2011), Evaluation and Development of Ground Water, APH Publishers. ISBN: 978-81-313-0339-9.

CLE252 Engineering Geology Laboratory L T P C

Version 1.03 Date of Approval: 0 0 2 1

Pre-requisites CLE212

Co-requisites

LIST OF EXPERIMENTS:

1.To conduct a study on rock formation and rock cycle. 2.To conduct a microscopic study for the identification of rocks 3.To conduct a microscopic study for the identification of minerals and their physical properties 4.To conduct a study on interior of earth on the basis of seismic model.

5.To study various geological features ; Folds and Faults 6. To conduct a microscopic study for the identification of soils and to study distribution of soils in India. 7.To study soil formation and soil erosion 8.To study various land forms, ocean structures and its compositions. 9.To conduct a study on Aquifers, groundwater and permeability of soils. 10.To conduct a study on history of earth and its evolution to present forms and its future 11.To measure dip and strike of folds with Clinometers and Brunton compass and to study geological Maps

Mode of Evaluation: The subject understanding of students will be evaluated through lab performance, lab report and viva-voce.

Components

Laboratory

Internal

SEE

Marks 50 50

Total Marks 100





1 Characterize and classify various minerals and rocks on the basis of their engineering

properties. 1, 7

2 Assess geological hazards and develop mitigation frameworks. 1, 7

3 Use seismic and electrical methods to investigate subsurface and develop a native construction

plan 1, 7

incorporating all relevant aspects of geology.

4 Work in a multidisciplinary team to identify geological features of prospective civil engineering

proj- 9

ect sites.

5 Analyze ground water movements and deal with ground water

problems. 10

En

gin

eeri

ng

Kn

ow

led

ge

Pro

ble

m a

nal

ysi

s

Des

ign

/dev

elo

pm

ent

of

solu

tio

ns

Co

ndu

ct i

nv

esti

gat

ion

s o

f co

mp

lex

pro

ble

ms

Mo

der

n t

oo

l u

sag

e

Th

e en

gin

eer

and s

oci

ety

En

vir

on

men

t an

d s

ust

ain

abil

ity

Eth

ics

Ind

ivid

ual

or

team

wo

rk

Co

mm

un

icat

ion

Pro

ject

man

agem

ent

and

fin

ance

Lif

e-lo

ng

Lea

rnin

g

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

CLE252 Engineering Geology Lab 2 1 2 1




\

CLE253 Surveying Practices L T P C



Co-requisites

COURSE OBJECTIVES

1.To teach the students basics of surveying and expose different techniques of surveying. 2.To help the students to learn the field applicability of the different survey methods.

COURSE OUTCOMES


1.Perform compass survey, theodolite survey and plane table survey.

2.Understand the concept of leveling, contouring and curve surveying.

3.Use total station to measure distances and altitude of a given point.

4.Develop skill to carry out tachometry, geodetic surveying wherever situation demands.

5.Develop skills to apply error adjustment to the recorded reading to get an accurate surveying output.

CATALOG DESCRIPTION

Surveying is the most useful and necessary part in Civil Engineering.Students will be able to perform compass survey, theodolite survey and Plane Table Survey. Students will understand the concept of leveling, contouring and curve surveying. Students will be able to use total station to measure distances and altitude of a given point.

TEXT BOOKS

1.Punmia B.C. (2005), Surveying, Volume 1, 16th Edition Laxmi Publications. ISBN: 9788170080794

2.Punmia B.C. (2005), Surveying, Volume 2, 15th Edition Laxmi Publications. ISBN: 9788170080800

3.Satheesh Gopi (2010), GPS Principles and Applications, Tata Mc Graw Hill publishing company Ltd. ISBN: 9780070141704

2. Lab manual

REFERENCE BOOKS

1.Subramaniyan R. (2010), Surveying and Levelling, Oxford University Press. ISBN: 9780195684247.

2.Kanetkar T.P. (2006), Surveying and Levelling, Vol I, Pune. ISBN: 9788185825113.

3.Kanetkar T.P. (2008), Surveying and Levelling, Vol II, Pune. ISBN: 9788185825007

LIST OF EXPERIMENTS

1.Chain Survey- Determination of area by perpendicular offsets

2.Chain Survey- Measurement of distance by chaining & ranging

3.Compass Survey- Plotting & adjustment of closed traverse

4.Theodolite Survey- Measurement of horizontal angles by method of repetition

5.Measurement of Vertical Angles and Determination of Height of an Object

6.Plane Table Survey- Radiation method

7.Levelling- Rise & Fall method

8.Levelling- Height of collimation method

9.Trignometrical Levelling- Single plane method

10.Curve Surveying- Setting out a simple circular curve by Rankine’s method

11.Contouring- To determine the contours for a given location

12.GPS Survey- Coordinates & Distance measurement using GPS

13.Total Station- Measurement of Altitude of Given Elevated Points

14.Total Station- Measurement of distance & coordinates of given points

15.Stereoscope- Use of stereoscope for 3D viewing

16.Stereoscope- Determination of height of objects from a stereo pair using the parallax bar.

Mode of Evaluation: The subject understanding of students will be evaluated through lab performance , lab report and viva-voce.

Components

Laboratory

Internal

SEE

Marks 50 50

Total Marks 100


1 Perform compass survey, theodolite survey and plane table survey 1,2,5,6,9,10

2 Understand the concept of leveling, contouring and curve surveying. 1,2,5,6,9,10

3 Use total station to measure distances and altitude of a given point. 1,2,5,6,9,10

4 Develop skill to carry out tachometry, geodetic surveying wherever situation demands. 1, 2, 9

5 Develop skills to apply error adjustment to the recorded reading to get an accurate surveying output. 2




En

gin

eeri

ng

Kn

ow

led

ge

Pro

ble

m a

nal

ysi

s

Des

ign

/dev

elo

pm

ent

of

solu

tio

ns

Co

nd

uct

in

ves

tig

atio

ns

of

com

ple

x p

rob

lem

s

Mo

der

n t

oo

l u

sag

e

Th

e en

gin

eer

and s

oci

ety

En

vir

on

men

t an

d s

ust

ain

abil

ity

Eth

ics

Ind

ivid

ual

or

team

wo

rk

Co

mm

un

icat

ion

Pro

ject

man

agem

ent

and f

inan

ce

Lif

e-lo

ng

Lea

rnin

g

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

CLE253

Surveying

2 3

3 2

2 2

Practices

COURSE OBJECTIVES

1.Understand the basic principles and concepts of unit operations and processes involved in water treatment.

2.Design of unit operations and processes involved in water treatment.

3.Evaluation of the performance of water treatment plants.

COURSE OUTCOMES


1.Calculate the pH value of a given water sample.

2.Determine turbidity, alkanity and hardness of water.

3.Find the BOD and COD of a given water sample.

CATALOG DESCRIPTION

Water supply and its treatment system are attached with the life cycle of every human being. It is essential to have the knowledge of this course for identifying problems associated with the treatment of the water and its supply. Students learn effect of population dynamics on water demand, physicochemical principles applied in water treatment, unit operations, principles and processes for pretreatment and treatment of raw water, principles, functions and design of different treatment units and processes. Upon comple-tion, students should be able to design and construct the water treatment plant for a single unit, residential area or for society.

TEXT BOOKS

1.Garg S.K. (2010), Environmental Engineering Vol. I Water Supply Engineering, Khanna Publishers. ISBN: 9788174091208

2.H.S.Peavy, D.R.Rowe & George Tchobanoglous (2005), Environmental Engineering, McGraw-Hill Company, New Delhi. ISBN: 9789380358246

3.Lab manual

REFERENCE BOOKS

1.Nathanson, Jerry A. (2007), Basic Environmental Technology: Water Supply, Waste Management, and Pollution Control, 5th ed., PHI Learning Private Limited ISBN: 978-81-203-3836-4

2.Rang

wala (1999), Water supply & Sanitary Engineering, Charotar Publishing House, Anand-16th Edition. ISBN: 9788185594590

3.Metcalf and Eddy (2003), Wastewater Engineering, Treatment and reuse, Tata McGraw-Hill Edition, Fourth edition. ISBN:9780070495395


1.To determine the pH of a given water sample.

2.To determine the total solids, suspended solids, dissolved solids and volatile solids in wastewater.

3.To determine the turbidity and specific conductivity of the given water samples.

4.To determine the Alkalinity of given water sample.

5.To determine total hardness, permanent hardness and temporary hardness for given water sample.

6.To determine the chloride concentration of a given water sample.

7.To determine amount of sulphates in a given sample

8.To determine the dissolved oxygen content in a given water sample.

9.To determine BOD of the given wastewater sample.

10.To determine the COD of given sample.

11.To determine the optimum dosage of coagulant for turbidity removal of a given water sample.

225


Components

Laboratory

Internal

SEE

Marks 50 50

Total Marks 100



Sl. No. Course Outcomes (COs) Mapped Programme

Outcomes

1 Calculate the pH value of a given water

sample. 3,6,7,8,9,10

2 Determine turbidity, alkanity and hardness of water. 3,6,7,8,9,10

3 Find the BOD and COD of a given water sample. 3,6,7,8,9,10

En

gin

eeri

ng K

no

wle

dg

e

Pro

ble

m a

nal

ysi

s

Des

ign

/dev

elo

pm

ent

of

solu

tio

ns

Co

ndu

ct i

nv

esti

gat

ion

s o

f co

mp

lex

pro

ble

ms

Mo

der

n t

oo

l u

sag

e

Th

e en

gin

eer

and s

oci

ety

En

vir

on

men

t an

d s

ust

ain

abil

ity

Eth

ics

Ind

ivid

ual

or

team

wo

rk

Co

mm

un

icat

ion

Pro

ject

man

agem

ent

and

fin

ance

Lif

e-lo

ng

Lea

rnin

g

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

CLE248 Water Analysis Laboratory 2 3 3 2 1 1




CLE215 Building Materials and Technology L T P C



Co-requisites

COURSE OBJECTIVES

1.To teach students about the physical and mechanical properties of various construction materials and their testing proce-dure.

2.To teach students about the principles and methods to be followed in constructing various components of a building.

3.To teach students about assessment of damages and methods of repairs and restoration.

COURSE OUTCOMES


1.Demonstrate the relevant BIS testing procedure to be carried out to ascertain the quality of building materials.

2.Develop ability to choose the modern construction materials appropriate to the climate and functional aspects of the buildings.

3.Ability to supervise the construction technique to be followed in brick and stone masonry, concreting, flooring, roofing and plastering etc.

4.Able to study the causes of deterioration, crack pattern, assessment of damages.

5.Learn about the construction techniques in repairing and rehabilitation of structures.

CATALOG DESCRIPTION

The construction of buildings and structures relies on having a thorough understanding of building materials. Without this knowl-edge it would not be possible to build safe, efficient and long-lasting buildings, structures and dwellings. This course provides an over-view of the basic properties of wide range of building material available to civil engineers for various usages. Students also learn the standard testing procedures of engineering materials as per provision of various IS Codes. Besides this students also learn about various bonds used for construction of brick and stone masonry widely, plastering, damp proofing its requirements and methods used in construction, need and significance of ventilation, methods of insulation, construction equipment used. Last module of course introduces students to repairs and rehabilitation of structures, crack pattern, causes of deterioration of structures, assessment of damages and methods employed for repairs and restoration. Upon completion, students should be able to demonstrate relevant BIS testing procedure to be carried out to ascertain the quality of building materials, able to choose the modern construction ma-terials appropriate to the climate and functional aspects of the buildings, supervise the construction techniques to be followed in brick and stone masonry, concreting, flooring, roofing, plastering, damp proofing etc.

TEXT BOOKS

1.Rangwala, (2011), Engineering Materials, 38th edition, Charotar Publishing House Pvt. Ltd. ISBN: 978-93-80358-26-0.

2.Ashok Kumar Jain, Dr. B.C. Punmia, Arun Kumar Jain (2009), Building Construction, Laxmi Publications Pvt. Ltd, ISBN: 978-81-318-0428-5.

3.M.L.Gambhir, (2009), Concrete Technology, Tata McGraw Hill Education, ISBN: 978-00-701-5136-9.

REFERENCE BOOKS

1.P.C.Varghese, (2009), Engineering Materials, 1st edition, PHI Learning, ISBN: 978-81-203-2848-8.

2.S.K.Duggal, (2008), Building Materials, 3rd Edition, New Age International Publishers, ISBN: 978-81-224-2392-1

3.Sushil Kumar (2010), Building Construction, Standard Publishers Distributors, ISBN: 978-81-801-4168-3.

4.M.S.Shetty, (2009), Concrete Technology: Theory and Practice, S.Chand Publishers, ISBN: 978-81-219-0003-4

5.A.R.Santhakumar (2006), Concrete Technology, Oxford University Press, ISBN: 978-01-956-7153-7




1

Demonstrate the relevant BIS testing procedure to be carried out to ascertain the quality of building

3 materials.

2 Develop ability to choose the modern construction materials appropriate to the climate and func- 2, 5

tional aspects of the buildings

3 Ability to supervise the construction technique to be followed in brick and stone masonry, concret- 3

ing, flooring, roofing and plastering etc

4 Able to study the causes of deterioration, crack pattern, assessment of damages 4, 7

5 Learn about the construction techniques in repairing and rehabilitation of structures. 5, 6, 12

En

gin

eeri

ng

Kn

ow

led

ge

Pro

ble

m a

nal

ysi

s

Des

ign

/dev

elo

pm

ent

of

solu

tio

ns

Co

nd

uct

in

ves

tig

atio

ns

of

com

ple

x p

rob

lem

s

Mo

der

n t

oo

l u

sag

e

Th

e en

gin

eer

and s

oci

ety

En

vir

on

men

t an

d s

ust

ain

abil

ity

Eth

ics

Ind

ivid

ual

or

team

wo

rk

Co

mm

un

icat

ion

Pro

ject

man

agem

ent

and

fin

ance

Lif

e-lo

ng

Lea

rnin

g

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

CLE221 Building Materials & Technology 3 2 2 1 2 1




Model Question Paper

End Term Examination

B. Tech. (Civil Engineering) IV Semester

Course Code: CLE215

Course Title: Building Materials and Technology


Time: 3 Hours

Max. Marks:100



SECTION A

1.

(a) Give the dimensions of brick.

(b) The aluminum is coated with its oxide on its surface. Why?

(c)List of sound insulating materials.

(d)Name the types of steel based on carbon content.

(e)The indentation is provided on top face of a brick. Give reason.

1x5 = 5

2. (a) Write a note on the methods of seasoning of timber.

(b) List the specifications of sand for general use in buildings.

2.5x2=5

SECTION B

3.

(a) Write the importance of frog in a brick. Give the classification of

bricks with their uses.

(b) Enlist the several construction equipments used at the site with

proper explanation about their parts and their applications.

2x10=20

SECTION C (Answer any four questions)

4. Define the term acoustics. State the acoustic requirements of an auditorium. 10

5. Explain the several tests with steps which are being performed on stones

before using them for construction.

10

6. Explain the different causes of deterioration of structures. 10

7. Explain the use of asbestos sheets for roof coverings and state the points to

be noted while using them.

10

8.

Discuss the properties of modern building materials used in building

construction with their applications in civil engineering (any five materials).

10

SECTION D

9. Discuss fire resistive construction and the several fire extinguishing

equipments required for safety against fire resistance. Also, briefly

describe that how the foundation and walls of building are made damp

proof.

15

10.

Explain pre-fabricated structures with their advantages and disadvantages.

Also, give the methods of repairs and restoration of old monuments and

buildings.

15


CLE315 Soil Mechanics L T P C


Pre-requisites//Exposure

Co-requisites

COURSE OBJECTIVES

1.To impart the fundamental concepts of soil mechanics.

2.To understand the bearing capacity.

3.To know the importance of index properties like grain size, consistency limits, soil classification.

4.To understand the concept of compaction and consolidation of soils.

COURSE OUTCOMES


1.Give an engineering classification of a given soil.

2.Understand the principle of effective stress, and then calculate stresses that influence soil behavior.

3.Determine soil deformation parameters, and calculate settlement magnitude and rate of settlement.

4.Specify soil compaction requirements.

CATALOG DESCRIPTION

Basics of soil mechanics are very essential for a civil engineer. Its properties can be easily understood by weight volume relations and classification of soil by index properties. Effect of water and air within the soil has given a lot of scope for research. The most important parameters of soil which affect the shear strength of soil are its cohesion and friction angles. Concept of stress distribu-tion in soils is obtained by Boussinesq’s equation and Westergaard’s equation.

TEXT BOOKS

1.Dr.K.R.Arora (2011), Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering, Standard Publishers Distributors, Delhi, ISBN: 978-81-801-4112-6.

2.B.C. Punmia, Ashok Kr. Jain (2005), Soil Mechanics and Foundations Sixteenth Edition, Laxmi Publications. ISBN: 978-81-700-8791-5.

R

E

FERENCE BOOKS

1.Gopal Ranjan, A.S.R Rao (2000), Basic and Applied Soil Mechanics 2nd Edition, New Age International. ISBN: 978-81-224-1223-9.

2.William Powrie, Soil Mechanics: Concepts and Applications, Second Edition, Spon Press. ISBN: 978-04-153-1156-4. 3.Karl Terzaghi, Soil Mechanics in Engineering Practice, Warren Press. ISBN: 978-14-465-1039-1. 4.A. Aysen (2004), Problem Solving in Soil Mechanics, Taylor & Francis Group. ISBN: 978-04-153-8392-9.

COURSE CONTENT

Unit I: Weight volume relations and Index properties 12

lecture hours

Distribution of soil in India, Soil - Types, 3-phase diagram, Weight-volume relations, Classification, Index properties ( Atterberg’s limits), Theory of compaction, Importance of geotechnical engineering.

Unit II: Soil water and Permeability 8 lecture

hours

Soil water - Effective and neutral stresses – Flow of water through soils – Permeability – Darcy’s law –Seepage and flow-nets - Quick sand conditions.

Unit III: Stress distribution in soils 7 lecture hours

231

Vertical pressure distribution- Boussinesq’s equation for point load and uniformly distributed

loads of different shapes– Newmark’s influence chart – Westergaard’s equation – Isobar diagram

– Pressure bulb - Contact pressure, Earth Pressures Theories.

Unit IV: Compressibility and Consolidation 8 lecture

hours

Compressibility – e-log p curve – Pre-consolidation pressure - Primary consolidation – Terzaghi’sconsolidation theory - Laboratory consolidation test – Determination of Cv by Taylor’s and Casagrande’s methods.

Unit V: Shear strength of soils 9 lecture

hours

Stress analysis by Mohr’s circle - Mohr’s strength theory – Shear strength of soils – Mohr-Coloumb strength envelope – Laboratory shear tests – Direct shear test – Triaxial compression – Unconfined compression test – Vane shear test – Shear strength of saturated cohesive soils – Shear strength of cohesion less soils - conditions for liquefaction.

Mode of Evaluation: The subject understanding of students will be evaluated from CAT – I ,II

and SEE performance.

Components

Theory

Internal

SEE

Marks 50 50

Total Marks 100

Relat

ionship between the Course Outcomes (COs) and Program Outcomes (POs)



1 Give an engineering classification of a given soil. 1,8

2 Understand the principle of effective stress, and then calculate stresses that influence soil behavior. 2, 12

3 Determine soil deformation parameters, and calculate settlement magnitude and rate of settlement. 2, 4, 7

4 Specify soil compaction requirements. 5

En

gin

eeri

ng

Kn

ow

led

ge

Pro

ble

m a

nal

ysi

s

Des

ign

/dev

elo

pm

ent

of

solu

tio

ns

Co

nd

uct

in

ves

tig

atio

nso

f co

mp

lex

pro

ble

ms

Mo

der

n t

oo

l u

sag

e

Th

e en

gin

eer

and s

oci

ety

En

vir

on

men

t an

d s

ust

ain

abil

ity

Eth

ics

Ind

ivid

ual

or

team

wo

rk

Co

mm

un

icat

ion

Pro

ject

man

agem

ent

and

fin

ance

Lif

e-lo

ng

Lea

rnin

g

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

CLE315 Soil Mechanics 2 2 1 2 1 1




2

3

2

C

O

U

R

S

E

O

B

J

E

C

T

I

V

E

S

1.To kno

CLE223 Strength of Materials L T P C



Co-requisites

w the concept of stresses and strains.

2.To know the concept of shear force and bending moment.

3.To calculate deflection in beams and trusses.

COURSE OUTCOMES


1.Understand the concepts of stress and strain.

2.Analyse shear force and bending moment for different types of beams.

3.Calculate deflections in beams and trusses.

CATALOGUE DESCRIPTION

Students learn the concept of stresses and strains, elastic constants, principle stresses and strains and torsion. Students learn the con-cept of shear force diagram and bending moment diagram. Students also learn to calculate deflection of beams by different methods and the concept of strain energy. Students understand different formulas to calculate critical load on columns. Upon completion, students should be able to calculate stresses, strains, shear force and bending moment for beams, deflections in beams by different methods and critical load on columns.

TEXT BOOKS

1.Ramamrutham S. and Narayanan R. (2008), Strength of Materials, 3rd Edition, Dhanpat Rai Publications Company, ISBN: 9788187433545.

REFERENCE BOOKS

1.Gere J. M. and Thimoshenko S. P. (2008), Mechanics of Materials, 8th Edition, CBS Publishers & Distributors, ISBN: 9780534417932.

2.Popov E. P. (2009), Engineering Mechanics of Solids, 2nd Edition, Prentice Hall Publisher,

ISBN: 9788120321076.

3.Bansal R. K. (2010), Strength of Materials, 4th Edition, Laxmi Publications, ISBN:

9788131808146.

C

O

U

R

S

E

C

O

N

T

E

N

T

U

n

i

t

I

:

P

r

i

n

c

i

p

l

e Stresses & Strains and Torsion 6 lecture

hours

Principle stresses and strains - Mohr’s circle – Introduction to torsion - Torsion of shafts of circular

section - torque and twist

- shear stress due to torque – tensor notations

Unit II:Shear Force and Bending Moment 6 lecture

hours

Types of beams and supports - shear force and bending moment diagram - bending stresses and shear stresses in beams

Unit III: Deflection of Beams 6 lecture

hours

Introduction - Failure Criteria of beams - Theory of bending - deflection of beams by Macaulay’s method - moment area method and conjugate beam method - application of principle of impulse and momentum.

Unit IV : Strain Energy 6 lecture

hours

Stain Energy - Castigliano’s theorem - calculation of deflection in statically determinate beams and trusses - Unit load methods - Williot Mohr’s diagram.

Unit V: Theory of Columns 6 lecture

hours

Theory of Columns - long column and short column - Euler’s formula - Rankine’s formula - Secant formula - beam column.

Mode of Evaluation: The subject understanding of students will be evaluated from CAT – I ,II

and SEE performance.

Components

Theory

Internal

SEE

Marks 50 50

Total Marks 100





1 Understand the concepts of stress and

strain. 1, 12

2 Analyse shear force and bending moment for different types of

beams. 2

3 Calculate deflections in beams and trusses. 3

En

gin

eeri

ng K

no

wle

dg

e

Pro

ble

m a

nal

ysi

s

Des

ign

/dev

elo

pm

ent

of

solu

tio

ns

Co

nd

uct

in

ves

tig

atio

nso

f co

mp

lex

pro

ble

ms

Mo

der

n t

oo

l u

sag

e

Th

e en

gin

eer

and s

oci

ety

En

vir

on

men

t an

d s

ust

ain

abil

ity

Eth

ics

Ind

ivid

ual

or

team

wo

rk

Co

mm

un

icat

ion

Pro

ject

man

agem

ent

and

fin

ance

Lif

e-lo

ng

Lea

rnin

g

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

CLE223 Strength of Materials 2 3 2 1




Theory

M

O

D

E

L

Q

U

ESTION PAPER

Name:

Admission No:

Batch No:


Course : CLE223 –Strength of Materials


Note: All questions in Section A, B and D are compulsory. Attempt any four question from section C


SECTION A

1.

(a) ‘Poisson’s ratio is an important parameter in the analysis of structures’.

Give reasons.

(b) ‘Shear stress diagram is parabolic’. Justify your answer.

(c)’ Macaulay’s method is very useful for calculating deflections of beam’.

How?

(d) ‘Shear force is one order less than bending moment’. Give reasons.

(e)’Effective length of columns is necessary for calculating critical load of

columns’. Justify your answer.

1x5 = 5

2. (a) Define strength of a section.

(b) State Castigliano’s theorem.

2.5x2=5

SECTION B

3.

(a) Draw the shear force diagram and bending moment diagram for the beam shown

in figure 1.

(b) Calculate the vertical deflection and rotation at point “B” for the beam shown in

figure 2. Use Macaulay’s method. EI is constant.

2x10=20

SECTION C


4. The internal diameter of a hollow shaft is two-thirds of its external diameter.

Compare its resistance to torsion with that of a solid shaft of the same weight and

material.

10

5. Discuss briefly about the functions of hinge support, roller support and fixed

support.

10

6. Write a short note on conjugate beam method. 10

7. Calculate the vertical deflection at point “B” for the beam shown in figure 2. Use

strain energy method. EI is constant.

10

8.

Calculate the Euler’s buckling load for a column of tee-section, the flange width

being 12 cm, overall depth 20 cm and with both flange and stem being 1.2 cm

thick. The column is 4 m long and fixed at both ends. E= 2.1X105 N/mm2.

10

SECTION D

9. Discuss briefly about the practical application of calculating bending stress

for a beam section.

Calculate the maximum bending stresses for the beam shown in figure 3.

Also draw the bending stress diagram. The beam section is rectangular (250

mm X 500 mm) all through.

15

10.

Describe briefly about the importance of calculation of deflection of beam.

Calculate the vertical deflection at point “B” for the beam shown in figure 2.

Use Moment Area method. EI is constant.

15

CLE314 Highway Engineering L T P C


Pre-requisites//Exposure --

Co-requisites --

COURSE OBJECTIVES

1. To impart the knowledge in Highway Geometrics, Traffic Engineering, materials, construction and design of pavements

COURSE OUTCOMES

1.Design various geometric elements of highways.

2.Understand the procedure to collect the traffic data for design and traffic management.

3.Test the highway materials as per IS/IRC guidelines.

4.Do structural design of flexible and rigid pavements.

5.Know various highway constructions techniques and its Maintenance.


Highway Engineering is a prominent aspect of surface transport. With basic knowledge of materials and soil mechanics, highway engineering deals with planning, design, construction, operation and maintenance of all types of roads.During the course, the students learn about aggregate crushing value test and aggregate impact test. Students also learn about Los Angeles Abrasion Test, Penetration Test of Bitumen, Ductility Test of Bitumen, Softening Point Test of Bitumen, Flash and Fire Point Test of Bitumen and Viscosity Test of Bitumen. Students also understand about California Bearing Ratio Test.

TEXT BOOKS

1. Khanna.S.K., and Justo. C.E.G., (2011), Highway Engineering, Ninth Edition, Nem.

REFERENCE BOOKS

1.Kadiyali.L.R., and Lal.N.B., (2005), Principles and Practice of Highway Engineering, Fourth Edition, Khanna Publishers, ISBN- 9788174091659.

2.Chakroborthy Partha, and Das Animesh, (2003), Principles of Transportation Engineering, Eighth Printing, Prentice-Hall of India, ISBN-9788120320840.

3.Rao.G.V., (1996), Principles of Transportation and Highway Engineering, Tata McGraw-Hill Co, ISBN- 9780074623633.

4.Khisty.C.J., and Lall.B.K., (2003), Transportation Engineering, Indian Edition, Prentice-Hall of India, ISBN-9788120322127.

COURSE CONTENT

Unit I: Highway and Traffic Planning 7 lecture hours

Introduction to Transportation modes – Highway alignment and field surveys – Master Plan – Transport economics – Traffic Studies – Volume, speed, origin and destination studies.

Introduction to Multi-modal Transportation, Automated Transport systems, High urban transport, Impact of transport on environment.

Unit II: Highway Geometrics 14 lecture hours

Highway classification (Rural and Urban roads), Road Geometrics – Highway cross section elements – camber – Sight Distance, Horizontal Alignment Design, Super Elevation, Extra widening, Transition curves, Set back distance, Design of Vertical curves.

Unit III: Traffic Engineering 6 lecture hours

Traffic characteristics, road user & vehicular characteristics, traffic studies, traffic operations, traffic control devices, intelligent transport systems, Intersections, Interchanges, Parking Layout & Road signs.

Unit IV:Highway Materials and Construction 7 lecture hours

Material requirement for pavements – Soil classification for Highway – Soil tests – CBR and Plate Load Test, Aggregate – materials testing and specification, Bitumen – material testing and specification construction of bituminous and rigid pavements, Highway Maintenance – Material recycling.

Unit V: Highway Design 9 lecture hours

Pavement Analysis – Factors affecting pavement thickness – Soil – Wheel load – Temperature – environmental factors; Flexible Pavement Design – Axle Load surveys – CBR method of Design, Rigid Pavement Design – IRC method.


Components

Theory

Internal

SEE

Marks 50 50

Total Marks 100


Mapping between Cos and Pos


1 Design various geometric elements of highways. 2, 3

2 Understand the procedure to collect the traffic data for design and traffic management. 3

3 Test the highway materials as per IS/IRC guidelines. 6, 9

4 Do structural design of flexible and rigid pavements. 3, 6

5 Know various highway constructions techniques and its Maintenance. 7, 10

En

gin

eeri

ng K

no

wle

dg

e

Pro

ble

m a

nal

ysi

s

Des

ign

/dev

elo

pm

ent

of

solu

tio

ns

Co

ndu

ct a

nd

in

ves

tig

atio

no

f co

mp

lex

pro

ble

ms

Mo

der

n t

oo

l u

sag

e

Th

e en

gin

eer

and s

oci

ety

En

vir

on

men

t an

d s

ust

ain

abil

ity

E

thic

s

Ind

ivid

ual

or

team

wo

rk

Co

mm

un

icat

ion

Pro

ject

man

agem

ent

and

fin

ance

Lif

e-lo

ng

Lea

rnin

g

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

CLE314 Highway Engineering 2 3 3 2 1




CLE323 Principles and Design of Wastewater Treatment and Disposal Systems L T P C



Co-requisites

COURSE OBJECTIVES

1.To teach students the basic principles and concepts of unit operations and processes involved in wastewater treatment.

2.To develop student’s skill in the basic design of unit operations and processes involved in wastewater treatment.

3.To develop a student’s skill in evaluating the performance of wastewater treatment plants.

COURSE OUTCOMES


1.Demonstrate an ability to recognize the type of unit operations and processes involved in wastewater treatment plants.

2.Demonstrate an ability to choose the appropriate unit operations and processes required for satisfactory treatment of wastewater.

3.Demonstrate an ability to design individual unit operation or process appropriate to the situation by applying physical, chemical, biological and engineering principles.

4.Demonstrate ability in design of wastewater treatments units in a cost effective and sustainable way and evaluate its per-formance to meet the desired health and environment related goals.

5.Recognize the importance of wastewater treatment to protect the water resources.

CATALOG DESCRIPTION

Proper treatment of wastewater reduces health risks to humans and animals and prevents surface and groundwater contamination. Inadequate treatment of wastewater allows bacteria, viruses, and other disease-causing pathogens to enter groundwater and surface water. This course provides an overview of type of units operations and processes involved in wastewater treatment and disposal including design of primary and secondary treatment units. On completion of this course students will be able to identify the need for primary and secondary treatment of wastewater in a cost-effective and sustainable way. The students will also learn the impor-tance of wastewater treatment to protect water resources.

TEXT BOOKS

1.Garg.S.K, (2010), Environmental Engineering-Sewage Disposal and Air Pollution Engineering, 1st Edition, Khanna Publishers, ISBN- 978-81-740-9230-4.

2.Metcalf & Eddy, (2002), Wastewater Engineering Treatment & Reuse, Tata McGraw-Hill Education, ISBN: 978-00-704-9539-5

REFERENCE BOOKS

1.Howard S. Peavy, Donald R. Rowe, George Tchobanoglous, (2001), Environmental Engineering, Tata McGraw-Hill Education, ISBN No: 978-00-710-0231-8.

2.Hammer & Hammer Jr., Water and Wastewater Technology, 7th Edition, ISBN-978-81-203-4601-7.

3.Rakesh Kumar, R.N.Singh, (2009), Municipal Water and Wastewater Treatment, Teri Press, ISBN: 978-81-799-3188-2.

4.Dr.P.N.Modi, (2008), Sewage Treatment Disposal and Wastewater Engineering, 2nd Edition, ISBN-978-81-900-8932-4.

5.Shyam. R.Asolekar, Soli. J.Arceivala, Wastewater Treatment for Pollution Control and Reuse, 3rd Edition, Tata McGraw-Hill Education, ISBN: 978-00-706-2099-5.

COURSE CONTENT

Unit I: Wastewater Treatment

Physical, chemical and biological principles involved in wastewater treatment and designing of unit-operations and processes. Per-missible standards for wastewater disposal.

Unit II: Pre and Primary Treatment 10 lecture hours

Objectives-Unit operations and processes-Principles, functions and design of flash mixers, screens, sedimentation tanks and sand filters-Disinfection-Aeration, grit chambers and primary sedimentation tanks.

Unit III: SecondaryTreatment 8 lecture hours

Secondary Treatment-Activated Sludge Process and Trickling filters; other treatment methods-Stabilization Ponds and Septic Tanks-Advances in Sewage Treatment

Unit IV: Sewage Disposal and Sludge Management 9 lecture hours

Methods-Dilution-Self-purification of surface water bodies-Oxygen Sag Curve-Land disposal-Sewage Farming-Deep well injec-tion-Soil dispersion system-Thickening-Sludge digestion-Bio-gas recovery, Drying beds-Conditioning and Dewatering-Sludge dis-posal. Introduction to solid waste management, landfills and EIA

Unit V: Waste Disposal System 9 lecture hours

Wastewater Treatment-Typical layouts-Screens-Grit Chamber-Sedimentation tanks-Trickling filter-Activated Sludge, sludge Di-gester-Septic tanks-Soil Dispersion System-Waste Stabilization pond

Mode of Evaluation: The subject understanding of students will be evaluated through CAT-I and II Semester End Examination.

Components

Theory

Internal

SEE

Marks 50 50

Total Marks 100




1 Demonstrate an ability to recognize the type of unit operations and processes involved in wastewater 2

treatment plants.

2 Demonstrate an ability to choose the appropriate unit operations and processes required for satisfac- 6

tory treatment of wastewater

3 Demonstrate an ability to design individual unit operation or process appropriate to the situation by 3, 6, 7

applying physical, chemical, biological and engineering principles

4 Demonstrate ability in design of wastewater treatments units in a cost effective and sustainable way 3, 7, 8

and evaluate its performance to meet the desired health and environment related goals

5 Recognize the importance of wastewater treatment to protect the water resources 7, 8

En

gin

eeri

ng

Kn

ow

led

ge

Pro

ble

m a

nal

ysi

s

Des

ign

/dev

elo

pm

ent

of

solu

tio

ns

Co

nd

uct

in

ves

tig

atio

ns

of

com

ple

x p

rob

lem

s

Mo

der

n t

oo

l u

sag

e

Th

e en

gin

eer

and s

oci

ety

En

vir

on

men

t an

d s

ust

ain

abil

ity

Eth

ics

Ind

ivid

ual

or

team

wo

rk

Co

mm

un

icat

ion

Pro

ject

man

agem

ent

and

fin

ance

Lif

e-lo

ng

Lea

rnin

g

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

CLE323 PDWTDS 2 2 3 2




Theory

Model Question Paper Name.

Enrolment No.


B. Tech. (Civil Engineering) V Semester

Course Code: CLE323 Course Title: Principles and Design of Waste Water Treatment & Disposal Systems


Time: 3 Hours Max. Marks:100



SECTION A

1.(a) The quantity of water required for industries cannot be connected to the density of population. Justify logically.

(b) The extent of bacteria removal is more in slow sand filters as compared to rapid sand filters but still rapid sand filters are preferred. Justify with reason.

(c) Define turbidity in terms of quality and standard values.

(d) Define recarbonation process in water softening.

(e) Define BOD and COD 1x5 = 5

2.(a) Write a short note on Ideal Population Growth Curve with neat diagram.

(b) Mention basic working principle of sedimentation with neat diagram . 2.5x2=5

SECTION B 2x10=20

3.(a) The population of a city in three consecutive years i.e. 1991, 2001 and 2011 is 80,000; 250,000 and 480,000, respectively. Determine (i) The saturation population, (ii) The equation of logistic curve, (iii) The expected population in 2021.

(b) A wastewater is expected to have BOD5 at 20°C of about 150 mg/L. The initial DO of dilution water is 8.0 mg/L and the K value is known to be 0.23 per day. Calculate the dilution requirement for BOD determination. What would be the BOD8 be if the test were run at 15°C?

SECTION C


4. The analysis of a hard water shows the following compositions: 10

Free Carbon dioxide = 7 mg/L

Alkalinity = 78 mg/L

Non-carbonate hardness = 81 mg/L

Total magnesium = 11 mg/L

Assume that it is possible to remove all but 35 mg/L of carbonate hardness with lime, and that the treated water is to have a total hardness of

80 mg/L. Determine the amount of hydrated lime and soda required for treatment per million litres of raw water.

5. Enumerate various kinds of water demand and illustrate the factors which affect per capita demand. 10

6. The population of a city in three consecutive years i.e. 1991, 2001 and 2011 is 80,000; 250,000 and 480,000, respectively. Determine (a) The saturation population, (b) The equation of logistic curve, (c) The expected population in 2021. 10

7. Write a short note on self purification in natural stream with the discussion of factors that affect self purification in natural streams and also draw a well labeled diagram of oxygen sag curve. 10

8. The distribution pipes are generally laid below the road pavements and hence their layouts generally follow the layouts of roads. Suppose you have been appointed as a Civil Engineer for the designing of layouts of pipe distribution network. What would be the different types of pipe network distributed for a particular place? 10

SECTION D

9. A city discharges 70000 m3/day of sewage into a river whose rate of flow is 0.11 m3/sec.

Determine D.O. deficit at 60 km from the following data:

River Sewage effluent

5 day B.O.D. at 200C = 3.4 mg/l 5 day B.O.D. at 200C = 65 mg/l

Temperature 250C Temperature 240C

D.O. = 8.8 mg/l D.O. = 2.2 mg/l

Velocity of mix = 0.25 m/sec, K2=0.4, K1 = 0.23/day. 15

10 . Suppose the ground water containing 4 mg/L of hardness needs to be treated for drinking purpose. Consider yourself as an environmental engineer, what should be the adopted methods for removing hardness for the available ground water?

15

CLE355 Soil Mechanics Laboratory L T P C


Pre-requisites//Exposure CLE218

Co-requisites --

COURSE OBJECTIVES

1.To impart the fundamental concepts of soil mechanics.

2.To understand the concept of bearing capacity.

3.To know the importance of index properties like grain size, consistency limits, soil classification.

4.To understand the concept of compaction and consolidation of soils.

COURSE OUTCOMES


1.Give an engineering classification of a given soil.

2.Understand the principle of effective stress, and then calculate stresses that influence soil behavior.

3.Determine soil deformation parameters, and calculate settlement magnitude and rate of settlement.

4.Specify soil compaction requirements.

5.Conduct laboratory tests, and obtain soil properties and parameters from the test observations and results.

CATALOG DESCRIPTION

Students will learn to determine moisture content and specific gravity of soil fraction. Students will understand to determine the consistency limits and in-situ density of compacted soils by using core cutter & pouring cylinder methods. Students will also understand to determine the relative density of given coarse grained materials and coefficient of permeability of given soil sample by constant head and variable head method. Students will also learn to determine unconfined compressive strength of a given soil sample and the shear parameters of soil by Undrained Triaxial Test.

Basics of soil mechanics is very essential for a civil engineers, its properties can be easily understand by weight volume relations and classification of soil by index properties. Effect of water and air within the soil has given the lot of scope for research, and results compressibility and consolidation respectively. The most important parameters of soil which affects the shear strength of soil are its cohesion and friction angles. Concept of stress distribution in soils has been analyzed by Boussinesq’s equation, Westergaard’s equation and earth pressure is also analyzed for various cases.

TEXT BOOKS

1.Dr.K.R.Arora (2011), Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering, Standard Publishers Distributors, Delhi, ISBN: 978-81-801-4112-6.

2.Arun Kr. Jain, B.C. Punmia, Ashok Kr. Jain (2005), Soil Mechanics and Foundations Sixteenth Edition, Laxmi Publica-tions. ISBN: 978-81-700-8791-5.

3.Lab manual

REFERENCE BOOKS

1.Gopal Ranjan, A.S.R Rao (2000), Basic and Applied Soil Mechanics 2nd Edition, New Age International. ISBN: 978-81-224-1223-9.

2.William Powrie, Soil Mechanics: Concepts and Applications, Second Edition, Spon Press. ISBN: 978-04-153-1156-4.

3.Karl Terzaghi, Soil Mechanics in Engineering Practice, Warren Press. ISBN: 978-14-465-1039-1.


1.To determine moisture content of soil

2.To determine the specific gravity of soil fraction passing 4.75mm I.S sieve by density bottle/Pycnometer bottle

3.To determine the grain size distribution curve for given soil sample by sieve analysis and hydrometer analysis.

4.To determine the consistency limits (i.e Liquid limit, Plastic limit & Shrinkage limit)of given samples

5.To determine in-situ density of compacted soils by using core cutter & pouring cylinder methods.

6.To determine the relative density of given coarse grained materials

7.To determine the maximum dry density and optimum moisture content for the given soil sample.

8.To determine coefficient of permeability of given soil sample by constant head and variable head method.

9.To determine unconfined compressive strength of a given soil sample

10.To determine shear strength of a given soil specimen using vane shear apparatus

11.To determine shear strength of a given soil specimen using direct shear apparatus

12.To determine the shear parameters of soil by Undrained Triaxial Test

Mode of Evaluation: The subject understanding of students will be evaluated from lab performance, Lab reports and Viva voce.

Components

Laboratory

Internal

SEE

Laboratory

Marks 50

50

Total Marks 100




1 Give an engineering classification of a given soil. 1

2 Understand the principle of effective stress, and then calculate stresses that influence soil behavior. 2, 12

3 Determine soil deformation parameters, and calculate settlement magnitude and rate of settlement. 2, 4, 7

4 Specify soil compaction requirements. 5

5 Conduct laboratory tests, and obtain soil properties and parameters from the test observations and

results. 8, 9, 10

En

gin

eeri

ng

Kn

ow

led

ge

Pro

ble

m a

nal

ysi

s

Des

ign

/dev

elo

pm

ent

of

solu

tio

ns

Co

nd

uct

in

ves

tig

atio

nso

f co

mp

lex

pro

ble

ms

Mo

der

n t

oo

l u

sag

e

The

engin

eer

and s

oci

ety

En

vir

on

men

t an

d s

ust

ain

abil

ity

E

thic

s

Ind

ivid

ual

or

team

wo

rk

Co

mm

un

icat

ion

Pro

ject

man

agem

ent

and f

inan

ce

Lif

e-lo

ng

Lea

rnin

g

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

CLE355 Soil Mechanics Laboratory 2 2 1 2 2 1 2 1 1




CLE356 Highway Engineering Laboratory L T P C


Pre-requisites//Exposure CLE314

Co-requisites --

COURSE OBJECTIVES

1. To impart the knowledge in Highway Geometrics, Traffic Engineering, materials, construction and design of pavements

COURSE OUTCOMES


1. Design various geometric elements of highways. 2. Understand the procedure to collect the traffic data for design and traffic management. 3. Test the highway materials as per IS/IRC guidelines. 4. Do structural design of flexible and rigid pavements. 5. Know various highway constructions techniques and its maintenance


Highway Engineering is a prominent aspect of surface transport. With basic knowledge of materials and soil mechanics, highway engineering deals with planning, design, construction, operation and maintenance of all types of roads. During the course, the students learn about aggregate crushing value test and aggregate impact test. Students also learn about Los Angeles Abrasion Test, Penetration Test of Bitumen, Ductility Test of Bitumen, Softening Point Test of Bitumen, Flash and Fire Point Test of Bitumen and Viscosity Test of Bitumen. Students also understand about California Bearing Ratio Test.

TEXT BOOKS

1.Khanna.S.K., and Justo. C.E.G., (2011), Highway Engineering, Ninth Edition, Nem.

2. Lab manual

REFERENCE BOOKS

1.Kadiyali.L.R., and Lal.N.B., (2005), Principles and Practice of Highway Engineering, Fourth Edition, Khanna Publishers, ISBN- 9788174091659.

2.Chakroborthy Partha, and Das Animesh, (2003), Principles of Transportation Engineering, Eighth Printing, Prentice-Hall of India, ISBN-9788120320840.

3.Rao.G.V., (1996), Principles of Transportation and Highway Engineering, Tata McGraw-Hill Co, ISBN- 9780074623633.

4.Khisty.C.J., and Lall.B.K., (2003), Transportation Engineering, Indian Edition, Prentice-Hall of India, ISBN-9788120322127.


1.Aggregate Crushing Value Test

2.Aggregate Impact Test

3.Los Angeles Abrasion Test

4.Shape Test

5.Penetration Test of Bitumen

6.Ductility Test of Bitumen

7.Softening Point Test of Bitumen

8.Flash and Fire Point Test of Bitumen

9.Viscosity Test of Bitumen

10.Spot Test

11.California Bearing Ratio Test

Mode of Evaluation: The subject understanding of students will be evaluated lab performance, lab reports and viva-voce.

Components

Laboratory

Internal

SEE

laboratory

Marks 50

50

Total Marks 100




1 Design various geometric elements of highways. 2, 3

2 Understand the procedure to collect the traffic data for design and traffic

management. 3

3 Test the highway materials as per IS/IRC

guidelines. 6, 9

4 Do structural design of flexible and rigid

pavements. 3, 6

5 Know various highway constructions techniques and its Maintenance. 7, 10

En

gin

eeri

ng

Kn

ow

led

ge

Pro

ble

m a

nal

ysi

s

Des

ign

/dev

elo

pm

ent

of

solu

tio

ns

Co

ndu

ct a

nd

in

ves

tig

atio

n o

f co

mp

lex

pro

ble

ms

Mo

der

n t

oo

l u

sag

e

Th

e en

gin

eer

and s

oci

ety

En

vir

on

men

t an

d s

ust

ain

abil

ity

Eth

ics

Indiv

idu

al o

r te

am w

ork

C

om

mu

nic

atio

n

Pro

ject

man

agem

ent

and f

inan

ce

Lif

e-lo

ng

Lea

rnin

g

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

CLE356 Highway Engineering Laboratory 2 3 3 2 1 1




CLE243 Strength of Materials Lab L T P C

Version 1.03 Date of Approval 0 0 2 1

Pre-requisites / Exposure CLE223

Co-requisites

COURSE OBJECTIVES

To supplement the theoretical knowledge gained in Mechanics of Solids with practical testing for determining the strength of ma-terials under externally applied loads. This would enable the student to have a clear understanding of the design for strength and stiffness.

COURSE OUTCOMES

On completion of this course, the students will be able to,

1.Conduct tension and compression tests on the components.

2.To determine hardness, impact strength, fatigue strength of the specimens.

3.Measure strain and load using specific gauges.


Students understand about tension test of steel rods, compression test on bricks and concrete blocks. Students also understand about double shear test, impact test, and hardness test. Students learn deflection test on beam and come to know about verification of Maxwells reciprocal theorem.

TEXT BOOKS

1.Ramamrutham S. and Narayanan R. (2008), Strength of Materials, 3rd Edition, Dhanpat Rai Publications Company, ISBN: 9788187433545.

REFERENCE BOOKS

1. Gere J. M. and Thimoshenko S. P. (2008), Mechanics of Materials, 8th Edition, CBS Publishers & Distributors, ISBN: 9780534417932.

2. Popov E. P. (2009), Engineering Mechanics of Solids, 2nd Edition, Prentice Hall Publisher, ISBN:

9788120321076.Bansal R. K. (2010), Strength of Materials, 4th Edition, Laxmi Publications, ISBN: 9788131808146

LIST OF EXPERIMENTS

1.Tension test on a mild steel rod, thin and twisted bars.

2.Compression test on Bricks, Concrete blocks.

3.Double shear test on Mild steel and Aluminium rods.

4.Impact test on metal specimen (Charpy test and izod test).

5.Hardness test on metals (Steel, Copper and Aluminium) - Brinnell and Rockwell Hardness Number.

6.Deflection test – Verification of Maxwell theorem.

7.Compression and tension test on helical springs.

8.Fatigue test on Steel.

9.Torsion test on mild steel

Mode of Evaluation The subject understanding of students will be evaluated from lab performance, Lab reports and Viva voce.

Components

Laboratory

Internal

SEE

laboratory

Marks 50

50

Total Marks 100





1 Conduct tension and compression tests on the components 1, 9

2 To determine hardness, impact strength, fatigue strength of the

specimens 1, 9

3 Measure strain and load using specific

gauges 1, 9

En

gin

eeri

ng

Kn

ow

led

ge

Pro

ble

m a

nal

ysi

s

Des

ign

/dev

elo

pm

ent

of

solu

tio

ns

Co

nd

uct

in

ves

tig

atio

ns

of

com

ple

x p

rob

lem

s

Mo

der

n t

oo

l u

sag

e

Th

e en

gin

eer

and s

oci

ety

En

vir

on

men

t an

d s

ust

ain

abil

ity

Eth

ics

Ind

ivid

ual

or

team

wo

rk

Co

mm

un

icat

ion

Pro

ject

man

agem

ent

and

fin

ance

Lif

e-lo

ng

Lea

rnin

g

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

CLE243 Strength of Materials Lab 2 2




CLE343 Building Drawing L T P C



Co-requisites --

COURSE OBJECTIVES

1.To understand the regulations as per National Building Code To analyse the structures.

2.To identify the functional requirements and building rules.

3.To understand the sketches and working drawings.

COURSE OUTCOMES


1.Implement the regulations for layout planning and preparation of drawings.

2.Prepare building drawings for residential building and hospital buildings.

3.Design the different projections of the buildings.


Building drawing is the important for the development of the knowledge about planning and regulations as per national build-ing code. Students will learn about the Building Regulations as per National Building Code, Layout planning, preparation of line sketches and working drawing in accordance with functional requirements and building rules.

TEXT BOOKS

1.V.B Sikka (2012), “Civil Engineering Drawing”, S.K.Kataria & Sons, New Delhi. ISBN: 978-93-5014-272-1

2. N.Kumaraswamy (2012), A. Kameswara Rao “Building Planning & Drawing”, Charotar Publishing House Pvt. Ltd. ISBN: 9789380358581

REFERENCE BOOKS

1.S.C Rangwala (2013), “Civil Engineering Drawing”, Charotar Publishing House Pvt. Ltd. ISBN: 978-93-80358-68-0

2.Richard B. Eaton (2005), “Building Construction Drawing”, Donhead Publisher. ISBN: 9780821805633.

3.Padmini Murugesan (1997), Civil Engineering Drawing, Prithiba Publishers and Distributors. ISBN: 81-7525-282-0.

COURSE CONTENT

Unit I: Part A 15 Lectures

Building Regulations as per National Building Code, Layout planning, preparation of line sketches and working drawing in ac-cordance with functional requirements and building rules for the following types of building.

1.Residential buildings – Flat-roof and pitched roof – Apartments/Flats in multi-storied buildings.

2.Schools, Hospitals, Dispensaries and Hostels.

3.Industrial buildings – workshop with trussed roof – Factory buildings with flat, pitched and shell roofs.

Unit II: Part B 25 Lectures

Detailed Drawings (Plan, Elevation and section for the following):

1.Simple residential and industrial buildings with flat and pitched roof.

2.Dispensary – Provision for Handicapped people

3.Workshop – Trussed roof.

4.Terminal buildings for multi-modal systems

5.Detailed drawings for doors, windows, rolling shutters and collapsible gates.

6.Introduction to reinforced concrete drawings and structural steel drawings

7.Planning, design and detailed drawings of staircase.


Components

Laboratory

Internal

SEE

laboratory

Marks 50

50

Total Marks 100





1 Implement the regulations for layout planning and preparation of

drawings. 10

2 Prepare building drawings for residential building and hospital buildings. 5

3 Design the different projections of the

buildings. 5

En

gin

eeri

ng K

no

wle

dg

e

Pro

ble

m a

nal

ysi

s

Des

ign

/dev

elo

pm

ent

of

solu

tio

ns

Co

ndu

ct i

nv

esti

gat

ion

sof

com

ple

x p

rob

lem

s

Mo

der

n t

oo

l u

sag

e

Th

e en

gin

eer

and s

oci

ety

En

vir

on

men

t an

d s

ust

ain

abil

ity

Eth

ics

Ind

ivid

ual

or

team

wo

rk

Co

mm

un

icat

ion

Pro

ject

man

agem

ent

and

fin

ance

Lif

e-lo

ng

Lea

rnin

g

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

CLE343 Building Drawing 2 1





Name:

Admission No:

Batch No:


Course : CLE145-Building Drawing


257


PART – A

1. Draw the fully paneled door using the drawing with the 6cm allowance for the frame. [10]



2. Design and draw the working sectional drawing of the residential building with the front sectional eleva- [40]

tion from the following given data.


CLE229 Concrete Technology L T P C


Pre-requisites --

Co-requisites --

COURSE OBJECTIVES

1.To know the types of cement, mineral and chemical admixtures, aggregates and their Engineering properties.

2.To understand the properties and application of various special concretes.

3.To know the methodology of mix design and their application in accordance with various field conditions.

COURSE OUTCOMES


1.Identify the suitability of materials for the construction works.

2.Know the various method of testing fresh and hardened concrete.

3.Design the concrete mix by various method incorporating actual site conditions.

4.Understand the importance of various concrete properties and types of concrete on sustainability.


Concrete is one of the most vital materials used in construction. Concrete is made up of cement, coarse aggregate; fines aggregate, water and admixtures. The strength of concrete is directly depending upon the properties of these materials and their proportion in the concrete. In this course student will learn the various properties of concrete ingredients and various properties of concrete itself and their testing including non destructive testing such as ultrasonic pulse velocity test, rebound hammer test etc. They will also learn the various mix design methods to design the concrete for different construction works.

TEXT BOOKS

1.Shetty, M.S. (2010), Concrete Technology, S. Chand & Company Ltd. ISBN- 9788121900034.

2.IS: 10262-2009, Guidelines for concrete mix design proportioning, BIS, New Delhi.

REFERENCE BOOKS

1.Neville. A.M. (2010) Specification of Properties of Concrete, Standard Publishers Distributors. ISBN- 9780273755807

2.Gambhir, M. L. (2012), Concrete Technology, McGraw- Hill. ISBN- 9780070151369.

COURSE CONTENT

Unit I: Properties of cement 6 lecture hours

ASTM classification of Cement – Properties of Cement - Testing of Cement – Field Testing – Laboratory Testing methods – Setting time of cement – soundness of cement – fineness and compressive strength of cement - Heat of Hydration.

Unit II: Fine aggregate and Admixture 6 lecture hours

Fine aggregate – Properties and testing methods – Bulking of Sand – sieve analysis – fineness modulus of sand - Cement mortar – properties and uses, Chemical Admixtures- Plasticizer – super plasticizer – air entraining agents etc

Unit III: Properties of concrete 6 lecture hours

Concrete – selection of materials for concrete - water cement ratio - Properties of fresh concrete - workability – measurement of workability –Chlorination, Carbonation and Corrosion - process of manufacture of concrete. Introduction to Self-compacting concrete, concrete with recycled aggregates, underwater concrete,

Unit IV: Strength of concrete 6 lecture hours

Strength of concrete – gain of strength with age – testing of hardened concrete - Compressive strength - Tensile

strength – Flexural strength – modulus of elasticity of concrete, Non-destructive testing – ultrasonic pulse velocity

test, Rebound Hammer Test etc

Unit V: Mix Design 6 lecture hours

Concrete mix design – concept of mix design – Partially destructive test (Core test) – variables in proportioning – methods of mix design – ACI method – Indian Standard method.

Mode of Evaluation: The subject understanding of students will be evaluated through CAT-I ,II and Semester End Examination.

Components

Theory

Internal

SEE

Marks 50 50

Total Marks 100




Outcomes

1 Identify the suitability of materials for the construction

works. 3

2 Know the various properties of concrete and methods for their

testing. 5

3 Design the concrete mix by various method incorporating actual site

conditions. 3

4 Understand the importance of various concrete properties and types of concrete on sustainability. 7

En

gin

eeri

ng K

no

wle

dg

e

Pro

ble

m a

nal

ysi

s

Des

ign

/dev

elo

pm

ent

of

solu

tio

ns

Co

ndu

ct a

nd

in

ves

tig

atio

no

f co

mp

lex

pro

ble

ms

Mo

der

n t

oo

l u

sag

e

Th

e en

gin

eer

and s

oci

ety

En

vir

on

men

t an

d s

ust

ain

abil

ity

Eth

ics

Ind

ivid

ual

or

team

wo

rk

Co

mm

un

icat

ion

Pro

ject

man

agem

ent

and

fin

ance

Lif

e-lo

ng

Lea

rnin

g

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

CLE229 Concrete Technology 3 2 2





Name:

Admission No:

Batch No:


Course : CLE229-Concrete Technology


Programme: B. Tech Semester: Fall


PART – A (5 X8 =40 Marks)

Answer all Questions

(ii) Write down the properties of cement.

(iii) Differentiate between Quick Setting Cement and Rapid Hardening Cement.

(iv) Discuss briefly on ‘bulking of sand’.

(v) Write the uses of chemical admixtures in cement mortar.

(vi) Define workability of concrete. List out the factors affecting workability of concrete.

(vii) Describe about carbonation of concrete. State the effect of carbonation.

(viii) State the effect of water cement ratio in concrete.

(ix) What are the factors affecting strength of concrete?

PART – B (10 X4 = 40 Marks)


[5]

[5]

[5]

[5]

[5]

[5]

[5]

[5]

9. How do you test normal consistency and setting time of the concrete? [10]

10. What is meant by “grading of aggregates”? How the fineness modulus of a given sample of aggregate is deter- [10]

mined?

11. List out the methods to determine workability of concrete. Explain any one of them in details. [10]

12. Discuss in details about tensile strength, compressive strength, flexural strength and modulus of elasticity of [10]

concrete.

13. Do a mix design for M25 grade of concrete by Indian Standard method. [10]

PART – C (20 X1 = 20 Marks)

AnswerANY ONE QUESTION

14. Define self compacting concrete. Discuss about its composition and uses. [20]

15. Discuss in details about different non-destructive testing of concrete. [20]

CLE312 Structural Analysis L T P C



Co-requisites

COURSE OBJECTIVES

(x) To understand the methods of analysis.

(xi) To know the different techniques available for the analysis of structures.

(xii) To identify the best suitable method of analysis.

COURSE OUTCOMES


(xiii) Identify the method of analysis for determinate structures

(xiv) Understand the importance of various methods of slop and deflections for determinate structures.

(xv) Use the influence line diagram.

(xvi) Understand the methods of analysis for multi-storeyed frames.

CATALOG DESCRIPTION

Structural analysis is the determination of the effects of loads on physical structures and their components. Structures subject to this type of analysis include all that must withstand loads, such as buildings, bridges, vehicles, machinery, furniture, attire, soil strata, prostheses and biological tissue. Structural analysis incorporates the fields of applied mechanics, materials science and ap-plied mathematics to compute a structure’s deformations, internal forces, stresses, support reactions, accelerations, and stability. The results of the analysis are used to verify a structure’s fitness for use, often saving physical tests. Structural analysis is thus a key part of the engineering design of structures.

TEXT BOOKS

1. Vazirani & Ratwani (2003), Analysis of Structures, Vol. 1 & II, Khanna Publishers, ISBN: 0125249853.

REFERENCE BOOKS

(xvii) S. Ramamrutham (2004), Theory of Structures, 5thEdition, Dhanpat Rai Publications, ISBN: 978041528091

(xviii) C. S. Reddy (2010), Structural Analysis, 3rd Edition, Tata McGraw Hill,ISBN:9780070702769.

(xix) Kenneth M. Leet, Gilbert A, Uang C. M. (2010), Fundamentals of Structural Analysis, 4th Edition, Tata McGraw Hill,ISBN:9780071289382

COURSE CONTENT

Unit I Theorem of ThreeMoments

Static indeterminacy - Theorem of three moments- analysis of propped cantilevers- fixed & continuous beam - bending moment and shear force diagram.

Unit II Strain Energy Method

Static indeterminacy - Strain energy method - analysis of indeterminate structures, beams, pin jointed and rigid jointed structures - temperature effect - bending moment and shear force diagram.

Unit III Influence Line

Infl uence line - influence lines for bending moment and shear force for beams, Muller Breaslau’s principle - Maxwell’s reciprocal theorem - Maxwell Betti’s theorem.

Unit IV Analysis of Arches

Two hinged and three hinged parabolic arches - circular arches - cables - tension forces in towers - influence line for horizontal thrust and bending moment.

Unit V Approximate Methods for

Analysis of Multistoried Frames

Substitute frame method - portal method - cantilever method and Kani’s method.

Mode of Evaluation: The subject understanding of students will be evaluated through CAT-I, II and Semester End Examination.

Components

Theory

Internal

SEE

Marks 50 50

Total Marks 100





1 Identify the method of analysis for determinate structures 1, 2

2 Understand the importance of various methods of slop and deflections for determinate structures. 1, 2

3 Use the influence line diagram. 1, 2, 3

4 Understand the methods of analysis for multi-storeyed

frames. 1, 2

En

gin

eeri

ng

Kn

ow

led

ge

Pro

ble

m a

nal

ysi

s

Des

ign

/dev

elo

pm

ent

of

solu

tio

ns

Co

nd

uct

in

ves

tig

atio

nso

f co

mp

lex

pro

ble

ms

Mo

der

n t

oo

l u

sag

e

The

engin

eer

and s

oci

ety

En

vir

on

men

t an

d s

ust

ain

abil

ity

Eth

ics

Ind

ivid

ual

or

team

wo

rk

Co

mm

un

icat

ion

Pro

ject

man

agem

ent

and f

inan

ce

Lif

e-lo

ng

Lea

rnin

g

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

CLE312 Structural Analysis 2 3 2




Theory


Name:

Admission No:

Batch No:


Course: CLE312- Structural Analysis





SECTION A

1.

(a) ‘Three moment method is a static method’. Justify your answer.

(b) ‘Strain energy method is a static method’. Give reasons.

(c) ‘Influence line diagram is an important parameter in the analysis of structures’. Justify

your answer.

(d) ‘Cables do not carry bending moment’. Give your comments.

(e) ‘Substitute frame method is a very effective method’. How?

1x5 = 5

2. (a) Define plastic moment of resistance.

(b) State the properties of stiffness matrix.

2.5x2=5

SECTION B

3.

(a) Find the end moments for the continuous beam shown in figure 1 by theorem of three

moments.

(b) Calculate the support reactions for the beam shown in figure 2 by strain energy method.

2x10=20

SECTION C


4. (a) What do you mean by statically determinate structures and statically indeterminate

structures?

(b) Calculate the degree of static indeterminacy for the plane truss shown in figure 3 and the

plane frame shown in figure 4.

10

5. (a) State Castigliano’s theorems.

(b) Write Muller Breslau’s Principle.

10

6. A two hinged parabolic arch of span 30 m and central rise of 2.5 m carries a point load of 20 kN

at a distance of 6 m from the right support. Calculate the support reactions and also calculate the

values of maximum (+)ve and maximum (-)ve bending moments.

10

7. (a) Define Influence Line Diagrams (ILD).

(b) Write short notes on Maxwell’s Reciprocal theorem and Maxwell Betti’s theorem.

10

8. Analyze the multistoried building frame shown in figure 5 by Portal Method. 10

SECTION D

9. Consider a fifty span continuous beam at floor level of an office building, carrying a udl of 20

kN/m all through. The building is to be built in NCR region. Discuss briefly about the

application of different procedures to analyze the same.

15

10. The plane frame shown in figure 6 is to be constructed in Greater Noida region. Analyze the

plane frame by Strain Energy Method and draw the bending moment diagram.

15

CLE325 Water Resources Engineering L T P C



Co-requisites

COURSE OBJECTIVES

(xx) To get the exposure about the developments of water resources for the purpose of controlling & utilizing water for a variety of purposes

(xxi) To understand the concepts of irrigation, water supply, flood control, navigational improvement.

(xxii) To have idea about land drainage & pollution control etc.

COURSE OUTCOMES


(xxiii) Identify the different types & methods of irrigation for better water management.

(xxiv) Know the occurrence & distribution of natural waters of the earth.

(xxv) Implement the practices of structural design facilities for water resources project.

(xxvi) Implement and study the planning and management for single & multipurpose projects.

CATALOG DESCRIPTION

In this course, the student develops an ability to tackle water resources problems. The course relates theory to surface hydrology, groundwater hydrology, irrigation practices and canal irrigation. The importance of the course is in presenting a solid theoretical base from which practical applications in various aspects of water resources engineering can be made.

TEXT BOOKS

(xxvii) Das and Saikia (2012), Watershed Management. PHI Learning Private Ltd. ISBN-9788120346765.

(xxviii) Wurbs & James (2009), Water Resources Engineering. PHI Learning Private Ltd. ISBN – 9788120321519.

REFERENCE BOOKS

(xxix) Viessmen, Jr. & Lewis (2012), Introduction to Hydrology, 5th ed. PHI Learning Private Ltd. 9788120333680.

(xxx) Agarwal, V.C. (2012), Groundwater Hydrology. PHI Learning Private Ltd.ISBN – 9788120346192.

(xxxi) Larry W. Mays (2010), Water Resources Engineering. Wiley Publications. ISBN - 978-0470460641.

(xxxii) Subramanya, K., (2008) Engineering Hydrology, 3rd ed. Tata McGraw-Hill. ISBN - 9780070648555.

COURSE CONTENT

Unit I: Irrigation Practices 9 lecture hours

Need for Irrigation in India-Scope- Soil moisture & Plant growth - crop water requirements-Irrigation Scheduling- Irrigation ef-ficiencies, Duty-Delta-base period-relation between them, Surface & subsurface irrigation method, Irrigation water Quality.

Unit II: Surface Water Hydrology 9 lecture hours

Hydrological Cycle - Types & forms of precipitation- rainfall measurements - interpretation of rainfall data. Missing rain fall data - Runoff- runoff cycle, infiltration indices, Hydrograph analysis - Module hydrograph, applications. Time Series Analysis.

Unit III: Ground Water Hydrology 9 lecture hours

Ground water-Aquifers, Permeability & transmissibility- steady flow towards a well in confined & water table aquifer-Dupits & Theims equation - measurement of yield of an open well - Tube well & infiltration gallaries. Interference among wells-well losses, comparison of well and flow irrigation.

s

Unit IV:Canal Irrigation 9 lecture hours

267

Sediment Transport- Importance & Mechanics of transport, bed load & suspended load- Estimation, Design of

channels in India-Regime channels- Kennedy and Lacey’s theory, Water logging- causes- effects- control measures,

canal lining, Land Reclamation.

Unit V: Case Histories 9 lecture hours

Case Histories: Canal water distribution for Irrigation and Canal water disputes in India.

Mode of Evaluation: The theory performance of students is evaluated:

Components

Theory

Internal

SEE

Marks 50 50

Total Marks 100




1 Identify the different types & methods of irrigation for better water

management. 7

2 Know the occurrence & distribution of natural waters of the earth. 7

3 Implement the practices of structural design facilities for water resources

project. 7, 8

4 Implement and study the planning and management for single & multipurpose

projects. 8, 11

En

gin

eeri

ng

Kn

ow

led

ge

Pro

ble

m a

nal

ysi

s

Des

ign

/dev

elo

pm

ent

of

solu

tio

ns

Co

nd

uct

in

ves

tig

atio

nso

f co

mp

lex

pro

ble

ms

Mo

der

n t

oo

l u

sag

e

The

engin

eer

and s

oci

ety

En

vir

on

men

t an

d s

ust

ain

abil

ity

E

thic

s

Ind

ivid

ual

or

team

wo

rk

Co

mm

un

icat

ion

Pro

ject

man

agem

ent

and f

inan

ce

Lif

e-lo

ng

Lea

rnin

g

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

CLE325 Water Resources Engineering 3 2 2





Name:

Admission No:

Batch No:


Course: CLE325-Water Resources Engineering




Part-A (5 x 8 = 40 marks)

Attempt ALL Questions

(xxxiii) Write short notes on:

1. Specific capacity of a well and specific yield of an aquifer,

2. Aquifer and acuiclude

(xxxiv) Differentiate between

1. Open wells and tube wells,

2. Water table and artesian aquifers.

(xxxv) Define the terms Duty, Delta and base period and also derive the relationship between them.

(xxxvi) Define surface tension and capillarity.

(xxxvii) What does the word unit refer to in the unit hydrograph? Explain with sketches what do you understand by the principle of linearity and principle of time invariance in the unit hydrograph theory?

(xxxviii) Describe how recession constants of direct runoff and baseflow curves are obtained from a semilogarithmetic plot.

(xxxix) Describe a master depletion curve? How is it used to separate the baseflow from total runoff?

(xl) Discuss the various factors affecting evapotranspiration.

Part-B (4 x 10 = 40 marks)

Answer any Four Questions

(xli) What do you understand by balancing depth ? Draw the sketch of it and derive the relationship between side slopes in cutting, embankment and depth of flow.

(xlii) Design a concrete lined channel to carry a discharge of 20 cumecs at a slope of 1 in 10000. The side slopes of the channel are 1.25:1 and Mannings N may be taken as 0.014.

(xliii) Define water equivalent of snow and explain how you estimate snow melt?

(xliv) Discuss the analysis of rainfall data with respect to time, space, frequency and intensity.

(xlv) In a certain area paddy crop requires 14 cm of depth of water at an interval of 10 days for a base period of 110 days; Whereas wheat crop requires 9.0 cm of depth of water after 35 days with a base period of 140 days. Determine the delta of paddy crop and duty of wheat crop of that area.

Part-C (1 x 20 = 20 marks)

Answer ANY ONE Question

269

(xlvi) Discuss various methods of irrigation and state the advantages of each methods.

(xlvii) The 3 h unit hydrograph of a basin with an area of 20 km2 at one hour interval are as

given below. 0; 0:41; 1:38; 4; 7:72; 10:06; 9:24; 6:62 4:57 3:86; 2:76; 2:07; 1:38; 0:83; 0:41 0

If rainfall excess with intensity of 2.0 cm/h for a period of 4 h

followed im-mediately by another 3 h storm with an intensity of 1

cm/h occurs on the

basin, what is the peak flow produced by this rainfall and at what time after the commencement of rainfall would this peak flow occur? Assume baseflow is negligible.


CLE324 Geotechnical Engineering L T P C



Co-requisites

COURSE OBJECTIVES

(xlviii) To understand the design aspects of foundation.

(xlix) To evaluate the stress developed in the soil medium.

(l) To understand the framework of soil investigation.

COURSE OUTCOMES


(li) Comprehend and utilize the geotechnical literature to establish the framework for foundation design.

(lii) Plan and implement a site investigation program including subsurface exploration to evaluate soil/structure behavior and to obtain the necessary design parameters.

(liii) Carry out slope stability analysis for various fills and slopes.

(liv) Determine allowable bearing pressures and load carrying capabilities of different foundation systems.


Geotechnical engineering is essential to understand the bearing capacity of soil and failure of soil in terms of settlements. First it requires soil exploration and type of soil decide the foundation for the structures e.g. shallow and deep foundation. Bearing capacity and failure conditions of soil would be analyzed by the Terzaghi’s theory. Slope stability shows the failure conditions of soils. Finally earth pressure also has been discussed.

TEXT BOOKS

(lv) Varghese P.C (2009), Foundation Engineering 1st Edition, Prentice-Hall of India Private Limited. ISBN: 978-81-203-2652-1.

(lvi) Arun Kr. Jain, B.C. Punmia, Ashok Kr. Jain (2005), Soil Mechanics and Foundations Sixteenth Edition, Laxmi Publica-tions. ISBN: 978-81-700-8791-5.

REFERENCE BOOKS

(lvii) Shashi K. Gulhati & Manoj Datta (2005), Geotechnical Engineering 1st edition, Tata McGraw Hill Ltd. ISBN: 978-00-705-8829-5.

(lviii) Donald P Coduto, William A. Kitch, Man-chu Ronald Yeung (2010), Geotechnical Engineering: Principles and Practices 2nd revised Edition, Pearson Education. ISBN: 978-01-313-5425-8.

(lix) Joseph E. Bowles (2006), Foundation Analysis and Design 5th edition, McGraw-Hill, New York. ISBN: 978-00-711-8844-9.

(lx) Braja M. Das (2007), Principles of Foundation Engineering 6th Edition, Nelson Engineering. ISBN: 978-81-315-0202-0.

(lxi) Ramamurthy (2010), Engineering in Rocks for Slopes, Foundations and Tunnels, PHI Learning Private Limited. ISBN: 978-81-203-4168-5.

COURSE CONTENT

Unit I:Soil Exploration and Types of Foundations 6 lecture hours

271

Objective of site investigation - reconnaissance – detailed site investigation - methods of exploration – geophysical methods - seis-mic refraction survey. Depth of exploration – factors governing location and depth of foundation – types of foundations – selection of foundation – plate load test – standard penetration test.

Unit II: Capacity and Settlements of Shallow Foundations 10 lecture hours

Terzaghi’s theory of bearing capacity – general and local shear failure - effect of water table – design of footings –

settlement of footings - immediate and time dependent settlement – permissible limits – differential settlement,

introduction to codal provisions.

Unit III: Deep Foundations 10 lecture hours

Classification and selection of piles – static and dynamic formulae for single pile capacity – efficiency and capacity of pile groups – design of pile group – settlement of pile groups– load test on piles.

Unit IV:Slope Stability 9 lecture hours

Failure of infinite and finite slopes – Swedish circle method – Factor of safety - slope stability of earth dams, introduction to Bishop’s method – IS codes.

Unit V: Theories of Earth Pressure 10 lecture hours

Definitions – Earth pressure at rest – Rankine’s active and passive earth pressures - Coulomb’s earth pressure theories – types of retaining walls and its design.

Introduction of tunneling, ground improvement methods – compaction, deep compaction and fiber reinforced plastic and geo-textiles.

Mode of Evaluation: The subject understanding of students will be evaluated through CAT-I, II & III and Semester End Examination.

Components

Theory

Internal

SEE

Marks 50 50

Total Marks 100




1 Comprehend and utilize the geotechnical literature to establish the framework for foundation design. 1

2 Plan and implement a site investigation program including subsurface exploration to evaluate soil/ 3, 8

structure behavior and to obtain the necessary design parameters.

3 Carry out slope stability analysis for various fills and slopes. 2, 4, 7

4 Determine allowable bearing pressures and load carrying capabilities of different foundation systems. 2, 7

En

gin

eeri

ng

Kn

ow

led

ge

Pro

ble

m a

nal

ysi

s

Des

ign

/dev

elo

pm

ent

of

solu

tio

ns

Co

nd

uct

in

ves

tig

atio

ns

of

com

ple

x p

rob

lem

s

Mo

der

n t

oo

l u

sag

e

Th

e en

gin

eer

and s

oci

ety

En

vir

on

men

t an

d s

ust

ain

abil

ity

Eth

ics

Ind

ivid

ual

or

team

wo

rk

Co

mm

un

icat

ion

Pro

ject

man

agem

ent

and

fin

ance

Lif

e-lo

ng

Lea

rnin

g

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

CLE324 Geotechnical Engineering 2 2 2 1 2 1




Section 4b | Syllabi of Programme Specific Courses


Name:

Admission No:

Batch No:


Course : CLE324-Geotechnical Engineering


273





1. Enumerate the different penetrometer tests. Also write a note on standard penetration test. [5]

2. Write a note on the following: [5]

i Net pressure or net load intensity

ii Ultimate bearing capacity

3 Write a note on negative skin friction. [5]

4. Classify Pile foundation on the basis of different parameters. [5]

5. A square group of 9 piles was driven into soft clay extending to a large depth. The diameter and length of [5]

piles were 30 cm and 9 m, respectively. If the unconfined compression strength of clay is 9t/m2 and the

pile

spacing is 100 cm centre to centre, what is the capacity of the group? Assume factor of safety of 2.5

and

adhesion factor 0.75.

6. Explain the variation of earth pressure with the movement of the wall with a neat sketch. [5]

7. Discuss different tunnelling methods in brief. [5]

8. Choose a ground improvement method for very loose sandy soil. Give Reason for your selection. [5]


Answer any four Questions

9. Describe the various types of soil samples and samplers. [10]

10. Enumerate the various methods of site exploration. Explain any one of the geophysical method of explora- [10]

tion.

11. Explain plate load test with a neat sketch. [10]

12. A reinforced concrete pile weighing 30kN is driven by a drop hammer weighing 40kN and having an ef- [10]

fective fall of 0.8 m. The average set per blow is 1.4 cm. the total temporary elastic compression is 1.8

cm.

Assuming the coefficient of restitution as 0.25 and a factor of safety of 2; determine the ultimate

bearing

capacity and the allowable load for the pile.

274

Section 4 | Syllabi of Programme Specific Courses

13. Describe the Rankine’s active earth pressure theory for cohesionless backfill with the neat sketches. Con-

[5x2=10]

sider the following cases:

i Backfill with no surcharge

(lxii) Submerged backfill

(lxiii) Backfill with uniform surcharge

(lxiv) Backfill with sloping surface

(lxv) Inclined back and surcharge


Answer any one Question

14. Explain the different modes of soil failure. Also explain Terzaghi’s bearing capacity theory. [20]

15. Explain the following methods of slope stability analysis with the neat sketches: [10+10]

i Swedish Circle Method

ii Bishop’s Method


Section 4b | Syllabi of Programme Specific

Courses

275

CLE354 Survey Camp L T P C

Version1.03

Date of

Approval: 0 0 2 1


Co-requisites --

COURSE OBJECTIVES

1. Carry out projects covering a large area.

COURSE OUTCOMES


(lxvi) Handle the survey instruments efficiently and become more familiar with instrumentation.

(lxvii) Identify different survey methods and how they complement each other.

(lxviii) Make significant survey decisions on survey works whenever necessary especially when facing problems at sites.

(lxix) Enhance their confident to carry out engineering survey work.

CATALOG DESCRIPTION

Survey camp emphasizes on field application of basic survey task, levelling, contouring, traverse survey, curve setting and calcula-tions of earth work.

TEXT BOOKS

(lxx) Punmia B.C. (2005), f, Volume 1, 16th Edition Laxmi Publications. ISBN: 9788170080794

(lxxi) Punmia B.C. (2005), Surveying, Volume 2, 15th Edition Laxmi Publications. ISBN: 9788170080800

(lxxii) Satheesh Gopi (2010), GPS Principles and Applications, Tata Mc Graw Hill publishing company Ltd. ISBN: 9780070141704

REFERENCE BOOKS

(lxxiii) Subramaniyan R. (2010), Surveying and Levelling, Oxford University Press. ISBN: 9780195684247.

(lxxiv) Kanetkar T.P. (2006), Surveying and Levelling, Vol I, Pune. ISBN: 9788185825113.

(lxxv) Kanetkar T.P. (2008), Surveying and Levelling, Vol II, Pune. ISBN: 9788185825007

COURSE CONTENT

Unit I: Basic Survey

Basic surveying tasks i.e. taping, angles, differential leveling and instrument set-up.

Unit II: Leveling and Contouring

Establish the elevations of points relative to known benchmarks; Draw a contour map of a given area based on your own measured data.

Unit III: Traverse Survey

Measure and adjust a closed traverse.

Unit IV : Calculation of Earthwork and curve setting

Road alignment or excavation measurements (slope staking, area and volume calculations).

276


Unit V: Layout exercise

Layout exercise (buildings etc.), Preparation of project report.

Mode of Evaluation: The subject understanding of students will be evaluated through field performance, project report and viva-voce.

Components

Laboratory

Internal

SEE

laboratory

Marks 50

50

Total Marks 100





1 Handle the survey instruments efficiently and become more familiar with

instrumentation. 1

2 Identify different survey methods and how they complement each

other. 1

3 Make significant survey decisions on survey works whenever necessary especially when facing

prob- 9, 10

lems at sites.

4 Enhance their confident to carry out engineering survey

work. 9, 10

En

gin

eeri

ng K

no

wle

dg

e

Pro

ble

m a

nal

ysi

s

Des

ign

/dev

elo

pm

ent

of

solu

tio

ns

Co

ndu

ct i

nv

esti

gat

ion

sof

com

ple

x p

rob

lem

s

Mo

der

n t

oo

l u

sag

e

Th

e en

gin

eer

and s

oci

ety

En

vir

on

men

t an

d s

ust

ain

abil

ity

Eth

ics

Ind

ivid

ual

or

team

wo

rk

Co

mm

un

icat

ion

Pro

ject

man

agem

ent

and

fin

ance

Lif

e-lo

ng

Lea

rnin

g

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

CLE354 Survey Camp 1 3 2




CLE325 Transportation Engineering L T P C



Co-requisites --

COURSE OBJECTIVES

1.To teach the students about the different transportation systems.

2.To familiarise with various components involved in their respective modes and their basic design concepts.

COURSE OUTCOMES


1.Demonstrate the ability to identify the components of railway track, their functions, alignment and the station yards.

2.Recognize and identify the requirement of an airport and the principle involved in it.

3.Learn to classify the harbours and demonstrate the ability to identify the components of a dock.


The importance of transportation engineering is very useful in our daily life. So the basics knowledge of transportation modes are important. The basic modes are railways, aircraft etc. So we will go through the introduction, characteristics, design and safety of railway, airport, dock and harbour. The understanding of the geometrical part of the transportation is more important.

TEXT BOOKS

1.Chandra.S., and Agarwal. M.M., (2007), Railway Engineering, Oxford University Press India, ISBN- 9780195687798.

2.Rangwala.S.C., Rangwala.P.S., (2008), Airport Engineering, Charotar Publishing House Pvt. Limited, ISBN-9788185594972.

3.Oza.H.P., and Oza. G.H., (2011), Dock and Harbour Engineering, Sixth Edition, Charotar Publishing House Pvt., ISBN-9789380358383.

REFERENCE BOOKS

1.Arora.S.P., and Saxena. S.C., (2001), A Textbook of Railway Engineering, Sixth Edition, Dhanpat Rai Publications.

2.Khanna.S.K, and Arora.M.G. (1971), Airport Planning and Design, Nem Chand & Bros.

3.Rangwala.S.C, (1965), Principles of Railway Engineering, Charotar Publishing house.

COURSE CONTENT

Unit I: Introduction to Railway Engineering 9 lecture hours

History and administrative setup of Indian Railways; rail gauges, permanent way – functions, requirements, sections in embank-ment and cutting, stresses in different components of track, Types of joints and fastenings.

Unit II: Track Geometrics and Safety 9 lecture hours

Requirements of Railway alignment, vertical alignment and horizontal alignment, points and crossings – terminologies, Turnouts

– Types and design aspects, Signals classification and their functions, train operation control systems, interlocking of tracks.

Unit III: Introduction to airports and Aircraft Characteristics 9 lecture hours

Air transport development in India, national and international organizations in air transport, aircraft characteristics and their impact on planning of an airport, selection of site for an airport, airport obstruction, imaginary surfaces, runway orientation clam period and wind coverage.

Unit IV:Geometric Designs and Airport Traffic control Aids 9 lecture hours

Runway and taxiway geometric designs, exit taxiway, its design and fillet curves, runway configuration, separation clearance, design of apron and their layout.Visual aids, marking and lighting of runway and apron area, wind and landing direction indicator.

Unit V: Docks and Harbour Engineering 9 lecture hours

Historical development in India , tides, winds & waves, docks, harbours, break waters, jetties, landing stages & wharves, dry docks, transit sheds, cargo handling, , inland water transport. Maintenance.


Components

Theory

Internal

SEE

Marks 50 50

Total Marks 100




1 Demonstrate the ability to identify the components of railway track, their functions, alignment and 2, 3, 12

the station yards.

2 Recognize and identify the requirement of an airport and the principle involved in

it. 3, 6, 11, 12

3 Learn to classify the harbours and demonstrate the ability to identify the components of a

dock. 6, 8, 12

En

gin

eeri

ng

Kn

ow

led

ge

Pro

ble

m a

nal

ysi

s

Des

ign

/dev

elo

pm

ent

of

solu

tio

ns

Co

nd

uct

in

ves

tig

atio

nso

f co

mp

lex

pro

ble

ms

Mo

der

n t

oo

l u

sag

e

The

engin

eer

and s

oci

ety

En

vir

on

men

t an

d s

ust

ain

abil

ity

Eth

ics

Ind

ivid

ual

or

team

wo

rk

Co

mm

un

icat

ion

Pro

ject

man

agem

ent

and f

inan

ce

Lif

e-lo

ng

Lea

rnin

g

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

CLE325 Transportation Engineering 1 2 2 2 1 2





Name:

Admission No:

Batch No:


Course : CLE325-Transportation Engineering






SECTION A

1.

Fill in the blanks/write true or false

(a) The broad gauge is ………………cm wide.

(b) Now a days, the rail section on Indian Railways is ………………….

(C) A ………… is a graphic tool used to give a succinct view of how

wind speed and direction are typically distributed at a particular

location.

(d) ……………taxiway is provided very near to the apron, so as to

provide the storage of the aircrafts somewhere at the periphery of the

apron.

(e) A jetty is a structure that projects from the land out into water.(T/F)

1x5 = 5

2. Define the following terms

(a) Coning of wheels

(b) Wind rose diagram

2.5x2=5

SECTION B

3. (a)Explain the factors which influence the airport site selection.

(b)Draw neatly the cross section of broad gauge railway track in cutting

2x10=20

for double lane.

SECTION C


4. What are the objects of providing transition curves? Explain briefly the

essential requirements of an ideal transition curves.

10

5. Explain the neat sketches of the natural classifications of harbours. 10

6. Draw a sketch to illustrate a “Straight Diamond Crossing” of a B.G. line

crossing a M.G. line. Name its various component part and explain briefly its

construction.

10

7. Determine the minimum theoretical length of LWR beyond which central

portion of 52 Kg rail would not be subjected to any longitudinal movement

due to 30 degree Celsius rise in temperature. When it is given A= 60 square

cm, α= 1.15x10-5 per 0c, E=21.5x105Kg/cm3 and R= 700 Kg/m.

10

8. Explain the various methods used for Air Traffic Control at the airport. 10

SECTION D

9. You have been appointed as Assistant Executive Engineer (AEE) in Indian

Railways, and you assigned to construct a high speed track having a speed of

130 km/hour. What special measures would you consider for the

construction of high speed track and explain the effect of high speed train on

this track.

15

10.

You are recruited by Airport Authority of India (AAI) for the designing of

taxiway on the airport. What are the factors would you consider for layout of

the taxiway? What are the design parameter would you compute for

geometric design of taxiway?

15



Courses

281

CLE247 Concrete Testing Laboratory L T P C



Co-requisites

COURSE OBJECTIVES

(lxxvi) To know the concept and procedure of different type of test conducted on cement, aggregate and concrete.

(lxxvii) To understand the properties of different building materials and their Civil Engineering Significance.

(lxxviii) To understand the procedure of designing the concrete mix of given specification of materials.

COURSE OUTCOMES


(lxxix) Identify the suitability of materials for construction work.

(lxxx) Perform different test conducted on cement, aggregate and concrete as per relevant Codal provision.

(lxxxi) Perform non-destructive test on concrete.

(lxxxii) Design the concrete mix as per the site conditions and specification of materials available there.


Through this course students will learn various destructive and non-destructive tests on building materials and concrete by per-forming them practically. These tests are conducted at site to test the strength of material. At the end of this course, they will also learn to design the concrete mix by various methods such as IS code method, ACI methods etc as per given site conditions.

TEXT BOOKS

(lxxxiii) M.S.Shetty(2009), Concrete Technology,S. Chand Publications. ISBN 9788121900034.

(lxxxiv) Lab Manual

(lxxxv) IS: 10262-2009, Guidelines for concrete mix design proportioning, BIS, New Delhi.

REFERENCE BOOKS

(lxxxvi) Gambhir, M. L.(2011), Concrete Technology, McGraw- Hill. ISBN- 9780070151369.

(lxxxvii) Neville. A.M.(2008), Specification of Properties of Concrete, Standard Publishers Distributors. ISBN- 9780273755807.

LIST OF EXPERIMENTS

(lxxxviii) To determine the water content required producing a cement paste of normal consistency and also determining initial and final setting time of a given cement sample.

(lxxxix) To determine the fineness of cement by Blain air permeability apparatus.

(xc) To determine the specific gravity of given sample of OPC.

(xci) To determine the particle size distribution of fine and coarse aggregate by sieve analysis method.

(xcii) Determination of specific gravity of coarse and fine aggregate.

(xciii) To determine the silt content in the given sample of fine aggregate and also determine necessary adjustment for the bulk-ing of fine aggregate and draw curve between water content and bulking.

(xciv) To determine the consistency of the concrete mixes for different W/C ratio by slump test with and without admixture.

(xcv) To determine the workability of concrete mix of given proportion by compaction factor test.

(xcvi) To cast concrete cubes and to determine compressive strength of concrete by non-destructive and destructive method of testing.

(xcvii) To design the concrete mix of given specification by various mix design methods.

282


Mode of Evaluation:

Components

Laboratory

Internal

SEE

Laboratory

Marks 50

50

Total Marks 100




1 Identify the suitability of materials for construction work. 1, 3

2 Perform different test conducted on cement, aggregate and concrete as per relevant Codal

provision. 4, 9, 10

3 Perform non-destructive test on concrete. 1, 4, 5

4 Design the concrete mix as per the site conditions and specification of materials available

there. 3

En

gin

eeri

ng

Kn

ow

led

ge

Pro

ble

m a

nal

ysi

s

Des

ign

/dev

elo

pm

ent

of

solu

tio

ns

Co

nd

uct

in

ves

tig

atio

ns

of

com

ple

x p

rob

lem

s

Mo

der

n t

oo

l u

sag

e

Th

e en

gin

eer

and s

oci

ety

En

vir

on

men

t an

d s

ust

ain

abil

ity

Eth

ics

Ind

ivid

ual

or

team

wo

rk

Co

mm

un

icat

ion

Pro

ject

man

agem

ent

and

fin

ance

Lif

e-lo

ng

Lea

rnin

g

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

CLE247 Concrete Testing Laboratory 2 2 1 1 2 1





Courses

285

CLE321 Quantity Surveying and Estimation L T P C


Pre-requisites

Co-requisites --

COURSE OBJECTIVES

(xcviii) To understand the types of estimates.

(xcix) To identify the methods of quantity estimation used for different structural components.

(c) To understand rate analysis and process of preparation of bill of quantity.

COURSE OUTCOMES


(ci) Prepare a detailed estimate for different types of structures.

(cii) Prepare valuation reports and cost quality control.

(ciii) Estimates the quantity of items and analyse its rates considering material, labour and machinery cost with the help of software.

CATALOG DESCRIPTION

Through this course the student will learn about various types of estimates and different estimating procedures for different struc-tural elements. They also learn rate analysis and making bill of quantities.

TEXT BOOKS

1. B.N. Datta (2010), Estimating and costing, USBPD. ISBN 9788174767295.

REFERENCE BOOK

(civ) Vazirani, V. N. (2013), Civil Engineering Estimating Costing & Valuation, Khanna publishers. ISBN 9788174091277.

(cv) Rangawala (2011), Specifications of Estimating, Costing and Valuation, Charotar Publishing House Pvt. Ltd. ISBN 9789380358543.

COURSE CONTENT

Unit I: Estimation of building 7 lecture hours

Estimation of building works – Procedure of estimating, Types of estimates, detailed estimate of buildings including sanitary & electrical fittings.

Unit II: Estimate of R.C.C and Steel works 5 lecture hours

Estimate of R.C.C and Steel works - Scheduling - Slab - beam - column & trusses, Road – earthwork fully in banking, cutting, partly cutting & partly filling. Detailed estimate for WBM, Bituminous road.

Unit III: Rate analysis & preparation of bills 7 lecture hours

Rate analysis & preparation of bills – Data analysis of rates for various items of works – abstract estimates for Building projects – Introduction to software for Bill of Quantities & estimates.

Unit IV: Valuation 6 lecture hours

Valuation- rent fixation, tenders, - contracts –accounting procedure, measurement book, stores, cost & quality control – PWD & CPWD practice.

286


Unit V: Detailed specifications and Schedule of Rates 5 lecture hours

Specifications and Schedule of Rates.

Mode of Evaluation: The subject understanding of students will be evaluated through CAT I, II and SEE.

Components

Theory

Internal

SEE

Marks 50 50

Total Marks 100




1 Prepare a detailed estimate for different types of

structures. 2

2 Prepare valuation reports and cost quality

control. 2, 11

3 Estimates the quantity of items and analyse its rates considering material, labour and machinery

cost 11

with the help of software.

En

gin

eeri

ng

Kn

ow

led

ge

Pro

ble

m a

nal

ysi

s

Des

ign

/dev

elo

pm

ent

of

solu

tio

ns

Co

nd

uct

in

ves

tig

atio

nso

f co

mp

lex

pro

ble

ms

Mo

der

n t

oo

l u

sag

e

The

engin

eer

and s

oci

ety

En

vir

on

men

t an

d s

ust

ain

abil

ity

Eth

ics

Ind

ivid

ual

or

team

wo

rk

Co

mm

un

icat

ion

Pro

ject

man

agem

ent

and f

inan

ce

Lif

e-lo

ng

Lea

rnin

g

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

CLE321 Quantity Surveying and Estimation 2 3




Theory



Name:

Admission No:

Batch No:


Course : CLE321-Quantity Surveying and Estimation


287

Programme: B. Tech Semester:

Winter



Answer all Questions

1. Define Quantity surveying, estimating and valuation. [5]

2. Differentiate between Plinth area and Carpet area. [5]

3. State different types of estimates. How do they differ from each other? [5]

4. State four important rules of deductions in case of plastering work. [5]

5. Write a detailed note on rate analysis [5]

6. Write short note on bar bending schedule. [5]

7. What are the methods of estimating earthwork in roads? Write down the procedure to find the earthwork by [5]

any one method.

8. Discuss the importance of quantity survey and valuation techniques in civil construction projects [5]


Answer Question No 10 and ANY OTHER 3 questions

9. Describe various factors that influence the accuracy of estimates of building construction project. [10]

10. Prepare bar bending schedule and calculate the quantity of reinforcement in a R.C.C (1:2:4) lintel as per data [10]

given below:

Total Length of the lintel including bearing=1.50 m;

Thickness of wall = 400 mm;

Thickness of lintel = 150 mm;

Main reinforcement 5 bars of 12 mm ø (out of which 2 bars are bent up near support).

Top reinforcement 2 bars of 12 mm ø;

8 mm ø, 2 legged stirrups are provided @175 mm c/c uniformly.

11. What do you mean by ‘Supplementary Estimates’? Explain the circumstances under which such estimates are [10]

prepared

288


12. Calculate quantity of R.C.C. column footing for four R.C.C. columns for the following data: [10]

(cvi) Size of footing = 1250 x 1250

(cvii) Footing height – T = 550, t = 200

(cviii) Size of column = 250 x 250

(cix) All dimensions are in mm. Use trapezoidal formula.

13. Write sample specifications for a ‘painting work’ of an office building. [10]



14. Draft the specifications for materials to be used to construct a R.C.C. M 20 slab. [20]

15.

Prepare a preliminary estimate of a residential building project with a total plinth area of all the buildings

being [20]

18,00,000 m2. The following information is given :

(cx) Plinth area rate : Rs. 500 per m2

(cxi) Additional amount allowed for special architectural features : 1.5% of the building cost

(cxii) Extra for water supply and sanitary fittings : 5% of building cost

(cxiii) Extra for building services = 7.5 % of building cost

(cxiv) Contingencies = 2 % of overall cost

(cxv) supervision charges = 7.5% of overall cost



Courses

289

CLE322 Advanced Structural Analysis L T P C



Co-requisites

COURSE OBJECTIVES

(cxvi) To enable the students to understand the behaviour of indeterminate structures.

(cxvii) To help the students to know the concepts of elastic analysis and plastic analysis.

(cxviii) To teach students about the concepts of matrix analysis of structures.

COURSE OUTCOMES


(cxix) Understand the concept of kinematic indeterminacy, static indeterminacy and plastic analysis.

(cxx) Analyse continuous beams, plane frames and pin jointed plane trusses.

(cxxi) Calculate flexibility matrix and stiffness matrix for different types of structures, shape factor and plastic moment of resis-tance for beam sections.

COURSE CONTENT

Unit: I Slope deflection method

Kinematic indeterminacy - Slope deflection method - analysis of continuous beams and portals - bending moment and shear force diagram.

Unit: II Moment distribution method

Moment distribution method - analysis of continuous beams and portals - bending moment and shear force diagram.

Unit: III Plastic Analysis

Plastic moment of resistance - shape factor - collapse load - analysis of continuous beams and portals.

Unit: IV Flexibility matrix

Concept of flexibility matrix - analysis of continuous beams - plane frames and pin jointed plane trusses.

Unit: V Stiffness matrix

Stiffness matrix for beam element - analysis of continuous beams - plane frames & pin jointed plane trusses.


Components

Theory

Internal

SEE

Marks 50 50

Total Marks 100

290 Section 4 | Syllabi of Programme Specific

Courses





1 Understand the concept of kinematic indeterminacy, static indeterminacy and plastic

analysis. 1

2 Analyse continuous beams, plane frames and pin jointed plane

trusses. 2

3 Calculate flexibility matrix and stiffness matrix for different types of structures, shape factor and

plastic 3

moment of resistance for beam

sections.

En

gin

eeri

ng K

no

wle

dg

e

Pro

ble

m a

nal

ysi

s

Des

ign

/dev

elo

pm

ent

of

solu

tio

ns

Con

du

ct i

nv

esti

gat

ions

co

mple

x p

roble

mso

f

Mo

der

n t

oo

l u

sag

e

Th

e en

gin

eer

and s

oci

ety

En

vir

on

men

t an

d s

ust

ain

abil

ity

Eth

ics

Ind

ivid

ual

or

team

wo

rk

Co

mm

un

icat

ion

Pro

ject

man

agem

ent

and

fin

ance

Lif

e-lo

ng

Lea

rnin

g

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

CLE319

Advanced Structural

Analysis 3 3 2




Theory



Name:

Admission No:

Batch No:


Course : CLE322 -Advanced Structural Analysis


291

Programme: B. Tech Semester: winter


SECTION A

1.

(a) ‘Slope deflection method is a kinematic method’. Justify your answer.

(b) ‘Moment distribution method is a static method’. Give reasons.

(c) ‘Shape factor is an important parameter in the plastic analysis of structures’. Justify

your answer.

(d) ‘Flexibility matrix method is a force method.’ How?

(e) ‘Stiffness matrix method is a very useful method’. Give reasons.

1x5 = 5

2. (a) Define plastic moment of resistance.

(b) State the properties of stiffness matrix.

2.5x2=5

SECTION B

3.

(a) Find the end moments for the continuous beam shown in figure 1 by moment

distribution method.

(b) Find the end moments for the continuous beam shown in figure 1 by slope deflection

method.

2x10=20

SECTION C


4. (a) Define static indeterminacy and kinematic indeterminacy.

(b) What are the unknowns in slope deflection method and moment distribution method?

10

5. Analyze the plane frame shown in figure 2 by moment distribution method. Draw the

bending moment diagram.

10

6. Calculate the end moments for the plane frame shown in figure 2 by slope deflection

method.

10

7. Calculate the shape factor for a triangular section.

10

8.

Analyze the continuous beam shown in figure 1 by flexibility matrix method. AE is constant

for all members. Draw the shear force diagram and bending moment diagram.

10

SECTION D

9. A plane truss of 30 m span is to be built in NCR region. Draw a sketch of the truss. Also discuss

briefly about the procedures to analyze the same.

15

10. Discuss briefly about the importance of slope deflection method in the analysis of structures. Write

it’s merits and demerits.

15


Courses

293

CLE313 Reinforced Concrete Structures L T P C


Pre-requisites CLE311,CLE319

Co-requisites

COURSE OBJECTIVES

(cxxii) To teach the students about the design of beams by working stress method.

(cxxiii) To enable the students to understand the limit state method of design of beams, columns , slabs and staircases.

COURSE OUTCOMES


(cxxiv) Understand the behaviour of structural members and the concept of design.

(cxxv) Calculate moment of resistance for different types of beam sections, load carrying capacity of column sections.

(cxxvi) Design the beams, columns, slabs and staircases by limit state method.

(cxxvii) Design of structures is required for the development of society.


Students will learn the concept of working stress method and limit state method, tee beam and ell beam sections, under

reinforced sections, balanced sections and over reinforced sections. Students will also learn the concept of designing one

way slab and two way slab, short column and long column, axially and eccentrically loaded columns. Upon completion, students

should be able to design any component of the super structure of any RCC building.

TEXT BOOKS

(cxxviii) Gambhir, M.L., (2011), “Fundamentals of Reinforced Concrete Design”, Prentice-Hall of India. ISBN: 9788120330481.

(cxxix) S Unnikrishna Pillai & Devdas Menon, (2005), Reinforced Concrete Design, Tata Mcgraw Hill, ISBN: 9780070141100.

(cxxx) Varghese, P.C., (2009), Limit State Design of Reinforced Concrete, 2nd ed. ISBN: 9788120320390.

REFERENCE BOOKS

(cxxxi) Varghese (2005), Advanced Reinforced Concrete Design, Prentice-Hall of India.

(cxxxii) Gurcharan Singh (2005), Design of R.C.C. Structures in S. I. Units, Standard Publishers Distributors.

(cxxxiii) B. C. Punmia (2003), Design of reinforced concrete structures, Lakshmi Publishers.

(cxxxiv) IS:456 (2000) & SP:16

COURSE CONTENT

Unit I: Material Properties and Design Concepts 9 lecture hours

Material properties: Compressive strength, tensile strength, design stress-strain curve of concrete - modulus of elasticity - grades of

concrete - different types and grades of reinforcing steel - design stress-strain curve of steel - Different methods of designing RC

Structures – Concept of working stress method - Behaviour of R. C. beam in bending – Moment of Resistance of rectangular beam

sections and flanged beam sections

Unit II: Limit State of Method - Flexure 9 lecture hours

Concept of limit state method - Moment of Resistance of rectangular beam sections and flanged beam sections - Design of rectangular

beam sections and flanged beam sections

294


Unit III : Shear, Bond, Anchorage, Development Length and Torsion 9 lecture hours

(Limit State Method)

Limit State of Collapse in Shear - Bond, Anchorage - Development Length - Torsion in beams - Approach of Design for

Combined Bending, Shear and Torsion as per IS 456

Unit IV : Design of Slabs and Staircases 9 lecture hours

(Limit State Method)

Limit state design of one way slab & two way slab - Types of staircases – Design of staircases

Unit V:Design of Compression Members (Limit State Method) 9 lecture hours

Design of axially and eccentrically loaded short and long columns.


Components

Theory

Internal

SEE

Marks 50 50

Total Marks 100




Outcomes

1 Understand the behaviour of structural members and the concept of design. 1

2 Calculate moment of resistance for different types of beam sections, load carrying capacity of

column 2

sections.

3 Design the beams, columns , slabs and staircases by limit state method. 3

4 Design of structures is required for the development of society. 6

En

gin

eeri

ng

Kn

ow

led

ge

Pro

ble

m a

nal

ysi

s

Des

ign

/dev

elo

pm

ent

of

solu

tio

ns

Con

du

ct i

nv

esti

gat

ions

co

mple

x p

roble

mso

f

Mo

der

n t

oo

l u

sag

e

Th

e en

gin

eer

and s

oci

ety

En

vir

on

men

t an

d s

ust

ain

abil

ity

Eth

ics

Ind

ivid

ual

or

team

wo

rk

Co

mm

un

icat

ion

Pro

ject

man

agem

ent

and

fin

ance

Lif

e-lo

ng

Lea

rnin

g

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

CLE313 Reinforced Concrete Structures 2 2 3 2




Theory



Name:

Admission No:

Batch No:


Course : CLE313-Reinforced Concrete Structures


SECTION A

1.

(a) Grade of concrete and grade of steel are not same. Write your comments on the statement.

(b) Main reinforcements take care of bending moment. Give reasons.

(c) Stirrups carry shear force. Justify your answer.

(d)Two way slab differs from one way slab. Give reasons.

(e)Long column fails by buckling. Justify your answer.

1x5 = 5

2. (a) State the minimum amount of cover to be provided for beam and slab.

(b) What is the minimum amount of main steel to be provided in beams?

2.5x2=5

SECTION B

3.

(a) Design a cantilever beam of 1.5 m span. The beam is carrying a super imposed load of

12 kN/m. Use limit state method.

(b) Design a dog legged stair for a building in which the vertical distance between the

floors is 3.2 m. The stair hall measures 2.5 m X 5 m. Take live load as 3 kN/m2. Use limit

state method.

2x10=20

SECTION C


4. Sketch two legged, four legged and six legged stirrups. 10

5. Analyze the rectangular beam section of 250 mm width and 600 mm overall depth to

determine the ultimate moment of resistance. Tension reinforcement is 5 nos. 20 mm

diameter steel rods. Use limit state method.

10

6. Analyze the Tee beam section of 300 mm width of web, 1600 mm width of flange, 100 mm

thickness of flange and 550 mm overall depth to determine the ultimate moment of

resistance. Tension steel is 6 nos. 25 mm diameter steel rods and compression steel is 3 nos.

20 mm diameter steel rods. Use limit state method.

10

7. Design a simply supported slab of 3 m clear span. The slab is supported on two opposite

edges by brick wall and is carrying a live load of 2 kN/m2. Use limit state method.

Thickness of wall is 230 mm.

10

8.

Design an uniaxially eccentrically loaded braced short rectangular column by limit state

method for the following data:

Factored axial load = 1600 kN,

Factored moment in longer direction = 15 kNm,

Unsupported length = 3.7 m,

Effective length for bending in long direction = 3.2 m,

Effective length for bending in short direction = 2.9 m.

10

SECTION D

9. Each slab panel of a fifteen storey residential building at Greater Noida is of size 3.5 m x

3.5 m. Design an interior panel for the same. Live load on slab is 3 kN/m2 and weight of

floor finish is 1 kN/m2. Use limit state method.

15

10. Briefly discuss about the practical applications of balanced section, under reinforced section

and over reinforced section in the limit state design of beam

15


Courses

297

CLE413 Design of Steel Structures L T P C


Pre-requisites CLE324, CLE319

Co-requisites

COURSE OBJECTIVES

To understand the concepts of steel design.

To know the analysis and design of plate girder, gantry girder & chimney.

To know different types of roofs, calculation of forces and design of roof trusses.

COURSE OUTCOMES

On completion of this course, the student will be able to

(cxxxv) Understand the concept of plate girders, gantry girders and roof trusses.

(cxxxvi) Calculate moment of resistance for different types of beam sections, load carrying capacity of column sections.

(cxxxvii) Design simple beam, built up beam, plate girders, roof trusses and chimneys.


Students will understand the design of simple and built up beams, laterally supported and unsupported beams, design of plate girders, curtailment of flange plates, design of stiffeners and splices and design of gantry girder. Students will also understand the design of roof trusses, design of different types of chimneys and design of beams columns. Upon completion, students should be able to design simple and built up beams, plate girders, roof trusses and different types of chimneys.

TEXT BOOK

(cxxxviii) Ramachandra (2004), Design of Steel structures, Vol. I & Vol. II, 4th Edition, Standard Publishers Distributors, ISBN: 9780071544115.

REFERENCE BOOKS

(cxxxix) Vajrani V. N., Ratwani M. M. and Mehra H. (2012), Design and Analysis of Steel Structures, 18th Edition, Oscar Publica-tions, ISBN: 9788174092953.

(cxl) Syal I. C. (2009), Design of Steel Structures, Standard Publishers Distributors, New Delhi, ISBN: 9788180141270.

(cxli) Ramchandra (2006), Non Linear Analysis of Steel Structures, Standard Publishers Distributors, ISBN:9788180140785.

(cxlii) IS: 800-2007 & Steel Table.

COURSE CONTENT

Unit I:Simple and Built-up Beams 9 lecture hours

Design of Connections: Riveted, Welded and Bolted - Design of beams subjected to bending and shear - simple and built-up

beams – laterally supported and unsupported beams.

Unit II:Plate Girders 9 lecture hours

Plate girders - design of plate girders - curtailment of flange plates – concept of stiffeners and splices – design of gantry girder.

298


Unit III:Roof Trusses 9 lecture hours

Roof Trusses - Calculation of dead load, live load, wind load and earthquake load - Design of joints and members for pitched roof

truss - purlins.

Unit IV:Compression Members 9 lecture hours

Load carrying capacity of compression members – Built-up column sections – Design of columns.

Unit V:Chimneys 9 lecture hours

Types of chimneys – Calculation of wind load –Design of chimney


Components

Theory

Internal

SEE

Marks 50 50

Total Marks 100




Outcomes

1 Understand the concept of plate girders, gantry girders and roof

trusses 1 , 2

2 Calculate moment of resistance for different types of beam sections, load carrying capacity of

col- 2 , 3

umn sections.

3 Design simple beam, built up beam, plate girders, roof trusses and chimneys. 3 , 6

En

gin

eeri

ng

Kn

ow

led

ge

Pro

ble

m a

nal

ysi

s

Des

ign

/dev

elo

pm

ent

of

solu

tio

ns

Co

nd

uct

in

ves

tig

atio

ns

of

com

ple

x p

rob

lem

s

Mo

der

n t

oo

l u

sag

e

Th

e en

gin

eer

and s

oci

ety

E

nv

iro

nm

ent

and

su

stai

nab

ilit

y

Eth

ics

Ind

ivid

ual

or

team

wo

rk

Co

mm

un

icat

ion

Pro

ject

man

agem

ent

and

fin

ance

Lif

e-lo

ng

Lea

rnin

g

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

CLE413 Design of Steel Structures 2 2 3 2




Theory


Name:

Admission No:

Batch No:


Course : CLE413 -Design of Steel Structures


Programme: B. Tech Semester: winter




Use of Steel Table is allowed.

SECTION A

1.

a) Of the drilled and punched bolt holes which one is preferred and why?

b) Internal pressure co-efficient Cpi for building with permeability less than 20%

is ________________

c) The ratio of effective throat to fillet throat of fillet weld to its size is

_________.

d) Design bearing capacity of bolts is given by equation ____________ .

e) __________are beams supporting roof system between the adjacent trusses.

1x5 = 5

2. (a) What does 8 and 4 imply for bolts of grade 8.4? Of the drilled and

punched holes which one is preferred and why?

(b) Why a separate provision for the design of a single angle strut has

been proposed by IS: 800 code?

2.5x2=5

SECTION B

3.

(a) Calculate the strength of a 22mm diameter bolt of grade 4.6 for the

following cases. The main plates to be joined are 10mm thick

(i) Lap joint

(ii) Single cover butt joint; the cover plate being 10 mm thick

(iii) Double cover butt joint; each of the cover plate being 8 mm

thick.(Anb of 20mm diameter bolt =303mm2 ,do= 24mm,e=

2x10=20

36mm,p=50mm,partial safety factor=1.25)

(b) Calculate the value of the least radius of gyration for a compound

pendulum column consisting of ISHB 250 @ 536.6 N/m with one cover

plate 320mm x 20 mm on each flange.

SECTION C


4. Two plates 16mm and 20mm thick are to be joined by double cover butt joint. Design the joint for the following data:

Factored design load = 750 kN, Bolt diameter = 20mm, Grade of steel = Fe410, Grade of bolts = 4.6, Cover plates 2(one on each side) = 10 mm thick. (Anb of 20mm diameter bolt =245mm2, do = 22mm, e = 33mm, p=50mm, partial safety factor=1.25)

10

5. Why are four buckling curves prescribed to evaluate column strength? How does strain hardening affect the strength of short column?

10

6. Discuss about different types of loads and different loading combinations to be considered in the design of roof trusses

10

7. Write about the steps involved in the design of stiffeners for plate girders. 10

8.

A single storey workshop situated in a partially developed industrial area is 12m x 10 m to be provided with a pitch roof. The c/c spacing of trusses is 4m.The slope roof has a span of 12m and pitch 26.560.Determine the wind pressure.

Risk coefficient (k1)=1, Terrain coefficient (k2) =0.91, Topography factor (k3) =1.

Pressure coefficient,(Ridge angle00)Cpe =-0.4(Windward) Cpe =-0.4(Leeward)


Cpi= +0.5/-0.5.

10

SECTION D

9. Design a welded plate girder 22 m in span and laterally restrained

throughout. It has to support a uniform load of 100kN/m throughout the span

exclusive of the self Design the flanges and web of the plate girder and check

for the lateral-torsional buckling. Design the girder without intermediate

transverse stiffeners.

15

10

Design a fan roof truss having a span of 12m sloping at300.The centre to

centre spacing of the truss is 4m.The height of eaves is 6m. The roofing

material consists of GI sheets. The structure is situated in the Delhi for which

the basic wind speed is 47m/s. It is a structure with closely spaced buildings

with height up to 10 m and greatest dimension less than 20 m and width 6m.

Terrain category III, class A. k1=1,k2=0.91,k3=1.


Pressure coefficient,(Ridge angle900)Cpe =-0.8(Windward) Cpe =-

15

0.8(Leeward)

Cpi= +0.2/-0.2

Table 1


COURSE OBJECTIVES

(cxliii) To gain first-hand experience of working as an engineering professional,including the technical application of engineering knowledge.

(cxliv) To experience the discipline of working in a professional organisation and multidisciplinary team.

(cxlv) To develop technical, interpersonal and communication skills.

COURSE OUTCOMES

On completion of this component of curriculum, the students will be able to

(cxlvi) Apply engineering knowledge in solving real-life problems.

(cxlvii) Attain new skills and be aware of the state-of-art in engineering disciplines of their own interest.

(cxlviii) Get exposure to real-life-working environment & practices, and to attain the professionalisms.

(cxlix) Work with multi-tasking professionals and multidisciplinary team.

(cl) Prepare a technical report, to improve presentation and other soft skills.



Courses

301

CLE455 Industrial Internship L T P C

Version1.02 Date of Approval: - - - 1

Pre-requisites --

Co-requisites --

The prime purpose of Industrial training is to prepare students for employment in their chosen profession. Studies at university should be enhanced by providing them opportunity to relate academic and professional aspects of engineering disciplines with industrial experience. The Industrial Internship Program is a three-way partnership of students, university and employer that has benefits for all participants. Industrial Internship ensures that interns get to learn the basics by doing and assisting senior engineers on real projects. Practical experience gained during internship is as important as grades in engineering courses. With the hands-on training, students learn how to apply class-taught skills in solving real life problems. Students will attend Industrial internship of four weeks in any industry or reputed organization after the examination in summer vacation.

COURSE CONTENT

Exposure to real life problems at various reputed industries engaged in areas of Civil Engineering.

MODE OF EVALUATION

The evaluation of this training shall be included in the next semester evaluation. The student will be assigned a faculty guide who would be the supervisor of the student. The faculty will be identified before the end of the examination.

Students have to prepare an exhaustive technical report of the internship undertaken which will be duly signed by the officer under whom internship was taken in the industry/ organization. The covering format shall be signed by the concerned faculty in-charge of the student. The officer-in-charge would also give his rating of the student in a sealed envelope to the Dean of the SCME. The student at the end of internship will present his report about the internship before a committee constituted by the Dean of the School which would be comprised of at least three members comprising of the Division Chair/Program Chair. The students guide would be a special invitee to the presentation. The seminar session shall be an open house session. The internal marks would be the average of the marks given by each member of the committee separately in a sealed envelope to the Dean.

302


The marks by the external examiner would be based on the report submitted by the student which shall be evaluated by the external examiner and cross examination done of the student concerned. Not more than three students would form a group for such industrial internship.The final evaluation of the Industrial Internship will be based on the following criteria:

(cli) Presentation and contents of the report demonstrating well developed communication skill.

(clii) The professionalism displayed by the student during industrial training including the scope of quality industrial training attained.

(cliii) Contribution of the employer in providing quality training and relevance of the student’s industrial training to their degree.

(cliv) Marks/grades for this course will be withheld until students complete the training. Without this mark/grade students can-not graduate.

Components

Internship Progress Report Final Evaluation

Internal Supervisor

Industry Supervisor

Project Report

Presentation and Viva voice

Marks 25 25 25 25

Total Marks 50 50

Total Marks 100





1 Apply engineering knowledge in solving real-life

problems. 1,2

2 Attain new skills and be aware of the state-of-art in engineering disciplines of their own

interest. 5

3 Get exposure to real-life-working environment & practices, and to attain the professionalisms. 12

4 Work with multi-tasking professionals and multidisciplinary team. 9

5 Prepare a technical report, to improve presentation and other soft skills. 10

En

gin

eeri

ng

Kn

ow

led

ge

Pro

ble

m a

nal

ysi

s

Des

ign

/dev

elo

pm

ent

of

solu

tio

ns

Co

nd

uct

in

ves

tig

atio

nso

f co

mp

lex

pro

ble

ms

Mo

der

n t

oo

l u

sag

e

The

engin

eer

and s

oci

ety

En

vir

on

men

t an

d s

ust

ain

abil

ity

Eth

ics

Ind

ivid

ual

or

team

wo

rk

Co

mm

un

icat

ion

Pro

ject

man

agem

ent

and f

inan

ce

Lif

e-lo

ng

Lea

rnin

g

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

CLE455 Industrial Internship 1 2 1 1 2 1





Courses

303

CLE341 Structural Analysis Laboratory L T P C



Co-requisites

COURSE OBJECTIVES

(clv) To know the concept and procedure for determining flexural rigidity of beam.

(clvi) To understand the behavior of structures.

COURSE OUTCOMES


(clvii) Understand different methods used for finding slope and deflections.

(clviii) Determine the deflection of indeterminate structures and will be able to calculate deflection of different types of structures.

(clix) Determine the slope of indeterminate structures and will be able to calculate slope of different types of structures


Through this course students will learn various methods for finding slope and deflection of indeterminate structures. They will also learn difference between the methods used for finding slope and deflections. They will understand advantage and disadvantage of different methods for solving indeterminate structures for design purposes.

TEXT BOOKS

(clx) Vazirani & Ratwani (2003), Analysis of Structures, Vol. 1 & II, Khanna Publishers, ISBN: 0125249853.

(clxi) Lab Manual

REFERENCE BOOKS

(clxii) S. Ramamrutham (2004), Theory of Structures, 5thEdition, Dhanpat Rai Publications, ISBN: 978041528091

(clxiii) C. S. Reddy (2010), Structural Analysis, 3rd Edition, Tata McGraw Hill,ISBN:9780070702769.

(clxiv) Kenneth M. Leet, Gilbert A, Uang C. M. (2010), Fundamentals of Structural Analysis, 4th Edition, Tata McGraw Hill,ISBN:9780071289382

LIST OF EXPERIMENTS

(clxv) Deflection of a simply supported beam and verification of Clark-Maxwell’s theorem.

(clxvi) To determine the Flexural Rigidity of a given beam.

(clxvii) To verify the Moment- area theorem for slope and deflection of a given beam.

(clxviii) Deflection of a fixed beam and influence line for reactions.

(clxix) Deflection studies for a continuous beam and influence line for reactions.

(clxx) Study of behavior of columns and struts with different end conditions.

(clxxi) Experiment on three hinged arch.

(clxxii) Experiment on two hinged arch.

(clxxiii) Deflection of a statically determinate pin jointed truss.

(clxxiv) Unsymmetrical Bending of curved beam.

304



Components

Laboratory

Internal

SEE

Laboratory

Marks 50

50

Total Marks 100




Outcomes

1 Understand different methods for finding slope and

deflections. 1,3,6,9,10

2 Determine the deflection of indeterminate structures and will be able to calculate deflection of

dif- 1,3,6,9,10

ferent types of structures.

3 Determine the slope of indeterminate structures and will be able to calculate slope of different

types 1,3,6,9,10

of structures.

En

gin

eeri

ng K

no

wle

dg

e

Pro

ble

m a

nal

ysi

s

Des

ign

/dev

elo

pm

ent

of

solu

tio

ns

Co

nd

uct

in

ves

tig

atio

nso

f co

mp

lex

pro

ble

ms

Mo

der

n t

oo

l u

sag

e

Th

e en

gin

eer

and s

oci

ety

En

vir

on

men

t an

d s

ust

ain

abil

ity

Ind

ivid

ual

or

team

wo

rk

Co

mm

un

icat

ion

Pro

ject

man

agem

ent

and

fin

ance

Lif

e-lo

ng

Lea

rnin

g

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

CLE341 Structural Analysis Laboratory 2 1 2 2 1 1


Courses

305

CLE343 Reinforced Concrete Structures Laboratory L T P C


Pre-requisites Structural Analysis

Co-requisites

COURSE OBJECTIVES

(clxxv) To teach the students about the design of beams, columns, slabs by working stress method.

(clxxvi) To enable the students to understand the limit state method of design of beams, columns and slabs.

COURSE OUTCOMES


(clxxvii) Understand the behaviour of structural members and the concept of design.

(clxxviii) Design and draw the RCC detailing of beams and slabs.

(clxxix) Design and draw the RCC detailing of columns, isolated footing and combined footing.


Students will learn the design concept of tee beam and ell beam sections, rectangular beam sections, different types of slabs, differ-ent types of columns and footings. Finally they will learn the RCC detailing of all structural components.

TEXT BOOKS

(clxxx) Gambhir, M.L., (2011), “Fundamentals of Reinforced Concrete Design”, Prentice-Hall of India. ISBN: 9788120330481.

(clxxxi) 2.S Unnikrishna Pillai & Devdas Menon, (2005), Reinforced Concrete Design, Tata Mcgraw Hill, ISBN: 9780070141100.

(clxxxii) 3.Varghese, P.C., (2009), Limit State Design of Reinforced Concrete, 2nd ed. ISBN: 9788120320390.

(clxxxiii) Lab Manual.

REFERENCE BOOKS

(clxxxiv) Varghese (2005), Advanced Reinforced Concrete Design, Prentice-Hall of India.

(clxxxv) Gurcharan Singh (2005), Design of R.C.C. Structures in S. I. Units, Standard Publishers Distributors.

(clxxxvi) B. C. Punmia (2003), Design of reinforced concrete structures, Lakshmi Publishers.

(clxxxvii) IS:456 (2000) & SP:16

LIST OF EXPERIMENTS

(clxxxviii) Design and RCC detailing of Rectangular Beam

(clxxxix) Design and RCC detailing of Tee Beam section

(cxc) Design and RCC detailing of one way continuous slab along with Tee Beam

(cxci) Design and RCC detailing of two way continuous slab

(cxcii) Design and RCC detailing of column and isolated footing

(cxciii) Design and RCC detailing of column and combined footing

(cxciv) Design and RCC detailing of two way continuous slab

(cxcv) Design and RCC detailing of column

(cxcvi) Design and RCC detailing of isolated footing

(cxcvii) Design and RCC detailing of combined footing

306


Mode of Evaluation: The subject understanding of students will be evaluated through lab performance, lab report, and viva voce.

Components

Laboratory

Internal

SEE

Laboratory

Marks 50

50

Total Marks 100




1 Understand the behaviour of structural members and the concept of

design. 1,2,3,6,9,10

2 Design and draw the RCC detailing of beams and

slabs. 1,2,3,6,9,10

3 Design and draw the RCC detailing of columns, isolated footing and combined

footing. 1,2,3,6,9,10

En

gin

eeri

ng K

no

wle

dg

e

Pro

ble

m a

nal

ysi

s

Des

ign

/dev

elo

pm

ent

of

solu

tio

ns

Con

du

ct i

nv

esti

gat

ions

co

mple

x p

roble

mso

f

Mo

der

n t

oo

l u

sag

e

T

he

eng

inee

r an

d s

oci

ety

En

vir

on

men

t an

d s

ust

ain

abil

ity

Eth

ics

Ind

ivid

ual

or

team

wo

rk

Co

mm

un

icat

ion

Pro

ject

man

agem

ent

and

fin

ance

Lif

e-lo

ng

Lea

rnin

g

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

CLE343

Reinforced Concrete Structures

2 2 3

2

1 1

Laboratory





Courses

307

CLE231 Construction Planning and Management L T P C


Pre-requisites

Co-requisites

COURSE OBJECTIVES

(cxcviii) To provide a fundamental understanding of social and economic conditions within which the construction project takes place.

(cxcix) To know the management techniques and project management skills and their application.

(cc) To provide the basic knowledge of software for scheduling and controlling a project.

COURSE OUTCOMES


(cci) Understand the special management skills required in multidisciplinary and global Construction Industry.

(ccii) Integrate and apply theoretical concepts, ideas, tools and techniques to Construction practice.

(cciii) Plan, schedule and control project activities using Project management software.

CATALOG DESCRIPTION

To ensure the safety, quality and economy of construction project, construction management is quite important. In this course students will learn about concept of management, process of planning and scheduling of the project activities, techniques and tools used in scheduling and controlling of the construction projects. They will also learn the quality and safety concerns in the construc-tion work and labour related issues.

TEXT BOOKS

1. Jha Kumar Neeraj (2013), “Construction Project Management”, Pearson Education India. ISBN9788131732496.

REFERENCE BOOKS

(cciv) Chitkara, K. K. (2010), “Construction Project Management : Planning, Scheduling and Controlling”, Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing Company Limited. ISBN 9780070680753.

(ccv) R. L. Peurifoy and C. J. Schexnayder (2008), “Construction Planning, Equipment and Methods”, Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing Company Limited. ISBN 9780073401126.

COURSE CONTENT

Unit I:Principles of Management 7 lecture hours

Definition – Importance – Functions of Management – Relevance to government and Quasi Government departments – Private Contractors – Contracting firms – Organizational structure.

Unit II: Construction Planning and Labour Welfare 9 lecture hours

Collection of field data – Preliminary estimates – Approval and sanction of estimates – Budget provisions – Scheduling using MS project software - Relationships between management and labour – Problems – Labour legislations – Minimum Wages act – In-dustrial Psychology – Safety procedures in construction – MS Project Application.

Unit III: Management Techniques 9 lecture hours

Concepts of Network – Network methods CPM/PERT – Cost control – Principles – Control by graphical representation, by bill of quantities and by network analysis.

308


Unit IV:Project Management 9 lecture hours

Tendering - Arbitration - International projects – Detailed Project Reports (DPR) / Build Own Operate Transfer (BOOT) Projects / Build Operate and Transfer (BOT) – case studies.

Unit V: Accounts and Stores 9 lecture hours

Measurements of work – Checking – Types of bills – Mode of payment – Claims – Banking settlements – Types of accounts - Cash book – Storing – Maintenance Inspection - Inventories – Transfer of surplus and accounting of shortage stores – Procedures adopted in PWD and CPWD.

Mode of Evaluation: The subject understanding of students will be evaluated through CAT-I, II and Semester End Examination.

Components

Theory

Internal

SEE

Marks 50 50

Total Marks 100




Outcomes

1 Understand the special management skills required in multidisciplinary and global

Construction 11

Industry.

2 Integrate and apply theoretical concepts, ideas, tools and techniques to Construction practice. 11

3 Plan, schedule and control project activities using Project management

software. 11

En

gin

eeri

ng K

no

wle

dg

e

Pro

ble

m a

nal

ysi

s

Des

ign

/dev

elo

pm

ent

of

solu

tio

ns

Co

ndu

ct i

nv

esti

gat

ion

sof

com

ple

x p

rob

lem

s

Mo

der

n t

oo

l u

sag

e

T

he

eng

inee

r an

d s

oci

ety

En

vir

on

men

t an

d s

ust

ain

abil

ity

Eth

ics

Ind

ivid

ual

or

team

wo

rk

Co

mm

un

icat

ion

Pro

ject

man

agem

ent

and

fin

ance

Lif

e-lo

ng

Lea

rnin

g

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

CLE231

Construction Planning and

3

Management




Theory


Name:

Admission No:

B Batch No:


B. Tech. (Civil Engineering) VII Semester

Course Code: CLE231 Course Title: Construction Planning and

Management





SECTION A

1.

(a) List the principles of management.

(b) Define critical path method and differentiate between normal duration and crash duration with suitable examples.

(c) What is meant by project crashing?

(d) Differentiate between resource smoothening and resource leveling.

(e) Define critical path in CPM network.

1x5 = 5

2. (a) State the advantages of PERT and CPM with examples.

(b) Differentiate between design built and BOT.

2.5x2=5

SECTION B

3.

The details of activities for a small project are given in Table 1. Suppose If the indirect

expenses for activities are Rs. 12000/day.

Table 1

Activity Normal Crash

Duration Cost(Rs.) Duration Cost(Rs.)

(1, 2) 3 6,000 2 7,000

(2, 3) 4 6,000 2 10,000

(2, 4) 3 9,000 1 17,000

(2, 5) 4 5,000 3 9,000

(4, 5) 5 7,000 2 16,000

(3, 5) 2 8,000 1 9,500

(5, 6) 5 20,000 5 20,000

(a) Determine the cost slopes for each activities using Table 1 and draw diagram of all

activities.

(b) What would be total project cost if the schedule is crashed to maximum?

2x10=20

SECTION C


4. State the advantages of PERT and CPM with examples. 10

5. Differentiate between design built and BOT. 10

6. Define various functions of management with suitable examples. 10

7. Discuss various principals of management. 10

8.

Differentiate between normal cost and crash cost, normal duration and crash duration and

state relationship between them.

10

SECTION D

9. Why is site investigation important for proper bidding? How will the issues of improper site investigations be resolved contractually? Give adequate examples.

15

10 What are the different steps involved in finding the probability of completing a project in the desired duration under certainty, using CPM approach?

15


Courses

309

CLE451 CAD Lab L T P C


Pre-requisites CLE312,CLE313

Co-requisites

COURSE OBJECTIVES

(ccvi) To teach the students to understand the details of STAAD – PRO software package.

(ccvii) To enable the students to know the behaviour of RCC and Steel structures.

(ccviii) To enable the students to design different components of structures

COURSE OUTCOMES


(ccix) Understand the details of STAAD – PRO software package.

(ccx) Know the behavior of RCC and Steel structures.

(ccxi) Know the bending moment diagram drawn in tension face and shear force diagram.

(ccxii) Design different components of structures.


Students will learn the details of STAAD - PRO software package and know the behaviour of RCC and Steel structures. Students will understand the bending moment diagram, drawn in tension face and shear force diagram. Upon completion, students should be able to design different components of RCC and Steel structures

TEXT BOOK

1. V. N. Vazirani & M. M. Ratwani, (1998), Analysis of Structures, Khanna Publishers

REFERENCE BOOKS

(ccxiii) R. L. Jindal, (1996), Indeterminate Structures, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing House.

(ccxiv) G. S. Pandit & Gupta S. P., (1998),. Structural Analysis (A matrix approach), Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Ltd.

(ccxv) Wang C. K., (1996), Matrix Method of Structural Analysis, Jon Wiley publications.

(ccxvi) IS:456 (2000), IS:800


(ccxvii) Design of simply supported RCC beam.

(ccxviii) Design of cantilever RCC beam.

(ccxix) Design of continuous RCC beam.

(ccxx) Design of simply supported Steel beam.

(ccxxi) Design of continuous Steel beam.

(ccxxii) Design of RCC columns with different end conditions.

(ccxxiii) Design of Steel columns with different end conditions.

(ccxxiv) Design of steel trusses.

(ccxxv) Design of RCC portal frames.

(ccxxvi) Design of steel portal frames.

Mode of Evaluation: The subject understanding of students will be evaluated through lab report, lab performance and viva voce.

310 Section 4 | Syllabi of Programme Specific Courses

Components

Laboratory

Internal

SEE

Laboratory

Marks 50

50

Total Marks 100





1 Understand the details of STAAD – PRO software package. 5

2 Know the behavior of RCC and Steel structures. 5

3 Know the bending moment diagram drawn in tension face and shear force

diagram. 5

4 Design different components of structures. 3,5, 6,9,10

En

gin

eeri

ng

Kn

ow

led

ge

Pro

ble

m a

nal

ysi

s

Des

ign

/dev

elo

pm

ent

of

solu

tio

ns

Co

nd

uct

in

ves

tig

atio

ns

of

com

ple

x p

rob

lem

s

Mo

der

n t

oo

l u

sag

e

The

engin

eer

and s

oci

ety

En

vir

on

men

t an

d s

ust

ain

abil

ity

Eth

ics

Ind

ivid

ual

or

team

wo

rk

Co

mm

un

icat

ion

Pro

ject

man

agem

ent

and f

inan

ce

Lif

e-lo

ng

Lea

rnin

g

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

CLE451 CAD Lab 3 3 2 2 1





Courses

311

CLE498 Project Work(Part-I) L T P C



Co-requisites

COURSE OBJECTIVES

(ccxxvii) To develop the capacity of students in correlating theoretical knowledge into practical systems either to perform creative works or to perform analysis and hence to suggest solutions to problems, pertaining to civil engineering domain.

(ccxxviii) Foster collaborative learning skills.

(ccxxix) Develop self-directed inquiry and life-long skills.

(ccxxx) To enhance the communication skills of the students by providing opportunities to discuss in groups and to present their observations, findings and report in formal reviews both in oral and written format.

COURSE OUTCOMES


(ccxxxi) Submit a project synopsis comprising of the application and feasibility of the project.

(ccxxxii) Design a system, component, or process to meet desired needs within realistic constraints such as economic, environmen-tal, social, political, ethical, health care, safety and sustainability.

(ccxxxiii) Work and communicate efficiently in multidisciplinary teams

(ccxxxiv) Identify, formulate, and solve engineering problems.

(ccxxxv) Develop an understanding of professional and ethical responsibility.


The project work can be an investigative analysis of a technical problem in the relevant area, planning and/or design project, experi-mental project or computer application based project on any of the topics. Each project group will submit project synopsis within three weeks from start of seventh semester. Project evaluation committee consisting of three or four faculty members specialised in the various fields of department, shall study the feasibility of each project work before giving consent.

COURSE CONTENT

Project work is of duration of two semesters and is expected to be completed in the eighth semester. Each student group consisting of not more than five members is expected to design and develop a complete system or make an investigative analysis of a technical problem in the relevant area. The project batches are expected to fix their topics, complete preliminary studies like literature survey, field measurements etc. in the seventh semester.

MODE OF EVALUATION:

The evaluation committee shall consist of faculty members constituted by the Dean of School which will comprise of at least three members comprising of the Division Chair/Program Chair a nominee of the Dean. The students guide would be a special invitee to the presentation. The seminar session shall be an open house session. The internal marks would be the average of the marks given by each member of the committee separately in a sealed envelope to the Dean. There will not be more than three students for a group for such project submission.

The assessment of all the projects should be done at the end of the seventh semester by the constituted project evaluation com-mitte. The students will present their project details and progress of their project to the committee. The complete project report is not expected at the end of the seventh semester. However, a three-four page typed report based on the work done should be submitted by each student to the assessing committee. The assessment committee and project guides will award the marks for the individual students in a project as follows:

(ccxxxvi) 20% of the marks is to be awarded by the guide

(ccxxxvii) 30% of the marks during the reviews (I, II and III)

(ccxxxviii) 50% by the evaluation committee during the final viva-voice examinations


Components

Project Progress Report Final Evaluation

Internal Supervisor Project Report Presentation and Viva

voice

Marks 20 30 50

Total Marks 100




1 Submit a project synopsis comprising of the application and feasibility of the

project. 1, 3, 5

2 Design a system, component, or process to meet desired needs within realistic constraints

such as 6, 7, 8, 9, 10

economic, environmental, social, political, ethical, health care, safety and

sustainability.

3 Work and communicate efficiently in multidisciplinary

teams 8, 9, 10

4 Identify, formulate, and solve engineering

problems. 2, 3

5 Develop an understanding of professional and ethical

responsibility. 8, 11, 12

En

gin

eeri

ng

Kn

ow

led

ge

Pro

ble

m a

nal

ysi

s

Des

ign

/dev

elo

pm

ent

of

solu

tio

ns

Co

nd

uct

in

ves

tig

atio

nso

f co

mp

lex

pro

ble

ms

Mo

der

n t

oo

l u

sag

e

The

engin

eer

and s

oci

ety

En

vir

on

men

t an

d s

ust

ain

abil

ity

Eth

ics

Ind

ivid

ual

or

team

wo

rk

Co

mm

un

icat

ion

Pro

ject

man

agem

ent

and f

inan

ce

Lif

e-lo

ng

Lea

rnin

g

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

CLE498

Project work(Part-I) 3 3 3 3 2 2 2 2 3 3 2 2





Courses

313

CLE499 Project Work(Part-II) L T P C



Co-requisites

COURSE OBJECTIVES

(ccxxxix) To develop the capacity of students in correlating theoretical knowledge into practical systems either to perform creative works or to perform analysis and hence to suggest solutions to problems, pertaining to civil engineering domain.

(ccxl) Foster collaborative learning skills.

(ccxli) Develop self-directed inquiry and life-long skills.

(ccxlii) To enhance the communication skills of the students by providing opportunities to discuss in groups and to present their observations, findings and report in formal reviews both in oral and written format.

COURSE OUTCOMES


(ccxliii) Submit a project synopsis comprising of the application and feasibility of the project.

(ccxliv) Design a system, component, or process to meet desired needs within realistic constraints such as economic, environmen-tal, social, political, ethical, health care, safety and sustainability.

(ccxlv) Work and communicate efficiently in multidisciplinary teams

(ccxlvi) Identify, formulate, and solve engineering problems.

(ccxlvii) Develop an understanding of professional and ethical responsibility.


The project work can be an investigative analysis of a technical problem in the relevant area, planning and/or design project, experi-mental project or computer application based project on any of the topics. Each project group will submit project synopsis within three weeks from start of seventh semester. Project evaluation committee consisting of three or four faculty members specialised in the various fields of department, shall study the feasibility of each project work before giving consent.

COURSE CONTENT

Project work is of duration of two semesters and is expected to be completed in the eighth semester. Each student group consisting of not more than five members is expected to design and develop a complete system or make an investigative analysis of a technical problem in the relevant area. The project batches are expected to fix their topics, complete preliminary studies like literature survey, field measurements etc. in the seventh semester.

MODE OF EVALUATION:

The evaluation committee shall consist of faculty members constituted by the Dean of School which will comprise of at least three members comprising of the Division Chair/Program Chair a nominee of the Dean. The students guide would be a special invitee to the presentation. The seminar session shall be an open house session. The internal marks would be the average of the marks given by each member of the committee separately in a sealed envelope to the Dean. There will not be more than three students for a group for such project submission.

The assessment of all the projects should be done at the end of the seventh semester by the constituted project evaluation com-mittee formed. The students will present their project details and progress of their project to the committee. The complete project report is not expected at the end of the seventh semester. However, a three-four page typed report based on the work done should be submitted by each student to the assessing committee. The assessment committee and project guides will award the marks for the individual students in a project as follows:

(ccxlviii) 20% of the marks is to be awarded by the guide

(ccxlix) 30% of the marks during the reviews (I, II and III)

(ccl) 50% by the evaluation committee during the final viva-voice examinations


Components

Project Progress Report Final Evaluation

Internal Supervisor Project Report

Presentation and Viva voice

Marks 20 30 50

Total Marks 100




1 Submit a project synopsis comprising of the application and feasibility of the

project. 1, 3, 5

2 Design a system, component, or process to meet desired needs within realistic constraints

such as 6, 7, 8, 9, 10

economic, environmental, social, political, ethical, health care, safety and

sustainability.

3 Work and communicate efficiently in multidisciplinary

teams 8, 9, 10

4 Identify, formulate, and solve engineering

problems. 2, 3

5 Develop an understanding of professional and ethical

responsibility. 8, 11, 12

En

gin

eeri

ng

Kn

ow

led

ge

Pro

ble

m a

nal

ysi

s

Des

ign

/dev

elo

pm

ent

of

solu

tio

ns

Co

nd

uct

in

ves

tig

atio

nso

f co

mp

lex

pro

ble

ms

Mo

der

n t

oo

l u

sag

e

The

engin

eer

and s

oci

ety

En

vir

on

men

t an

d s

ust

ain

abil

ity

Eth

ics

Ind

ivid

ual

or

team

wo

rk

Co

mm

un

icat

ion

Pro

ject

man

agem

ent

and f

inan

ce

Lif

e-lo

ng

Lea

rnin

g

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

CLE499

Project work(Part-II) 3 3 3 3 2 2 2 2 3 3 2 2




PROGRAMME ELECTIVES


CLE387 Advanced Concrete Design L T P C



Co-requisites --

COURSE OBJECTIVES

(ccli) To enable the students to learn the limit state method of design of concrete members.

(cclii) To enable the students to understand the concepts of advanced concrete design for different structures.

COURSE OUTCOMES

(ccliii) Know the behaviour of reinforced concrete members in bending and flexure.

(ccliv) Understand the behaviour of plastic hinge and moment curvature relationship.

(cclv) To design shear walls.

(cclvi) Design short column and long column subjected to biaxial bending.


Students will learn the concept of designing short column and long column, design of combined foundation and raft foundation. Students will also learn yield line theory, design of bridges and shear walls. Upon completion, students should be able to design compression members, foundations, bridges and shear walls and understand the concept of yield line theory.

Text Book

1. Gambhir, M.L., (2011), Design of Reinforced Concrete Structures, ISBN: 9788120331938.

REFERENCE BOOKS

(cclvii) Varghese, P.C., (2009), Advanced Reinforced Concrete Design, 2nd ed. ISBN: 9788120327870.

(cclviii) Jain, A.K., (1999) “Reinforced Concrete: Limit State Design 7th Edition, ISBN: 8185240663.

(cclix) IS:456 (2000) & SP:16

COURSE CONTENT

Unit I: Design of Compression Members 9 lecture hours

Design of RCC members, Short and Long Column - Design of short column and long column - uniaxial bending - biaxial bending.

Unit II: Design of Foundations 9 lecture hours

Design of Foundation - Design of combined footing - Raft footing - Shell foundations.

Unit III: Design of Slabs 9 lecture hours

Yield Line Theory - Virtual work method - Isotropic slab - Orthotropic slab - Design of slab

Unit IV: Design of Bridges 9 lecture hours

Bridges - classification of bridges - IRC loading -Pigeaud’s method - Coulomb’s method - design of slab bridge - T beam bridge (Using IRC Code)

Unit V: Design of Shear Walls 9 lecture hours

Shear Walls - Design of shear walls - effect of creep and shrinkage - Introduction to Pre-stressed Concrete.


317

Mode of Evaluation: The subject understanding of students will be evaluated through CAT1, 2 & 3 and Semester End Ex-aminations.

Components

Theory

Internal

SEE

Marks 50 50

Total Marks 100




1 Know the behaviour of reinforced concrete members in bending and

flexure 1

2 Understand the behaviour of plastic hinge and moment curvature

relationship 2,4

3 To design shear

walls 3,5

4 Design short column and long column subjected to biaxial

bending. 6

En

gin

eeri

ng K

no

wle

dg

e

Pro

ble

m a

nal

ysi

s

Des

ign

/dev

elo

pm

ent

of

solu

tio

ns

Co

ndu

ct i

nv

esti

gat

ion

s o

f co

mp

lex

pro

ble

ms

Mo

der

n t

oo

l u

sag

e

Th

e en

gin

eer

and s

oci

ety

E

nv

iro

nm

ent

and s

ust

ain

abil

ity

Eth

ics

Ind

ivid

ual

or

team

wo

rk

Co

mm

un

icat

ion

Pro

ject

man

agem

ent

and

fin

ance

Lif

e-lo

ng

Lea

rnin

g

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

CLE325 Advanced Concrete Design 2 2 3 2 1 1




Theory

318



Name:

Admission No:

Batch No:


Course : CLE387 -Advanced Concrete Structures





Answerall Questions

1. Define short column and long column. [5]

2. Define uniaxial bending and biaxial bending. [5]

3. When we should provide combined footing and raft footing? [5]

4. Define yield line and virtual work. [5]

5. Define isotropic slab and orthotropic slab. [5]

6. State Coulomb’s method. [5]

7. State the use of Pigeaud’s method. [5]

8 Mention the names of different types of shear walls. [5]


Answer Question No. 10 & 11 and ANY OTHER TWO Questions

(Note: Use M20 grade of concrete and Fe 415 grade of steel unless otherwise mentioned.

Assume any

missing data suitably.)

9. Design suitable reinforcements for a column of section 400 mm x 400 mm supporting an axial service load of [10]

2000 kN. Draw the reinforcement details of the column section.

10. Design suitable reinforcements for a column of section 400 mm x 400 mm supporting an axial service load of [10]

1500 kN and an uniaxial moment of 10 kNm. Draw the reinforcement details of the column section.

11. Design a combined footing for two reinforced concrete columns using the following data: [10]

(cclx) Size of columns = 400 mm X 400 mm

(cclxi) Spacing of columns = 3.8 m

(cclxii) Load transmitted by each column = 550 kN

(cclxiii) Safe bearing capacity of soil = 150 kN/m2.

12

Design a slab (5 m x 4 m) simply supported on all edges by yield line theory. Weight of floor finish is 1.2 kN/

[10]

m2.Live load is 3 kN/m2.


Courses

319

13. Design a shear wall of length 4.2 m and thickness 250 mm subject to an axial force of 1950 kN, moment of

[10]

600 kNm and shear of 20 kN. Use M25 grade of concrete and Fe 415 grade of steel.


Answer any one Question

(Note:Use M25 grade of concrete and Fe 415 grade of steel.Assume any missing data suitably.)

14 Design the RC deck slab culvert for a national highway to suit the following data: [20]

A two lane carriage way (7.5 m wide)

Footpaths on either side (1 m wide)

Clear span = 6 m

Wearing coat = 80 mm

Width of bearing = 0.4 m

Loading = IRC class AA tracked vehicle.

15 Design a combined footing for three reinforced concrete columns using the following data: [20]

(cclxiv) Size of columns = 450 mm X 450 mm

(cclxv) Spacing of columns = 3.5 m

(cclxvi) Load transmitted by each column = 600 kN

(cclxvii) Safe bearing capacity of soil = 125 kN/m2.

Draw the elevation view of the combined footing showing the reinforcement details.



CLE371 Socio-economic studies &EIA L T P C



Co-requisites --

COURSE OBJECTIVES

(cclxviii) To introduce the relevant legal systems and to examine the processes by which normative rules are adopted and enforced.

(cclxix) To develop an understanding of the use of EIA procedures and methods within the project and planning cycle to promote more sustainable forms of development.

(cclxx) To promote more effective use of Environmental Management Systems and implementation of Environmental require-ments.

COURSE OUTCOMES


(cclxxi) Apply the main procedures and methods which are used at different stages in EIA process in Project Appraisal, Decision making and implementation.

(cclxxii) Develop on Environmental Management Systems.

(cclxxiii) Manage Environmental law principles in the Regional and International context.

CATALOG DESCRIPTION

Discussion on Impact of development on environment and Environmental Impact Assessment (EIA) and Environmental Impact Statement (EIS).Objective of the course, Historical development of EIA and its capability and limitations and Legal provisions on EIA. EIA methods, applications and quantitative methods are included. Application of EIA on air, water and land in 21st Century is addresses here.

TEXT BOOKS

(cclxxiv) John Glasson, Riki Therivel, Andrew Chadwick (2011), Introduction to Environmental Impact Assessment, Routledge, ISBN: 978-0-415-66470-7.

(cclxxv) Anjaneyulu,Y., Valli Manickam, (2011), Environmental Impact Assessment Methodologies, CRC Press, ISBN: 978-0415665568.

REFERENCE BOOKS

(cclxxvi) Larry Canter (1995), Environmental Impact Assessment, McGraw-Hill, ISBN: 978-0070097674.

(cclxxvii) Judith Petts (1999), Hand Book of Environmental Impact Assessment, Wiley-Blackwell, ISBN: 978-0632047727

COURSE CONTENT

Unit I: Overview 10 lecture hours

Impact of development on environment and Environmental Impact Assessment (EIA) and Environmental Impact Statement (EIS)

– Objectives – Historical development – EIA capability and limitations – Legal provisions on EIA.

Unit II: EIA Methods 8 lecture hours

Methods of EIA – Strengths, weaknesses and applicability – Appropriate methodology – Case studies.

Unit III: EIA Applications 9 lecture hours

Socio Economic Impact – Assessment of Impact on land, water and air, energy impact; Impact on flora and fauna; Mathematical models; public participation – Reports – Exchange of Information – Post Audit – Rapid EIA.


Unit IV : Quantitative Methods 9 lecture hours

321

Use the mathematical models in EIA – Water quality, air quality and noise; assumptions and limitations. Basic tenets of Global Climate Models.

Unit V: EIA and the 21st Century 9 lecture hours

EIA and the 21st Century – Addressing EIA and Climate Change. Plan for mitigation of adverse impact on

environment – options for mitigation of impact on water, air and land, flora and fauna; Addressing the issues related to

the project affected people.

Mode of Evaluation: The subject understanding of students will be evaluated through CAT1, 2 & 3 and semester end

examinations.

Components

Theory

Internal

SEE

Marks 50 50

Total Marks 100




1 Apply the main procedures and methods which are used at different stages in EIA process in

Project 2

Appraisal, Decision making and implementation.

2 Develop on Environmental Management Systems. 1

3 Manage Environmental law principles in the Regional and International

context. 11

En

gin

eeri

ng

Kn

ow

led

ge

Pro

ble

m a

nal

ysi

s

Des

ign

/dev

elo

pm

ent

of

solu

tio

ns

Co

nd

uct

in

ves

tig

atio

nso

f co

mp

lex

pro

ble

ms

Mo

der

n t

oo

l u

sag

e

The

engin

eer

and s

oci

ety

En

vir

on

men

t an

d s

ust

ain

abil

ity

Eth

ics

Ind

ivid

ual

or

team

wo

rk

Co

mm

un

icat

ion

Pro

ject

man

agem

ent

and f

inan

ce

Lif

e-lo

ng

Lea

rnin

g

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

CLE371 Socio-economic studies &EIA 2 1 2





CLE372 Ground Improvement Techniques L T P C



Co-requisites

COURSE OBJECTIVES

(cclxxviii) To find out proper methods of ground improvement.

(cclxxix) To understand various soil engineering problems.

(cclxxx) To use geo-textiles and stabilizers for soil improvement.

COURSE OUTCOMES


(cclxxxi) Choose correct method for ground improvement.

(cclxxxii) Choose correct stabilizing material for expansive soils.

(cclxxxiii) Design grouting process for various soil engineering problems.


Ground improvement techniques are one of the important aspect for soil stabilization. It can be done by adding materials, stone column, sand drains etc. Compaction is required for the Ground improvement techniques and its type vary with the type of soils. Sometime grouting and geo-textiles materials are also used for Ground improvement.

TEXT BOOKS

(cclxxxiv) Nihar Ranjan Patra (2012), Ground improvement techniques 1st Edition, Vikas Publishing House. ISBN: 978-93-259-6001-5.

REFERENCE BOOK

(cclxxxv) Colin Jfp Jones (1996), Earth Reinforcement & Soil Structures, Thomas Telford. ISBN: 978-07-277-3489-1.

(cclxxxvi) Nelson, John D. Nelson, Ron Miller (1997), Expansive Soils: Problems and Practice in Foundation and Pavement Engi-neering New edition, Wiley-Interscience. ISBN: 978-04-711-8114-9.

(cclxxxvii) P. Purushothama Raj (1999), Ground Improvement Techniques 1st Edition, Laxmi Publications. ISBN: 978-81-318-0594-7.

(cclxxxviii) Rao (1990), Engineering with Geo-synthetics, Mcgraw-hill Education.

ISBN: 978-00-746-0323-9.

(cclxxxix) Bureau of Indian Standards, Selection of ground improvement techniques for foundation in weak soils, guidelines, Bureau of Indian Standards, New Delhi.

COURSE CONTENT

Unit I: Introduction & Dewatering 9 lecture hours

Need and objectives of ground improvement, classification of ground modification techniques, suitability and feasibility, emerging trends in ground improvement, methods of de-watering, sumps and interceptor ditches, single, multi stage well points, vacuum well points.

Horizontal wells, foundation drains, blanket drains, criteria for selection of fill material around drains, Electro-osmosis.


Unit II: Stabilization 9 lecture hours

323

Soil improvement by adding materials, lime, flyash, cement and other chemicals and bitumen, sand column, stone column, sand drains, prefabricated drains, lime column, soil-lime column, stabilization of soft clay or silt with lime, bearing capacity and settle-ment of treated soils, improvement in slope stability, control methods.

Unit III: Dynamic compaction 9 lecture hours

Principles of compaction, field compaction techniques static vibratory, impact, compaction control, compaction using vibratory probes, vibro-techniques, vibro equipment, vibro-compaction and replacement process, vibro systems and liquefaction, soil im-provement by thermal treatment, preloading techniques, surface compaction, introduction to bio technical stabilization.

Unit IV:Grouting 9 lecture hours

Introduction, suspension grout, solution grout, grouting equipments and methods, grouting, design and layout granular piles – ultimate bearing capacity and settlement, method of construction, load test.

Unit V: Underpinning of foundations & Geotextiles 9 lecture hours

Importance and situations for underpinning, methodology, typicalexamples. Geotextiles – types, functions, specifications, precau-tions in transportation and storage.


Components

Theory

Internal

SEE

Marks 50 50

Total Marks 100





1 Choose correct method for ground improvement. 7

2 Choose correct stabilizing material for expansive

soils. 7

3 Design grouting process for various soil engineering

problems. 3, 4

En

gin

eeri

ng K

no

wle

dg

e

Pro

ble

m a

nal

ysi

s

Des

ign

/dev

elo

pm

ent

of

solu

tio

ns

Co

ndu

ct i

nv

esti

gat

ion

sof

com

ple

x p

rob

lem

s

Mo

der

n t

oo

l u

sag

e

T

he

eng

inee

r an

d s

oci

ety

En

vir

on

men

t an

d s

ust

ain

abil

ity

Eth

ics

Ind

ivid

ual

or

team

wo

rk

Co

mm

un

icat

ion

Pro

ject

man

agem

ent

and

fin

ance

Lif

e-lo

ng

Lea

rnin

g

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

CLE372 Ground Improvement Techniques 1 1 1




324



Name:

Admission No:

Batch No:


Course : CLE 372-Ground Improvement Techniques




SECTION A

1.

(a) For greater depth, well point system is more suitable than pits and trenches. Why?

(b) Electro-osmosis method is suitable for very fine grained soil. Justify your answer.

(c) Stone columns are used for improving the strength of cohesive soils. Give your reasons.

(d) Dry density of soil varies with water content. Give justification.

(e)Compacting effort in case of sheep foot roller is due to static weight and kneading.

Comment.

1x5 = 5

2. (a) Draw the sketch of single stage well point system and multi stage well point system.

(b) Enumerate various factors affecting compaction.

2.5x2=5

SECTION B

3.

(a)Classify the different ground modification techniques. Describe their suitability and

feasibility.

(b) Enumerate the various methods of dewatering. Explain the following:

i. Vacuum Well Point system

ii. Electro-osmosis method

2x10=20

SECTION C


4. Explain how liquefaction affects stability of structure while seismic actions. Discuss various

remedies of liquefaction

10

5. Discuss thermal stabilization for treatment of ground. Describe various factors affecting the

stabilization of ground.

10

6. Define various types of grouting method and discuss their applications. 10

7. Discuss the prefabricated drains. Explain its advantages over sand drain. 10

8. Describe the significance of underpinning. Discuss various methods of underpinning with

the help of examples.

10

SECTION D

9. A tank farm was proposed to be built at Paradeep, Orissa. The subsoil consists of loose to

medium dense fine sands to a depth of 10m. Discuss the method suitable for the purpose to

limit the settlement of the tanks.

15

10

Suppose you want to use geotextile in earth dam construction. Explaining its suitability,

discuss the different types and function of Geotextiles. Also, explain the precaution in

transportation and storage of geotextiles.

15


CLE373 Pollution Control and Monitoring L T P C


Pre-requisites//Exposure EVS101

Co-requisites

COURSE OBJECTIVES

(ccxc) To understand the factors that must be satisfied for potable water, land and air for the removal and treatment of pollutants.

(ccxci) To provide a strong link between the Pollution Damage, Public Authority Control Systems and Technical Control Systems

(ccxcii) To know the relationship between social, legislative and biological constraints in a modern developed society.

COURSE OUTCOMES


(ccxciii) Describe the principles of the biological and chemical treatment processes that are required to ensure adequate quality and quantities of potable water.

(ccxciv) Implement the principle techniques currently in use for wastewater treatment and to review operational procedures for the plant involved.

(ccxcv) Use advanced methods for monitoring and modeling spatial and temporal patterns of pollution.

CATALOG DESCRIPTION

This course emphasizes pollutions in water, air, land. A brief discussion on water pollution due to industrial, agricultural and mu-nicipal wastes.Source of air pollution and effects of pollution on human health, vegetation and climate.Air quality monitoring and air pollution control legislation. Noise Pollution and Control, Solid Waste Management techniques and Environmental Sanitation system included in this course.

TEXT BOOKS

(ccxcvi) Rao C.S. (2006), Environmental Pollution Control Engineering, New Age International, ISBN: 9788122418354.

(ccxcvii) Arcadio P Sincero, Gregoria A Sincero (2009), Environmental Engineering : A Design Approach, PHI Learning, ISBN: 9788120314740.

REFERENCE BOOKS

(ccxcviii) George Tchobanoglous, Donald R. Rowe, Howard S. Peavy, Environmental Engineering, McGraw-Hill Publishing Co., ISBN: 9780071002318.

(ccxcix) P. AarneVesilind, Susan M. Morga (2004), Introducing to Environmental Engineering, Nelson Engineering, ISBN: 9780534378127.

(ccc) Gerard Kiley (1996), Environmental Engineering, McGraw-Hill, ISBN: 978-0077091279.

COURSE CONTENT

Unit I: Water Pollution & Control 9 lecture hours

Natural process-pollution due to industrial, agricultural and municipal wastes-limitations of disposal by dilution-BOD consider-ation in streams – Oxygen Sag Curve-Water pollution control legislation.

Unit II: Air Pollution and Control 10 lecture hours

Pollution and their sources-effects of pollution on human health, vegetation and climate-prevention and control of particulate-industry and air-pollution surveys and sampling-Air quality monitoring- air pollution control legislation.


Unit III: Noise Pollution and Control 8lecture hours

327

Sound and Noise: Sources of noise pollution – environmental and industrial noise; effects of noise pollution; fundamentals of sound generation, propogation etc; sound measurement; sound level meters – types, components, Measures for prevention and control of noise; environmental and industrial noise; noise control legislation.

Unit IV: Solid Waste Management 8lecture hours

Source characteristics – quantities – collection methods and disposal techniques – sanitary landfill – incineration – and pyrolysis, composting, aerobic and anaerobic- economics of composting; recycling and reuse.

Unit V: Environmental Sanitation 10 lecture hours

Relation of food to disease-principles of food sanitation-sanitation of kitchens, restaurants and other catering establishments-quality changes in milk-milk as carrier of infection-pasteurisation of milk-HTST and LTLT processes – cattleshed sanitation. Orientation of buildings with respect to the direction of prevailing winds and solar movement. Air movement inside the buildings for a healthy residential environment.

Mode of Evaluation: The subject understanding of students will be evaluated through CAT1, 2 and semester end examinations.

Components

Theory

Internal

SEE

Marks 50 50

Total Marks 100




1 Describe the principles of the biological and chemical treatment processes that are required to ensure 1

adequate quality and quantities of potable

water.

2 Implement the principle techniques currently in use for wastewater treatment and to review opera- 2, 3

tional procedures for the plant involved.

3 Use advanced methods for monitoring and modeling spatial and temporal patterns of pollution. 3, 5

En

gin

eeri

ng

Kn

ow

led

ge

Pro

ble

m a

nal

ysi

s

Des

ign

/dev

elo

pm

ent

of

solu

tio

ns

Co

nd

uct

in

ves

tig

atio

nso

f co

mp

lex

pro

ble

ms

Mo

der

n t

oo

l u

sag

e

Th

e en

gin

eer

and s

oci

ety

E

nv

iro

nm

ent

and

su

stai

nab

ilit

y

Eth

ics

Ind

ivid

ual

or

team

wo

rk

Co

mm

un

icat

ion

Pro

ject

man

agem

ent

and

fin

ance

Lif

e-lo

ng

Lea

rnin

g

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

CLE373 Pollution Control and Monitoring 1 2 1






Name: Name:

Admission No:

Batch No:


Course : CLE373 - Pollution Control and Monitoring


SECTION A

1.

(a) Name the techniques used to detect the nature and quantity of NOx, Sox and CO as a

pollutant.

(b) Differentiate between BOD and COD

(c) Name the materials by which fabric filter is manufactured for controlling Air pollution

(d) Differentiate between Refuse and waste

(e) Name the Abbreviations : LTLT, HTST, and UHT

1x5 = 5

2. (a) Enlist various sources and different measures for prevention of Noise pollution.

(b)Describe Sanitary Landfill with the neat sketch

2.5x2=5

SECTION B

3. (a) Explain the concept of Integrated Solid Waste Management (ISWM) approach with the

help of suitable examples

(b)Describe any two techniques for collection of gaseous air pollutant in details.

2x10=20

SECTION C


4. Describe the working principle of Flame Photometric Analyzer with neat and labeled sketch. 10

5. Define Eutrophication. Explain how Liebig’ s Law of minimum of minimum helps in controlling

Eutrophication, elaborate it with proper explanation.

10

6. Describe Oxygen Sag Curve along with a neat graph. Also describe rate of increase of deficit

with the help of equations involved.

10

7. Consider yourself water pollution control analyst. After a government survey you have given the

following observations of a water body where a point of continuous discharge is situated on the

bank of water body and mixes its pollution with a river, the BOD is 10.9 mg/L, and DO is 7.6

mg/L. The river and waste mixture has a temperature of 20o C, a deoxygenation constant kd of

0.20/day, an average flow speed of 0.30 m/s, and an average depth of 3.0 m.

a) Find the time and distance at which oxygen deficit is at a maximum

b) Find the minimum value of DO

(consider saturation value of DO= 9.09 mg/L)

10

8.

Estimate the moisture content of a solid waste sample with the following composition

Component

Food wastes

Paper Cardboard Plastics Garden Trimming

Wood Tin cans

Percent by mass

15 45 10 10 10 5 5

10

SECTION D

9. Consider yourself as an Environmental Engineer posted in Pune city having current population

of 772,515 people. Elaborate what design and strategies you adopt to design MSW landfill site

which will fulfill the current and future population demand. Draw its Layout Plan and Enlist all

essential “components” of landfill site used for its designing. Also consider the regulatory

requirements specified by pollution control board and enlist the same in your submitted report.

15

10

Consider yourself as an Industrialist who is investing his/her money 270 Crores in a 1700

hectares area to establish a Industry. Keeping this in mind what legal provisions for the

establishment and operation of the above industrial plant are required as per the Air and Water

Pollution Control Act 1981 and 1974 respectively.

15


CLE374 Natural Disaster Mitigation and Management L T P C


Pre-requisites

Co-requisites --

COURSE OBJECTIVES

(ccci) Know about the types of natural and environmental disasters.

(cccii) Develop skills in various stages of disaster preparedness, mitigation and management.

(ccciii) Know the methodology for disaster risk assessment.

COURSE OUTCOMES


(ccciv) The types of natural and environmental disasters and its causes.

(cccv) About organizational and Administrative strategies for managing disasters.

(cccvi) About the early warning systems, monitoring of disasters effect and necessity of rehabilitation.

(cccvii) About the engineering and non-engineering controls of mitigating various natural disasters.

(cccviii) Learn methodologies for disaster risk assessment with the help of latest tools like GPS, GIS, Remote sensing, information technologies, etc.

CATALOG DESCRIPTION

With the increases in the numbers of interventions by the human beings with the natural processes and by the implication on load on the environment, natural disasters are common in the today’s world. Students learn natural disasters around the world and risk assessment, disaster mitigation, preparedness, response and recovery, earthquake, geological, geo-morphological aspects, landslides, severe weather & tornadoes, cyclones, floods and droughts. Upon completion, students should be able to Map, conduct modeling, risk analysis and loss estimation, natural disaster risk analysis and apply prevention and mitigation measures to reduce the impacts.

TEXT BOOKS

(cccix) Edward A Keller, Robert H Blodgett (2007), Natural Hazards: Earth’s Processes as Hazards, Disasters, and Catastrophes, Pearson Prentice Hall, 2nd Edition. ISBN: 9780132361316

(cccx) Didax (2007), Natural Disasters, Didax Educational Resources: ISBN: 9781583242728

REFERENCE BOOKS

Edward Bryant (2005), Natural Hazards, Cambridge University Press, New York. ISBN: 978-0521537438

(cccxi) Robert L Kovach Earth’s Fury (1995), An Introduction to Natural Hazards and Disasters, Prentice Hall. ISBN: 9780130424334

(cccxii) Davi Alexander (1993), Natural Disasters, Routledge. ISBN: 9781857280937

COURSE CONTENT

Unit I: Natural Disasters – Overview 6 lecture hours

Introduction- Natural Disasters around the world- Natural Disaster Risk Assessment- Earth and its characteristics – Environmental Change and Degradation - Climate Change - Global warming – Human Dimensions of Global environment Change – Disaster mitigation, preparedness, response and recovery- comprehensive emergency management Early warning systems and Disaster Preparedness– Rehabilitation, Vulnerable Populations - Logistics and Services, Food, Nutrition and Shelter -Role of UN Red cross and NGOs.

Unit II: Plate Tectonics& Earthquakes 6 lecture hours

Introduction and Review - Natural Disasters -Principles, Elements, and Systems - Geological-Geo-morphological aspects, - Earth-quake-Geology, Seismology, Characteristics and dimensions– Landslides- Human impact on


the mountainous terrain and its relationship with Rainfall, liquefaction etc- Tsunami - Nature and characteristics.

Unit III: Critical climate system aspects and Processes 9 lecture hours

Oceanic, Atmospheric and Hydrologic cycles - Severe Weather & Tornadoes , Cyclones, Floods and Droughts - Global Patterns - - Mitigation & Preparation – Drought – Famine- nature & dimensions – Drought Assessment & Monitoring.

Unit IV: Natural hazards Assessment and Communication 9 lecture hours

Mapping - Modeling, risk analysis and loss estimation – Natural disaster risk analysis - prevention and mitigation - Applications of Space Technology (Satellite Communications, GPS, GIS and Remote Sensing and Information / Communication Technologies ( ICT ) in Early warning Systems - Disaster Monitoring and Support Centre– Information Dissemination – Mobile Communica-tions etc.

Unit V: Administrative mechanisms 9 lecture hours

CommModuley and Social organizations – Education and Training – Establishment of capacity building among various stake holders – Government - Educational institutions – Use of Multi-media knowledge products for self-education.


Components

Theory

Internal

SEE

Marks 50 50

Total Marks 100




1 The types of natural and environmental disasters and its causes. 1

2 About organizational and Administrative strategies for managing disasters. 11

3 About the early warning systems, monitoring of disasters effect and necessity of rehabilitation. 3, 7

4 About the engineering and non-engineering controls of mitigating various natural disasters. 7

5 Learn methodologies for disaster risk assessment with the help of latest tools like GPS, GIS,

Remote 5

sensing, information technologies, etc.

En

gin

eeri

ng K

no

wle

dg

e

Pro

ble

m a

nal

ysi

s

Des

ign

/dev

elo

pm

ent

of

solu

tio

ns

Co

ndu

ct i

nv

esti

gat

ion

s o

f co

mp

lex

pro

ble

ms

Mo

der

n t

oo

l u

sag

e

Th

e en

gin

eer

and s

oci

ety

En

vir

on

men

t an

d s

ust

ain

abil

ity

Eth

ics

Ind

ivid

ual

or

team

wo

rk

Co

mm

un

icat

ion

Pro

ject

man

agem

ent

and

fin

ance

Lif

e-lo

ng

Lea

rnin

g

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

CLE374 NDMM 1 1 2 2




`



Name:

Admission No:

Batch No:


Course : CLE374- Natural Disaster Mitigation and Management


331

Programme: B. Tech Semester: Fall2013-14




1. How will you plan for disaster management for a thermal power plant? [5]

2. Differentiate between rapid onset and slow onset natural Disaster. [5]

3. Describe the procedure for preparing development planning for recording the disaster. [5]

4. Explain how the public awareness in helpful in risk reduction. [5]

(cccxiii) Discuss the various types of natural disasters and highlight the specific efforts to mitigate disasters in India. [5]

6. Enlist the necessary steps to be avoid dangerous epidemics after a flood disaster. [5]

7. Illustrate the features of Community Based Disaster Management? [5]

8. What are 4 principle characteristics of ground shaking? [5]


Answer any 4 questions

9. Explain the legal / financial problems the management has to face if safety measures taken by them are [10]

found to be in-adequate

10. What are the factors to be considered while planning the rebuilding works after a major disaster due to [10]

earthquake?

11. Describe trigger mechanism with the flow chart. What are the factors responsible for the success of trigger [10]

mechanism?

(cccxiv) Elaborate the function of financial arrangement with the importance of areas of improvement on disaster. [10]

13. Briefly describe about the use and importance of Geographical Information System and Video teleconfer- [10]

encing.



14.

What the cause for the Tsunami 2004 which inflicted heavy loss to life and property along the coast

Tam- [20]

ilnadu? Specify its epicenter and magnitude.

15. Write a short note on the following: [20]

Liquefaction Risk Assessment

Natural Disaster Relief Act Decision support system


332



Courses

333

CLE375 Engineering Hydrology L T P C


Pre-requisites --

Co-requisites --

COURSE OBJECTIVES

(cccxv) To understand the planning and construction of irrigation structures.

(cccxvi) To have an idea about the construction of highway culverts and bridges.

(cccxvii) To understand the measures of flood control and economic functioning of hydrologic structures.

COURSE OUTCOMES


(cccxviii) Know the precipitation potential & analysis of precipitation data.

(cccxix) Get exposure about the stream flow measurements & runoff computations.

(cccxx) Implement the hydraulic principles involved as well as its applications to engineering problems.

CATALOG DESCRIPTION

Introduction to Hydrology, Hydrologic Processes, Atmospheric and Subsurface Waterand hydrologic measurements.Unit Hydro-graph, Hydrologic Design, Design Storm, Precipitation, streamflow and hydrograph analysis.Hydrologic flood routing.Statistical analysis in water resources.Groundwater hydrology.Engineering applications.

TEXT BOOKS

1. Subramanya K. (2008), Engineering Hydrology, Tata McGraw Hill Co., Graw Hill Co. ISBN: 9780074624494.

REFERENCE BOOKS

(cccxxi) Varshney R.S. (2012), Engineering Hydrology, Nem Chand & Brothers Publishers. ISBN: 8185240688.

(cccxxii) Das (2009), Hydrology & Soil Conservation Engineering, Prentice-Hall of India. ISBN: 9788120335868.

COURSE CONTENT

Unit I: Introduction 10 lecture hours

Definition – Development of hydrology – hydrologic design – Hydrologic failures – Importance in Engineering – Hydrological budget.

Unit II: Hydro Meteorology 9 lecture hours

Weather and hydrology – General circulation Temperature humidity – Wind – Diurnal and monsonic wind systems.

Unit III: Precipitation and Abstraction 10 lecture hours

Formation of precipitation – forms of precipitation – types of precipitation – Rainfall measurement – gauges – recorders – process-ing precipitation data – check for consistency – supply of missing data – Aerial mean mass curve technique – Intensity duration frequency curves. Process of evaporation, transpiration – Infiltration factors affecting evaporation – Measurement of evaporation and infiltration indices – Horton’s equation.

Unit IV : Hydrograph 9 lecture hours

Runoff - Factors affecting runoff – measurement – stream gauging – stage discharge relationship –Hydrograph components – Hy-drograph separation – Module hydrograph – Derivation of Module Hydrograph – S. Hydrograph – Synthetic hydrograph.

334


Unit V: Flood Analysis 8 lecture hours

Empirical methods – statistical methods – flood routing – routing through reservoir routing – through channels (Muskinggum method) – flood forecasting


Components

Theory

Internal

SEE

Marks 50 50

Total Marks 100





1 Know the precipitation potential & analysis of precipitation

data. 1

2 Get exposure about the stream flow measurements & runoff

computations. 1,2

3 Implement the hydraulic principles involved as well as its applications to engineering

problems. 4

En

gin

eeri

ng K

no

wle

dg

e

Pro

ble

m a

nal

ysi

s

Des

ign

/dev

elo

pm

ent

of

solu

tio

ns

Co

ndu

ct i

nv

esti

gat

ion

sof

com

ple

x p

rob

lem

s

Mo

der

n t

oo

l u

sag

e

Th

e en

gin

eer

and s

oci

ety

En

vir

on

men

t an

d s

ust

ain

abil

ity

Eth

ics

Ind

ivid

ual

or

team

wo

rk

Co

mm

un

icat

ion

Pro

ject

man

agem

ent

and

fin

ance

Lif

e-lo

ng

Lea

rnin

g

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

CLE375 Engineering Hydrology 1 2 1




Name:

Admission No:

Batch No:


B. Tech. (Civil Engineering) VI Semester

Course Code: CLE375 Course Title: Engineering Hydrology





SECTION A

1.

(a) Lysimeter is used to measure...............?

(b)Hypsometry deals in watershed analysis to measure................?

(c) Modified Penman equation consists a vegetation specific parameter. Justify?

(d)Wooden base is used in Class A Pan evaporimeter. Why?

(e)Unit of precipitation is mm. Give reason.

1x5 = 5

2. (a) Describe base flow separation method (hydrograph).

(b) Describe the peak flood determination by rational method.

2.5x2=5

SECTION B

3.

(a)A culvert is proposed across a stream draining an area of 185 hectares. The catchment has a slope of 0.004 and the length of travel of water is 1150 m. Estimate the 25 years flood if the rainfall is given by

I = 500 T / ( t +15) 0.72

where,

I is in mm/hr, T r is in years and, t is in minutes.

Assume runoff coefficient as 0.35.

(b)Analysis of data on maximum one-day rainfall depth at Mumbai indicated the depth of 200 mm had a return period of 50 years. Determine the probability of a one-day rainfall depth equal to or greater than 200 mm at Mumbai occurring

(a) once in 20 successive years,

(b) two times in 15 successive years, and

(c) at least once in 20 successive years.

2x10=20

SECTION C


4. List at least four major factors that affect evapotranspiration (ET). State the effect of change in

each factor to the ET rate. What do you mean by albedo?

10

5. Describe "maximum intensity-duration-frequency relationship" and "maximum depth-area-

duration curve" with the help of neat sketch.

10

6. For the given rating equation

Q = C (G - α)β

find out exponential parameter (β) and correlation coefficient (r).

10

7. Briefly describe the non-recording raingauge (Symons gauge) with the help of neat sketch and

for Indian conditions mention the practical raingauge network density (IS: 4987-1968).

10

8. The mass curve of an isolated storm over a watershed is given below:

Time from start (h) 0 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5 4.0 4.5 5.0

Cumulative rainfall (cm)

0 0.25 0.50 1.10 1.60 2.60 3.50 5.70 6.50 7.30 7.70

If the storm produced a direct runoff of 3.5 cm at outlet of the watershed, estimate the φ–index

of the storm and duration of rainfall excess.

10

SECTION D

9. A 100 ha watershed has the following characteristics:

i. Maximum length of travel of water in the catchment = 3500 m ii. Difference in elevation between the most remote point on the catchment and the outlet = 65

m. iii. Land use/cover details:

Land use/ cover Area (ha) Runoff coefficient

Forest 30 0.25

Pasture 10 0.16

Cultivated land 60 0.40

15

10. Hydrology deals with the measurement of water table (water balance studies). As a hydrologist

calculate the change in water table depth in a month period using the catchment record provided

by meteorological station such as: Datum: 100.00 m; Inflow and outflow: 6 and 6.5 m³/s;

Precipitation: 145 cm; evapotranspiration: 6.10 cm; Watershed area: 5000 ha. Assume other

suitable data.

15


Courses

335

CLE376 Renewable Sources of Energy & Hydropower Engineering L T P C


Pre-requisites --

Co-requisites --

COURSE OBJECTIVES

(cccxxiii) Create an awareness about the different forms of Energy and then utilization for sustainability

(cccxxiv) To give an idea about the utilization of waste as renewable energy for the future generations to come.

(cccxxv) Design the solar collector, solar cells

COURSE OUTCOMES


(cccxxvi) Identify the forms of energy and then use as energy resource

(cccxxvii) Implement the methods involved in converting different source to energy

(cccxxviii) Design the plant, based on the principles and form of resources.

CATALOG DESCRIPTION

In order to reduce the load on the non-renewable sources of energy and minimize the impacts caused by them, it is essential to shift from the non-renewable to different forms of renewable sources of energy. Students will learn about Primary energy sources, direct energy conversion, comparison with conventional energy, solar thermal applications, energy from the wind, hydro Power, description & principles of working and basic design aspects of renewable sources of energy. Upon completion, students should be able to design the solar plants, wind power station, hydro power station and implement different application of renewable sources of energy.

TEXT BOOKS

(cccxxix) GD Rai (2010), Non-Conventional Energy Sources, 1st Edition, Khanna Publishers. ISBN: 9788174090737

(cccxxx) Bent Sorensen (2010), Renewable Energy: Physics, Engineering, Environmental Impacts, Economics &Planning,Fourth Edition, Academic Press, 4th edition. ISBN:978-0123750259

REFERENCE BOOKS

(cccxxxi) William H. Kemp (2009), The Renewable Energy Handbook, Aztext Press; Third Edition. ISBN: 978-0981013213

(cccxxxii) Bent Sorensen (2004), Renewable energy, Third edition, Academic Press. ISBN: 9780080470344

COURSE CONTENT

Unit I: Solar Energy 6 lecture hours

Primary energy sources, direct energy conversion, comparison with conventional energy, conversion devices, Solar energy – Prin-ciples of solar energy collection, solar radiation, measurements, instruments, data and estimation, type of collectors, characteristics and design principles of different types of collectors, testing of collectors.

Unit II: Application of Solar Energy 6 lecture hours

Solar thermal applications - water heaters and air heaters performance and applications - simple calculations - solar cooling, solar drying, solar ponds, solar tower concepts, solar furnace.

Unit III: Wind and Tidal Energy 9 lecture hours

Energy from the wind - general theory of wind mills - design aspects of horizontal axis and vertical axis wind mills, applications - Energy from tides and waves - working principles of tidal plants and ocean thermal energy conversion plants - power from geo-thermal energy - principle of working of geothermal power plants.

336


Unit IV : Hydro Energy and Waste Energy 9 lecture hours

Hydro Power: Types, site identification, head and flow measurement, discharge curve, estimation of power potential and system components. Energy from bio-mass, bio-gas plants - various types - design principles of bio-gas plant applications- Energy from wastes – wastes burning power plants - utilization of industrial and municipal wastes – energy from the agriculture wastes.

Unit V: Energy Conversion Systems and Applications 9 lecture hours

Description, Principles of working and basic design aspects only – Magneto-hydrodynamic systems- thermo – electric generators, thermionioc generators - fuel cells, solar cells, types, EMF generated, power output - losses and efficiency and applications.


Components

Theory

Internal

SEE

Marks 50 50

Total Marks 100




Outcomes

1 Identify the forms of energy and then use as energy resource 1

2 Implement the methods involved in converting different source to

energy 2, 7

3 Design the plant, based on the principles and form of resources. 3

En

gin

eeri

ng

Kn

ow

led

ge

Pro

ble

m a

nal

ysi

s

Des

ign

/dev

elo

pm

ent

of

solu

tio

ns

Co

nd

uct

in

ves

tig

atio

nso

f co

mp

lex

pro

ble

ms

Mo

der

n t

oo

l u

sag

e

The

engin

eer

and s

oci

ety

E

nv

iro

nm

ent

and

su

stai

nab

ilit

y

Eth

ics

Ind

ivid

ual

or

team

wo

rk

Co

mm

un

icat

ion

Pro

ject

man

agem

ent

and f

inan

ce

Lif

e-lo

ng

Lea

rnin

g

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

CLE376 RSEHE 1 1 1 2






Name:

Admission No:

Batch No:


Course : CLE376-Renewable sources of Energy and Hydropower Engineering


337





SECTION A

1.

a) What is the difference between biomass and bio gas?

b) What is the basic principle of ocean thermal energy conversion (OTEC)?

c) What is the basic principle of wind energy conversion?

d) What is the difference between fuel cell and a battery?

e) What is the main difference between sensible and latent heat storage.

1x5 = 5

2. a) Describe the main considerations in selecting a site for wind generators.

b) Derive the expression for power developed due to wind.

2.5x2=5

SECTION B

3. a) Describe the main considerations in selecting a site for wind generators.

b) What is the difference between primary and secondary energy resources?

2x10=20

SECTION C


4. What is the principle of solar photovoltaic power generation? 10

5. Derive the expression for power developed due to wind. Describe the main considerations in

selecting a site for wind generators.

10

6. Derive an expression for the emf of a fuel cell. 10

7. What are the effects of sedimentation in Hydropower stations? 10

8. What are the benefits of hydropower projects? 10

SECTION D

9. Suppose Sun heats the water by giving heat Q1 due to which the temp of fluid is raised from T1

to T2. If temperature of atmosphere is Tatm, can we recover all of the provided heat energy as

work? Explain why or why not.

Suppose we use the best possible engine to extract work output. Derive the expression for the

maximum possible work output.

Use the following symbols:

Q1= Heat supplied by Sun; T2= Final temp; T1= Initial temp; Tatm =atmospheric

temperature; m= mass; c= specific heat capacity; ρ=density; V=volume.

15

10

What are the major thrust areas in the field of Environmental Conservation & Management for

developing hydropower?

15



Courses

339

CLE377 Transport Planning and Management L T P C



Co-requisites --

COURSE OBJECTIVES

(cccxxxiii) To teach the transportation planning process, trip generation and distribution methods.

(cccxxxiv) To teach various techniques involved in traffic assignments, and introduce evaluation techniques based on economy and performance.

COURSE OUTCOMES


(cccxxxv) Identify the different planning process involved in transportation and the importance of Zoning.

(cccxxxvi) Demonstrate the ability to understand the various distribution methods, trip generation and critically apply the analysis techniques practically.

(cccxxxvii) Understand the principles in traffic assignment and apply them suitably as a Successful transportation Engineer.

(cccxxxviii) Demonstrate the ability to evaluate a transport projects critically in all aspects and apply transport planning process ef-fectively for medium and small sized towns.


The better planning and management gives the better outcome. Here we have to know about the transportation planning process, trip generation and its distribution. Modal split and trip assignment is also important to study. Finally we discussed about the evaluation techniques.

TEXT BOOKS

(cccxxxix) Kadiyali.L.R. (2008), Traffic Engineering and Transportation Planning, Khanna Publishers, ISBN-9788174092205.

(cccxl) Ortuzar.J.D., and Willumsen. Luis G. (2011), Modelling Transport, Fourth Edition, John Wiley & Sons, ISBN-9781119993520.

REFERENCE BOOKS

(cccxli) Wright.P.H.,Ashford.N., and Stammer.R., (1998), Transportation Engineering – Planning & Design, Fourth Edition, John Wiley & Sons, New York, ISBN-9780471173960.

(cccxlii) Dickey.J.W., (1995), Metropolitan Transportation Planning, Tata McGraw-Hill publishing company Ltd, New Delhi.

(cccxliii) Papacostas.C.S., and Prevedouros.P.D., (2001) “Transportation Engineering and Planning”, Indian Edition, Prentice-Hall of India , ISBN-9788120321540.

(cccxliv) Garber. Nicholas J., and Hoel. Lester A., (2009), Traffic & Highway Engineering, Fourth Edition, Cengage Learning, ISBN-9780495082507.

COURSE CONTENT

Unit I: Transport Planning Process 10 lecture hours

Scope – interdependence of land use and traffic – systems approach to transport planning – survey of existing conditions and fore-casting future conditions. Transport survey – definition of study area – zoning survey – types and methods – inventory on transport facilities – inventory of land use and economic activities.

Unit II: Trip Generation 6 lecture hours

Factors governing trip generation and attraction rates – multiple linear regression analysis – category analysis – critical appraisal of techniques.

340


Unit III: Trip Distribution Methods 9 lecture hours

Uniform factor method, average factor methods – gravity model and its calibration – opportunity model.

Unit IV:Modal Split and Trip Assignment 10 lecture hours

Modal split – factors, advantages and limitations, logit model and its calibration.

Traffic assignment – general principles – assignment techniques – all nothing assignment – multiple root assignment – capac-ity – restraint assignment – diversion curves

Unit V: Evaluation Techniques 10 lecture hours

Economic evaluation techniques – performance evaluation – rating and ranking methods – case studies in evaluation – rating and ranking methods – case studies in evaluation of transport projects – land use transport models – transport planning for medium and small sized towns.


Components

Theory

Internal

SEE

Marks 50 50

Total Marks 100




1 Identify the different planning process involved in transportation and the importance of Zoning. 1

2 Demonstrate the ability to understand the various distribution methods, trip generation and criti- 4

cally apply the analysis techniques practically.

3 Understand the principles in traffic assignment and apply them suitably as a Successful

transporta- 1

tion Engineer.

4 Demonstrate the ability to evaluate a transport projects critically in all aspects and apply transport 11

planning process effectively for medium and small sized towns.




En

gin

eeri

ng

Kn

ow

led

ge

Pro

ble

m a

nal

ysi

s

Des

ign

/dev

elo

pm

ent

of

solu

tio

ns

Co

nd

uct

in

ves

tig

atio

nso

f co

mp

lex

pro

ble

ms

Mo

der

n t

oo

l u

sag

e

Th

e en

gin

eer

and s

oci

ety

En

vir

on

men

t an

d s

ust

ain

abil

ity

Eth

ics

Ind

ivid

ual

or

team

wo

rk

Co

mm

un

icat

ion

Pro

ject

man

agem

ent

and

fin

ance

Lif

e-lo

ng

Lea

rnin

g

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

CLE377

Transport Planning and

2

1

2

Management


Name:

Admission No:

Batch No:



Course Code: CLE377

Course Title: Transport Planning and Management


Time: 3 Hours Max.

Marks:100



SECTION A

1.

(a) For Multiple linear regression analysis the variable should be normally distributed(T/F). Justify your answer with suitable reasons.

(b)In Growth Factors methods, the error in original data collected gets magnified (T/F). Justify your answer.

(c)Gravity model is based on Newton’s concept of gravity (T/F). Justify your answer.

(d) Benefits cost ratio for economic evaluation should be greater than 1 (T/F). Justify your answer with suitable reasons.

(e) Average Factor method is used for Trip Distribution (T/F).

1x5 = 5

2. (a) Explain the cordon line survey method with practical example.

(b)Differentiate Growth factor methods and synthetic method. Which one would you like to prefer for trip distribution and why?

2.5x2=5

SECTION B

3.

(a)The total trips produced in and attracted to the three zones A,B and C of a survey area in the design year are tabulated as:

Zone Trips produced Trips attracted

A 2000 3000

B 3000 4000

C 4000 2000

2x10=20

It is known that the trips between two zones are inversely proportional to the second power of the travel time between zones, which is uniformly 20 minutes. If the trip interchange between zones Band C is known to be 600, calculate the trips interchange between A and B, A and C, B and A, C and B.

(b)Explain the Trip Distribution between the traffic zones. Enlist the methods of Trips Distributions.

SECTION C


4. Enlist the type of transportation surveys used for traffic planning. Explain any one in detail. 10

5. In order to relieve congestion on an urban street network a motorway is proposed to be constructed. The travel time between one zone centroid to another via the proposed motorway is estimated to be 10 minutes whereas the time for the same travel via the exiting street is 18 minutes. The flow between the two zones centroids is 1000 vehicles per hour. Assign the flow between the new motorway and exiting streets.

10

6. Explain the modal split in the transportation planning process between Trip Generation and Trip Distribution with the help of a Flow Diagram.

10

7. Discuss the need of the Economic Evaluation of the transportation plans. What are the criterions for selecting a particular plan from among the alternatives?

10

8.

A single lane road 50 km long is to be widened to two lanes at a cost of Rs 8.0 lakhs per km, including all improvements. The cost of operation of vehicles on the single lane road is Rs 1.20 per vehicle-km whereas it is Rs. 1.00 per vehicle-km on the improved facility. The average traffic may be assumed 2500 vehicles per day over a design period of 20 years. The interest rate is 10 percent per annum. The cost of maintenance is Rs. 5000 per km on the exiting road and Rs. 10000 per km on the improved road. Is the investment in the improvement scheme worthwhile?

10

SECTION D

9. Suppose you are appointed as highway planning engineer in National Highway Authority of India (NHAI) and you have to control the congestion in the BRT corridor in New Delhi. What are the traffic measurement would you take to study the behavior of traffic. What are the probable causes for the congestion in the BRT corridor and what are the remedies will you suggest to control/ minimize the congestion.

15

10

You have been appointed as a traffic engineer to study the problem of increasing number of accidents on the National Highway 2 between Delhi to Agra. What are the traffic and accidental data would you consider to identifying the basic causes of accidents and suggest means to overcome the deficiencies that lead to such accidents.

15


CLE378 Traffic Engineering L T P C


Pre-requisites Highway Engineering

Co-requisites --

COURSE OBJECTIVES

(cccxlv) To teach the concepts of traffic studies, traffic facilities and their regulations and management.

(cccxlvi) To understand the methods for efficient management of traffic in urban roads.

COURSE OUTCOMES


(cccxlvii) Perform traffic studies.

(cccxlviii) Know importance of traffic management.

(cccxlix) Identify the specification of traffic facilities.


Traffic engineering and its management are the most important now a days. Its necessity followed by the traffic studies and its regulation. The most important is its management. Students will also study about the pavement design principles and pavement design of flexible and rigid pavement.

TEXT BOOKS

(cccl) Kadiyali.L.R. (2008), Traffic Engineering and Transportation Planning, Khanna Publishers, ISBN-9788174092205.

(cccli) ChakroborthyPartha, and Das Animesh, (2003), Principles of Transportation Engineering, Eighth Printing, Prentice-Hall of India, ISBN-9788120320840.

REFERENCE BOOKS

(ccclii) Khisty.C.J., and Lall.B.K., (2003) “Transportation Engineering”, Indian Edition, Prentice-Hall of India , ISBN-9788120322127.

(cccliii) Papacostas.C.S., and Prevedouros.P.D., (2001) “Transportation Engineering and Planning”, Indian Edition, Prentice-Hall of India , ISBN- 9788120321540.

(cccliv) Garber. Nicholas J., and Hoel. Lester A., (2009), Traffic & Highway Engineering, Fourth Edition, Cengage Learning, ISBN-9780495082507.

COURSE CONTENT

Unit I:Traffic Studies 10 lecture hours

Road user and Vehicle Characteristics - Traffic Studies -Traffic volume and composition - speed, Headway - Concentration and Delay & Flow principles - Capacity and level of service.

Unit II: Traffic Facilities 6 lecture hours

Signals - Islands - Types and General layout of at-grade and grade separated intersections.

Unit III: Traffic Regulations and Management 9 lecture hours

Traffic signs and markings - Parking practices - Traffic management measures.

Factors affecting pavements stability – equivalent single wheel load – vehicle, soil, traffic & Climatic factors - stress distribution in different conditions - CBR method of design - AASSO method &Burmister design method.

Unit V: Rigid Pavement Design 10 lecture hours

Stresses in concrete pavement – IRC method – design of steel reinforcements – Function of joints, design of joints in concrete pavements - Joint Fillers and sealant.


Components

Theory

Internal

SEE

Marks 50 50

Total Marks 100





1 Perform traffic studies. 1

2 Know importance of traffic management. 11

3 Identify the specification of traffic

facilities. 6

En

gin

eeri

ng

Kn

ow

led

ge

Pro

ble

m a

nal

ysi

s

Des

ign

/dev

elo

pm

ent

of

solu

tio

ns

Co

nd

uct

in

ves

tig

atio

nso

f co

mp

lex

pro

ble

ms

M

od

ern

to

ol

usa

ge

The

engin

eer

and s

oci

ety

En

vir

on

men

t an

d s

ust

ain

abil

ity

Eth

ics

Ind

ivid

ual

or

team

wo

rk

Co

mm

un

icat

ion

Pro

ject

man

agem

ent

and f

inan

ce

Lif

e-lo

ng

Lea

rnin

g

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

CLE378 Traffic Engineering 1 1 2






Course Code: CLE378 Course Title: Traffic Engineering





SECTION A

1.

Fill in the blanks/ write true or false

(a) CBR value is used for the designing of Rigid pavements (T/F). Justify your answer.

(b) Grain to grain load transfer is the characteristic of Flexible pavement (T/F). Justify your

answer with logical reason.

(c) ……………are used for load transfer at the joints in Rigid pavements.

(d) Space mean speed is used for the computation of density in traffic stream.

(e) Commercial vehicles are the vehicles whose gross is…………………..

1x5 = 5

2. Explain the following terms

(a) ESWL

(b) Level of Service

2.5x2=5

SECTION B

3.

(a) Explain the vehicle damage factor. How it is calculated for a given traffic condition?

(b) Design size and spacing of dowel bars at an expansion joint of concrete pavement of

thickness 25 cm. Given the radius of relative stiffness of 80 cm. design wheel load 5000 kg.

Load capacity of the dowel system is 40 percent of design wheel load. Joint width is 2.0 cm and

the permissible stress in shear, bending and bearing stress in dowel bars are 1000, 1400 and 100

kg/cm2 respectively.

2x10=20

SECTION C


4. Differentiate between Flexible pavement and Rigid pavements. 10

5. Enlist the types of grade separated intersections and explain each with the help of neat sketches. 10

6. Design the pavement for construction of a new bypass for Two lane carriage way with Initial

traffic in the year of completion of construction is 400 CVPD (sum of both directions). Traffic

growth rate = 7.5 %, Design life = 15 years, Vehicle damage factor based on axle load survey =

2.5 standard axle per commercial vehicle and Design CBR of subgrade soil = 4%.

10

7. Explain the Fundamental diagrams of traffic flow in detail with neat sketches. 10

8.

The average length of vehicle is 4.50 m and the length of loop detector zone is 1.90 m. The time

occupancy in the loop is 30 percentages, find the spot speed of the vehicle.

10

SECTION D

9. For the study of traffic flow condition on a road in Greater Noida and to check the adequacy of

the transportation system, the following spot speed data was collected with the help of radar

speedometer. Compute the time mean speed and space mean speed. Also verify the relationship

between them. Finally compute the density of the stream.

Speed Range Frequency

0-10 5

10-20 15

20-30 20

30-40 25

40-50 30

15

10

You have been appointed as a traffic engineer for monitoring the causes of accidents at Yamuna

Expressway.In your study what are the factors would you consider for the causes of accidents

and also suggest corrective measures at potential location.

15


CLE379 Open Channel Hydraulics L T P C



Co-requisites --

COURSE OBJECTIVES

(ccclv) To provide knowledge about various types of flows and properties in open channels.

(ccclvi) To provide knowledge in detail about gradually varied flow, rapidly varied flow and spatially varied flow.

COURSE OUTCOMES

Student will be able to

(ccclvii) Know the various types of flows in open channels.

(ccclviii) Determine velocity distribution across and along the channel, and hydraulic jumps.

(ccclix) Design the channel sections, drains, and jumps for various hydraulic and hydrologic projects.

CATALOG DESCRIPTION

In this course, student will learn about open channel hydraulics: Pipe Flow and Free Surface Flow, Continuity Equation, Energy in Free Surface Flow, Basic Momentum Equation, Velocity Distribution, Occurrence, Critical Depth in Trapezoidal & Circular Channels, Hydraulic Exponent for Critical Flow, Critical Flow Depth Computations, Derivation of Uniform Flow Equations, Resistance in Open Channel Hydraulics, History of Uniform Flow Velocity and Resistance Factor, Integration of Differential Equation, Improved Euler Method, Fourth-order Runga-Kutta Method, Classification of Jumps, Momentum Equation, General Hydraulic Jump Equation, Energy loss in the Jump, Turbulent Characteristics of the Jump.

TEXT BOOKS

1. Subramanya, K., (2008) Flow in Open Channels, 3rd ed., Tata McGraw-Hill. ISBN - 9780070699663

REFERENCE BOOKS

(ccclx) V.T.Chow (2009), Open Channel Hydraulics, Blackburn Press. 9781932846188.

(ccclxi) Asawa, G.L., (2010), Fluid Flow in Pipes and Channels, CBS Publishers. ISBN - 9788123917238

(ccclxii) Chanson, H., (2004), The Hydraulics of Open Channel Flow: An Introduction, Elsevier Scientific. ISBN- 9780750659789

(ccclxiii) M. HanifChaudhry (2007), Open Channel Flow, Springer, ISBN- 978-0387301747

(ccclxiv) Henderson, F.M., (1966) Open Channel Flow, PHI, ISBN - 9780023535109.

(ccclxv) French, R.H., (2005). Open channel Hydraulics, McGraw Hill International ISBN - 9780070221345.


COURSE CONTENT

Unit I:Introduction 8 lecture hours

345

Introduction, Pipe Flow and Free Surface Flow, Continuity Equation, Energy in Free Surface Flow, Basic Momentum Equation, Velocity Distribution, Velocity Measurement and Distribution, Velocity-area Method, Radio-active tracer technique for Measure-ment of River Discharges, Errors in Depth Measurement in High Velocity Flows, Secondary Current and Spiral Flow, Energy and Momentum Coefficients-Derivation and Coefficients for Different Velocity Distributions, Comparison between Momentum and Energy Equation, Pressure Distribution, Specific Energy Equations for Rectangular Channels, Application of Specific Energy, Specific Force.

Unit II: Critical Flow 10 lecture hours

Characteristics of Critical Flow, Occurrence, Critical Depth in Trapezoidal & Circular Channels, Hydraulic Exponent for Critical Flow, Critical Flow Depth Computations, Flow Measurement, Measuring Flumes, Critical Depth Flumes, Weirs-Introduction, Types of Control Structures, Proportional weirs, Flow Over weirs, Polygonal weirs, Special types of weirs, Broad Crested weirs, Different types of Broad Crested weirs, Bear Trap weir, Flow below a Sluice Gate, Brink Depth, Modern Measurements of Flow Measurements, Outlets & Modules, Errors in Measurements, International Standards for Flow Measurement in Open Channel.

Unit III: Uniform Flow 9 lecture hours

Concept of Uniform Flow, Derivation of Uniform Flow Equations, Resistance in Open Channel Hydraulics, History of Uniform Flow Velocity and Resistance Factor, Friction, Ganguillet and Kutter Formula, Conveyance, Section Factor for Uniform Flow Computation, Hydraulic Exponent for Uniform Flow Computation, Maximum Discharge, Classification of bed Slope, Solution of Manning Equation by Newton Raphson Method, Slope-area Method, Normal & Critical Slopes, Design of Canals, Typical Ca-nal Cross Sections, Lining the Canal, Seepage Prevention with Impermeable membranes, Failure of Canal Lining, Most Efficient Hydraulic Section, Design of Unlined Channels.

Unit IV:Gradually Varied Flow 9 lecture hours

Introduction, Dynamic Equation for Steady Gradually Varied Flow, Classification of Gradually Varied Flow Profiles, Real Life Cases of Water Surface Profiles, Sketching of Composite Water Surface Profiles, Computation of Gradually Varied Flow, Integra-tion of Differential Equation, Improved Euler Method, Fourth-order Runga-Kutta Method.

Unit V: Hydrualic jump 9 lecture hours

Normal Hydraulic Jumps, Classification of Jumps, Momentum Equation, General Hydraulic Jump Equation, Energy loss in the Jump, Turbulent Characteristics of the Jump, Pressure Distribution in the Jump, Velocity Distribution in Hydraulic Jump, Length of the Jump, Air Entrainment Characteristics of the Jump, Pre Entrained Hydraulic Jump, Air Concentration Distribution along the Jump, Decay of Turbulence Downstream from a Stilling Basin, Hydraulic Jumps in Sloping Channels, Stilling Basin, Baffle Stilling Basin, Bhavani Type Stilling Basin, Stilling Basin in Sudden Expansion, Slotted Bucket Stilling Basin.


Components

Theory

Internal

SEE

Marks 50 50

Total Marks 100




1 Know the various types of flows in open channels. 1

2 Determine velocity distribution across and along the channel, and hydraulic jumps. 1,2

3 Design the channel sections, drains, and jumps for various hydraulic and hydrologic projects 2,3

En

gin

eeri

ng

Kn

ow

led

ge

Pro

ble

m a

nal

ysi

s

Des

ign

/dev

elo

pm

ent

of

solu

tio

ns

Co

nd

uct

in

ves

tig

atio

nso

f co

mp

lex

pro

ble

ms

Mo

der

n t

oo

l u

sag

e

Th

e en

gin

eer

and s

oci

ety

En

vir

on

men

t an

d s

ust

ain

abil

ity

Eth

ics

Ind

ivid

ual

or

team

wo

rk

Co

mm

un

icat

ion

Pro

ject

man

agem

ent

and

fin

ance

Lif

e-lo

ng

Lea

rnin

g

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

CLE379 Open Channel Hydraulics 1 2 1






Name:

Admission No:

Batch No:

Semester End Examination – Dec-Jan 2013/14

Course: CLE 379-Open Channel Hydraulics


347

Programme: B. Tech. Semester: Fall -


SECTION A

1.

(a) Broad crested weir is widely used as a flow measuring device in open channels. Give logical

reason.

(b) In an open channel, as the flow enters a venture flume, the water surface elevation decreases

towards throat, though the throat has minimum cross sectional area. Explain logically.

(c) The design of unlined canals is performed on non-silting and non-scouring approach. Give

logical reason.

(d) A control section in open channel is used as flow measuring section. Give reason

(e) Hydraulic jump is used as a mixing device in chemical industries. Give reason.

1x5 = 5

2. (a) Draw specific energy curve for an open channel flow.

(b) Enlist various types of hydraulic jumps with their characteristics.

2.5x2=5

SECTION B

3.

(a) Enumerate various types of flows in open channels. Support your answer with the help of

mathematical relations and neat sketches.

(b)Water discharging from an ogee spillway flows towards a jump type basin. The discharge

density is 30 m3/s/m and the water depth is 1.5 m. Design the basin to accommodate the jump.

2x10=2

0

SECTION C


4. Discuss, in detail, graphical integration method applied to study water surface profile in an open

channel flow.

10

5. A rectangular channel with a slope of 1 in 200 and a depth of 2.0 m carries o flow of 64

cumec/m. Estimate sequent depth length of jump and energy loss in the hydraulic jump.

10

6. Discuss various types of water surface profiles in open channels. 10

7. State the assumptions made in the derivation of dynamic equation for steady gradually varied

flow in an open channel. Derive the equation in general and give its various forms.

10

8.

Discuss the application of specific energy and specific force curves in the design of hydraulic

channels.

10

SECTION D

9. As an engineer you need to compute the discharge in upper ganga canal passing through Jawan

(Aligarh). Discuss in detail the factors you should take while fixing the site for measuring

station. Also discuss the method that may be used.

15

10

Suppose you are hired by a hydropower company. As a civil engineer you are required to design

a conduit to take water from reservoir to the turbine. Enlist the various alternatives. Discuss each

with its merits and demerits. Discuss other related hydraulic structures required in each

alternative.

15



Courses

349

CLE381 Architecture and Town Planning L T P C


Pre-requisites --

Co-requisites --

COURSE OBJECTIVES

(ccclxvi) To give an idea of Architectural aspects and to understand the history of Roman, Greek and South Indian Architecture.

(ccclxvii) To know the different type of architectures and their importance.

(ccclxviii) To understand basic principles of town planning.

COURSE OUTCOMES


(ccclxix) Demonstrate the significance of architecture in terms of appearance and utility.

(ccclxx) Demonstrate planning problems in a holistic manner.

(ccclxxi) Understand the significance of planned, economic, scientific and artistic development of towns, cities and rural areas

CATALOG DESCRIPTION

This course will introduce the students to the function of architecture, principles and planning aspects of architecture. The students will learn about evolution of various architectures i.e Greek, Roman, European, South Indian and Moghul. On completion of this course the students will be able to understand the importance of climate, topography, drainage and water supply etc in site plan-ning and development. Students will also learn town planning rules and by-laws and will be introduced to examples of planned cities and housing in India.

TEXT BOOKS

(ccclxxii) G.K.Hiraskar, (2012), Fundamentals of Town Planning, 1st Edition, Cyber Tech Publications, ISBN- 978-81-788-4536-4.

(ccclxxiii) Andrew Ballantyne, Architecture a Very Short Introduction, Oxford University Press.

REFERENCE BOOKS

(ccclxxiv) Amir Ansari, (2009), A Complete Book on Mughal Architecture, 17th Edition, DhanpatRai Publications, ISBN- 978-81-899-2889-6.

COURSE CONTENT

Unit I: Introduction to Architecture 9 lecture hours

The nature and function of architecture – Principles of planning – Qualities, Strength, Refinement, Repose, Scale, Proportion, Colour, Solids and Voids and Symmetry.

Unit II: Historical Architecture 9 lecture hours

The Physical and non-physical factors – Moulding – Greek, Roman, and European history – South Indian, Moghul periods in Indian History.

Unit III: Interior Decorations 9 lecture hours

Interior Planning and treatment – Use of natural and synthetic building materials – Thermal and Acoustical materials – Furniture and Fittings.

350


Unit IV: Planning and Concepts of Town Planning 9 lecture hours

Planning Surveys – Importance of Climate topography, drainage and water supply in the selection of site for the development – Residential – Commercial – Industrial – Public – Transportation, Utility and services –Agriculture.

Unit V: Country Planning and Housing 9 lecture hours

Town Planning rules and building bylaws – High towns – Replanning – Satellite towns – Examples of planned cities and housing in India.


Components

Theory

Internal

SEE

Marks 50 50

Total Marks 100




Outcomes

1 Demonstrate the significance of architecture in terms of appearance and

utility. 6

2 Demonstrate planning problems in a holistic

manner. 7

3 Understand the significance of planned, economic, scientific and artistic development of towns,

cities 8

and rural areas

En

gin

eeri

ng K

no

wle

dg

e

Pro

ble

m a

nal

ysi

s

Des

ign

/dev

elo

pm

ent

of

solu

tio

ns

Co

ndu

ct i

nv

esti

gat

ion

s o

f co

mp

lex

pro

ble

ms

Mo

der

n t

oo

l u

sag

e

Th

e en

gin

eer

and s

oci

ety

En

vir

on

men

t an

d s

ust

ain

abil

ity

Eth

ics

Ind

ivid

ual

or

team

wo

rk

Co

mm

un

icat

ion

Pro

ject

man

agem

ent

and

fin

ance

Lif

e-lo

ng

Lea

rnin

g

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

CLE381 Architecture and Town Planning 1 2 1






Course Code: CLE381 Course Title:Architecture and Town Planning





SECTION A

1.

Define the terms :

a. Wall washer

b. Contrast in design

c. UDPFI

d. Hue

e. Reverberation

1x5 = 5

2. Differentiate between the followings:

a. Chaityagrih & Vihara

b. Regional & Town survey

2.5x2=5

SECTION B

3.

a) What is F.A.R? A plot has a dimension of 10 mts X 20 mts, the permissible F.A.R by

the governing authority is 2.5 and permissible ground coverage is 60 %. Then calculate

the number of storey upto which the building can be constructed at that plot.

b) List down some bye laws/regulation kept in consideration for the designing of a

residential building in an urban area.

2x10=20

SECTION C (Answer any four questions)

4. Write about the characteristic features of Greek Architecture with relevant sketches. 10

5. Enlists the principles and elements of design applied in Architecture. Elaborate the

same in short with relevant examples.

10

6. Discuss about Room Acoustical Treatment with the help of relevant sketches. 10

7. Enlist ten factors to be analyzed before the selection of site for the development. 10

8.

What is Town Planning? Tabulate the Urban Land Use Classification (and its sub

classification) along with the Colour Code as mentioned in UDPFI guidelines.

10

SECTION D

9. Based on the UDPFI guideline norms and standards, estimate the physical infrastructure

like water supply requirements; sewerage load; electricity consumption; solid waste

generated per day for a small town having a population of 1.5 lakh and household size

of 4. Assume the missing data.

15

10.

Explain in brief with examples (any two):

a) Roman building technology

b) Architecture features of typical south Indian temple

c) Satellite town concept

15


Courses

351

CLE382 Advanced Surveying L T P C



Co-requisites --

COURSE OBJECTIVES

(ccclxxv) To give idea map projection and Photogrammetry in surveying.

(ccclxxvi) To give an idea GPS and Astronomical Surveying.

(ccclxxvii) To introduce advanced surveying techniques.

COURSE OUTCOMES


(ccclxxviii) Understanding principles of GPS and its applications in surveying.

(ccclxxix) Understand of Astronomical Surveying.

(ccclxxx) Understand of Map projection and Photogrammetry.

(ccclxxxi) Understand advance surveying techniques.

CATALOG DESCRIPTION

This course covers fundamentals of GPS, Principles, Errors, Differential GPS, Instruments and Setting out of tunnel, bridge. Fun-damental properties of Map projection, Principles of selecting map projection, Surveying and map projection.Basics and Principles of photography and Astronomical Surveying.

TEXT BOOKS

1. Bannister, A., Raymond, S., Baker, R., (2006), Surveying, 7th Revised Edition, Pearson Education. ISBN: 9780582302495.

REFERENCE BOOKS

(ccclxxxii) Chandra, A.M. (2007), Higher Surveying, New Age International Publishers. ISBN: 9788122416282.

(ccclxxxiii) Punmia B.C. (2005), Surveying Volume 3 (Higher Surveying), 15th Edition Laxmi Publications. ISBN: 9788170088257.

(ccclxxxiv) Wolf, P.R., (1998), Elements of Photogrammetry, Mc.Graw – Hill International Book Company. ISBN: 9780070713376.

COURSE CONTENT

Unit I:GPS – Principles 9 lecture hours

EDM – Principle, sources and error, GPS – Principles, Errors, Differential GPS, Instruments and Setting out of tunnel, bridge.

Unit II: Map Projection 9 lecture hours

Fundamental properties of Map projection – Classification of Map projection- Principles of selecting map projection, Surveying and map projection.

Unit III: Basics of Photogrammetry 9 lecture hours

Principles of photography – instruments – photographic measurements – vertical photographs – stereoscopic viewing and parallax.

Unit IV :Types of Photogrammetry and Interpretation 9 lecture hours

Photomaps & Mosaics – Tilted photographs – Oblique and panoramic photographs – Terrestrial photogrammetry – around con-trols – photographic interpretations.

352


Unit V: Astronomical Surveying 9 lecture hours

Field Astronomy, measurement of time, determination of Azimuth, Latitude and longitude.


Components

Theory

Internal

SEE

Marks 50 50

Total Marks 100





1 Understanding principles of GPS and its applications in

surveying. 5

2 Understand of Astronomical

Surveying. 2, 5

3 Understand of Map projection and Photogrammetry. 5

4 Understand advance surveying techniques. 5

En

gin

eeri

ng

Kn

ow

led

ge

Pro

ble

m a

nal

ysi

s

Des

ign

/dev

elo

pm

ent

of

solu

tio

ns

Con

du

ct i

nv

esti

gat

ions

co

mple

x p

roble

mso

f

Mo

der

n t

oo

l u

sag

e

Th

e en

gin

eer

and s

oci

ety

En

vir

on

men

t an

d s

ust

ain

abil

ity

Eth

ics

Ind

ivid

ual

or

team

wo

rk

Co

mm

un

icat

ion

P

roje

ct m

anag

emen

t an

d f

inan

ce

Lif

e-lo

ng

Lea

rnin

g

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

CLE382 Advanced Surveying 1 2




Model Question Paper-End Term Examination


Course Code: CLE382 Course Title: Advanced Surveying




SECTION A

1.

(a) Define Azimuth of a heavenly body.

(b) Differentiate between Tilted and Oblique Photograph.

(c) Define scale factor for a map.

(d) Differentiate between Terrestrial Photogrammetry and Aerial Photogrammetry.

(e) Name the three segments of GPS.

1x5 = 5

2. (a) Vertical Photograph at a scale of 1:20000 is to be taken of an area whose mean ground

level is 500mm above the mean sea level. If the camera has a focal length of 210mm, find

the flying height above mean sea level.

(b) Show the following on a celestial sphere: Observer’s Meridian; Zenith and Nadir;

Celestial Equator; Observer’s Horizon.

2.5x2=5

SECTION B

3.

(a) Discuss how the following projections are different from each other:

i) Gnomonic Projection

ii) Stereographic Projection

iii) Orthographic Projection

2x10=20

(b) If the time at a place in India as per a clock is (i) 9 a.m. and (ii) 10 p.m. and the latitude

& longitude of the place is 32030’ N and 72030’ E, respectively, find the local mean time and

Greenwich Mean Time. The standard meridian for India id 82030’ E.

SECTION C


4. Explain the Salient features of the following projections:

(a) Lambert Projection

(b) Mercator Projection

10

5. Find the azimuth, altitude, and the hour angle of the star if its declination at eastern elongation

was 80051’18’’ N. the latitude of the place of observation is 32038’36’’ N.

10

6. In a pair of overlapping vertical photographs, the mean distance between two principal points

lying on the datum is 6.385cm. The flying height of the aircraft at the time of photography was

580m above the datum. Determine the difference of parallax for top and bottom of a tower of

height 115m having base in datum surface. The focal length of the camera is 150mm.

10

7. (a) Describe sources of error in GPS.

(b) What is meant by Selective availability?

10

8.

(a) What are Mosaics? Explain different Classification of Mosaics?

(b) What are the advantages and limitations of Mosaics?

SECTION D

10

9. Explain in detail (with sketch) the method of transferring the surface alignment and surface

levels underground in tunnel operations.

15

10 Explain the interpretation of Aerial Photographs according to various factors. 15


Courses

353

CLE383 Economics and Project Finance for Civil Engineers L T P C


Pre-requisites --

Co-requisites --

COURSE OBJECTIVES

(ccclxxxv) To understand the importance of Economics in engineering.

(ccclxxxvi) To know the basic concepts of engineering economics and finance.

(ccclxxxvii) To provide understanding of methods used for evaluating engineering alternatives.

COURSE OUTCOMES


(ccclxxxviii) Evaluate the engineering alternates economically.

(ccclxxxix) Evaluate the options incorporating the uncertainty involved in the construction business.

(cccxc) Understand the process of maintaining balance sheets, profit and loss statements

(cccxci) Know the various sources of finance for projects.


Economics is one of the most important aspects of the construction industry. Through this course student will learn to evaluate the various alternatives/project proposal economically under uncertainty. They will also understand the process of construction accounting and also know the various sources of project finance and working capital finance.

TEXT BOOKS

1. Jha Kumar Neeraj (2013), “Construction Project Management”, Pearson Education India. ISBN9788131732496

REFERENCE BOOKS

(cccxcii) D. C. Bose (2010), “Fundamentals of Financial management”, Prentice Hall of India Pvt. Limited. ISBN 9788120340749

(cccxciii) R. L. Peurifoy and C. J. Schexnayder (2008), “Construction Planning, Equipment, and Methods”, Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing Company Limited. ISBN 9780073401126.

COURSE CONTENT

Unit I:Engineering economics - Basic principles 8 lecture hours

Time value of money, Cash flow diagrams, Quantifying alternatives for decision making, Equivalence - single payment in the future (P/F, F/P). Future payment compared to uniform series payments (F/A, A/F). One present payment compared to uniform series payments (P/A, A/P), Arithmetic gradient, and Geometric gradient.

Unit II: Comparison of Alternatives 9 lecture hours

Present worth method- equal lives, unequal lives, infinite lives, future worth method and annual worth method of comparing alternatives, Rate of return, Incremental rate of return, Sensitivity Analysis, Breakeven analysis

Unit III: Taxes, depreciation and inflation 6 lecture hours

Depreciation, Taxes, Inflation, Escalation, Equipment economics- Equipment costs, Owning and operating costs, Buy/Rent/Lease options, Replacement analysis.


Unit IV:Construction Accounts Management 6 lecture hours

Construction accounting, Chart of Accounts, Financial statements - Profit and loss account, Balance sheets

Unit V: Project Finance 6 lecture hours

SEBI Guidelines on Project Financing in India; Sources -Equity, Debentures and Term Loans from Financial Institutions; Working Capital Financing, Ratio Analysis


Components

Theory

Internal

SEE

Marks 50 50

Total Marks 100




1 Evaluate the engineering alternates economically. 2,11

2 Evaluate the options available incorporating the uncertainty involved in the construction

business. 2,11

3 Understand the process of maintaining balance sheets, profit and loss statements and know the 11

basics of working capital management.

4 Know the various sources of finance for projects. 11

En

gin

eeri

ng K

no

wle

dg

e

Pro

ble

m a

nal

ysi

s

Des

ign

/dev

elo

pm

ent

of

solu

tio

ns

Co

nd

uct

in

ves

tig

atio

nso

f co

mp

lex

pro

ble

ms

Mo

der

n t

oo

l u

sag

e

Th

e en

gin

eer

and s

oci

ety

En

vir

on

men

t an

d s

ust

ain

abil

ity

Eth

ics

Ind

ivid

ual

or

team

wo

rk

Co

mm

un

icat

ion

Pro

ject

man

agem

ent

and

fin

ance

Lif

e-lo

ng

Lea

rnin

g

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

CLE383

Economics and Project Finance

2

3

for Civil Engineers




Theory



Name:

Enrolment No:

35


Course: CLE383 - Economics and Project Finance for Civil Engineers


Programme: B. Tech. Semester: Winter

Time: 3 Hrs. Max. Marks: 100

SECTION A

1. (b) How does fall in total product affect marginal product?

(c) Elasticity of Supply of commodity is equal to Unity? Justify the condition.

(d) The cause of a downward movement along the curve is............?

(e) If Marginal Revenue is falling but is positive; then what changes will take place in Total

Revenue.

(f) Total Fixed Cost Curve is parallel to OX- axis? Why?

1x5=5

2. (g) Enlist the conditions of repeatability assumption employed to alternatives having identical

revenues and different lives.

(h) Define Marginal Revenue. Explain the relationship between Average and Marginal

Revenue when price is constant at all levels of output.

2.5x2=5

SECTION B

3. c. Describe the advantage of internal rate of return method? Why it is not suitable for

evaluation of alternatives?

d. List the various methods for evaluating the alternatives by equivalence. Explain any one

method with the help of suitable example.

2x10=20

SECTION C


4. Type ‘A’ design of dam costs Rs 50 crore to construct and Rs 7.5 crore every year to operate and

maintain it. Type B design of the dam, on the other hand, would require Rs. 75 crore to construct

and Rs 5 crore every year to operate and maintain it. If both the designs have significantly large

service life. Select the design which should be given go ahead if the minimum required rate of

return is 5%.

10

5. Let the total depreciation involved in an asset be Rs 50,000 over two year period. Assuming a

gross income of Rs 100,000 in each year, and taxes payable at a rate of 20% of the net income,

compare the tax liabilities in the following cases:

Case I : Deprecation amounts in the first and second years are equal.

Case II : Deprecation amounts in the first and second years are 75% and 25%.

10

6. List the various sources of short term and long term sources of finance. Discuss any two of

them.

10

7. Mention the various ratios that are used to study financial performance and integrity. Discuss

any four.

10

8. For an asset having an initial cost of Rs 2 Lakhs and salvage value of Rs 50,000 at the end of an

economic life for five years. Determine the annual depreciation and the book value at the end of

each year during the economic life of the asset by declining balance (take M=2) and straight line

method for calculating depreciation.

10

SECTION D

9. The purchase of a Pump set is Rs. 5 lakhs. The operating cost based on the annual average

estimated hours of operation are Rs 20,000 in the first year and Rs 30,000 in the second year,

rising by Rs 6,000 each year thereafter. If the resale value of the equipment at the end of service

life (which is seven year) is Rs 50,000. Propose the optimum replacement age. The cost of

capital is 10%. Use sum of year digits method for calculating the depreciation per year.

[15]

10. A contractor has a contract to construct a 3600m long tunnel in 30 months. He is trying to decide

whether to do the job with his own forces or subcontract the job. Propose the best alternative in

terms of equivalent annual cost. His i = 1.75% per month. Production under both alternatives

will be 120 m per months.

Alternative ‘A’: Buy a tunneling machine and work with own force

i. Cost of Tunneling machine = Rs 2 crore

ii. Salvage value of machine at the end of month 30 = Rs. 40,000 Lakhs

iii. Cost of labour and material = Rs 10,000 per month for the first 10 months,

and increasing by 0.5% per month at end of each months thereafter (i.e, Rs

10,050 /m at the end of month 11, Rs 10,100.25 /m at end of month 12,

etc)

Alternative ‘B’: subcontract the work

Cost is Rs. 27000/meter of tunnel.

[15]



Courses

357

CLE384 Highway Pavement Design L T P C



Co-requisites --

COURSE OBJECTIVES

(cccxciv) To introduce various analysis and design procedures of different types of pavements.

(cccxcv) To familiarise with maintenance, evaluation, strengthening and rehabilitation of the pavements.

COURSE OUTCOMES


(cccxcvi) Learn the basic principles of flexible and rigid pavements.

(cccxcvii) Demonstrate the ability to analyse and design the flexible and rigid pavements by applying various methods and thorough in construction procedures and the functions of pavements.

(cccxcviii) Ability to critically evaluate flexible and rigid pavements by deflection measurement.

(cccxcix) Demonstrate the ability to apply strengthening techniques and rehabilitation of pavements.


Highway pavement design is the most important part of the traffic engineering. In this part principles and design of flexible and rigid pavement pavement will have discussed. Also the idea about pavement evaluation and its maintenance is required for better design.

TEXT BOOKS

(cd) ChakroborthyPartha, and Das Animesh, (2003) “Principles of Transportation Engineering”, Eighth Printing, Prentice-Hall of India, ISBN-9788120320840.

REFERENCE BOOKS

(cdi) Yoder.E.J., and Witczak. M. W., Principles of Pavement Design, Second Edition, John Wiley & Sons, ISBN-9780471977803.

(cdii) Garber. Nicholas J., and Hoel. Lester A., (2009), Traffic & Highway Engineering, Fourth Edition, Cengage Learning, ISBN-9780495082507.

(cdiii) S.K. Sharma (1998), Principles, Practice and Design of Highway Engineering, S. Chand & Co Ltd, New Delhi.

(cdiv) Bruce.A.G. and Clarkeson.J., (1952), Highway Design and Construction, Third Edition, International Textbook Co.

COURSE CONTENT

Unit I:General Principles of Pavement Design 10 lecture hours

Components of a road and functions – factors affecting pavements stability – equivalent single wheel load – vehicle and traffic factors – moisture factors – climate factors – soil factors – stress distribution in different conditions – modulus of elasticity of various layers.

Unit II: Flexible Pavement Design 6 lecture hours

Empirical method using soil classification tests – estimation of CBR value method of designing pavement – plate bearing test method Ashpalt Institute method – AASSO method – Burmister design method.

358


Unit III: Rigid Pavement Design 9 lecture hours

Stresses in concrete pavement – IRC method – design of steel reinforcements – design of different joints in concrete pavements and their functions – construction of concrete pavements and their functions.

Unit IV:Pavement Evaluation 10 lecture hours

Distresses in flexible pavements – distress in rigid pavements – service ability index – structural evaluation of flexible and rigid pave-ments – evaluation by deflection measurement – strengthening of pavements – flexible overlays – rigid overlays.

Unit V: Highway Maintenance 10 lecture hours

Maintenance of Bituminous surface concrete roads and low cost roads – maintenance shoulders and drainage system – maintenance of bridges and road structures.


Components

Theory

Internal

SEE

Marks 50 50

Total Marks 100




1 Learn the basic principles of flexible and rigid

pavements. 1

2 Demonstrate the ability to analyse and design the flexible and rigid pavements by applying various 3

methods and thorough in construction procedures and the functions of pavements.

3 Ability to critically evaluate flexible and rigid pavements by deflection measurement. 2

4 Demonstrate the ability to apply strengthening techniques and rehabilitation of pavements. 2, 4, 7

En

gin

eeri

ng

Kn

ow

led

ge

Pro

ble

m a

nal

ysi

s

Des

ign

/dev

elo

pm

ent

of

solu

tio

ns

Co

nd

uct

in

ves

tig

atio

nso

f co

mp

lex

pro

ble

ms

Mo

der

n t

oo

l u

sag

e

Th

e en

gin

eer

and s

oci

ety

En

vir

on

men

t an

d s

ust

ain

abil

ity

Eth

ics

Ind

ivid

ual

or

team

wo

rk

Co

mm

un

icat

ion

Pro

ject

man

agem

ent

and

fin

ance

Lif

e-lo

ng

Lea

rnin

g

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

CLE384 Highway Pavement Design 1 1 2 1 1






Course Code: CLE384 Course Title: Highway

Pavement Design





SECTION A

1.

Fill in the blanks/ mark True or False

(a)CBR method can be used in field as well and laboratory both to check the strength of

subgrade (T/F).Justify your answer.

(b)…………………are used as load transfer devices at the joints in rigid pavements.

(c)…………………….is provided in flexible pavement as a drainage layer.

(d)In Rigid pavements the load is transferred due to slab action and for flexible pavements it is

grain to grain load transfer (T/F). Justify your answer with suitable reasons.

(e) …………….stress are developed to temperature variation between day and night

1x5 = 5

2. (a) Draw the typical cross section of different layers of Rigid pavement and Flexible pavement.

(b)Differentiate between Rigid and Flexible pavements.

2.5x2=5

SECTION B

3.

(a)Design the cement concrete pavement for the following conditions,

Design wheel load = 4100kg

Present traffic = 300 cvpd

Design life = 20 years

Traffic growth rate = 7.5%

Temperature variation = 13.10°C

Modulus of subgrade reaction, K = 6 kg/cm2

Concrete flexural strength = 40 kg/cm2

Modulus of elasticity, E = 3 X 105 kg/cm2

Poisson’s ratio =0.15

Coefficient of thermal expansion = 10 X 10-6 /°C

Spacing of contraction joints = 4.5m

Lane width = 3.5m

(b)Explain about the California bearing ratio and plate load test for highway construction.

2x10=20

SECTION C


4. Enlist the different types of distresses in flexible pavements and in rigid pavements. Explain

each with the help of sketches.

10

5. Determine the warping stress at interior, edge and corner regions in a 25 cm thick concrete

pavements with transverse joints at 11 m interval and longitudinal joints at 3.6 m intervals. The

modulus of subgrade reaction (K) is 6.9 kg/cm3. Assume temperature differential for day

conditions to be 0.6 degree Celsius per cm slab thickness. Assume radius of loaded area as 15

cm for computing warping stress at the corner. Additional data are given below:

e = 10x10-6 per 0C

E = 3X105 kg/cm2

µ = 0.15

10

6. Enlist various types of pavements. Enumerate function and importance of each component in

detail.

10

7. Explain the various method for structural and functional evaluation of flexible and rigid

pavements.

10

8.

Design the pavement for construction of a new bypass with the following data:

1. Two lane carriage way

2. Initial traffic in the year of completion of construction = 400 CVPD (sum of both directions)

3. Traffic growth rate = 7.5 %

4. Design life = 15 years

5. Vehicle damage factor based on axle load survey = 2.5 standard axle per commercial vehicle

6. Design CBR of subgrade soil = 4%

10

SECTION D

9. Suppose you are appointed as highway engineer in Central Public Work Department (CPWD)

and you have to construct a road between Delhi to Haridwar via Saharanpur for moderate traffic

for a speed limit of 60 kmph and road life of at least 10 Years. What are factors would you

consider to choose the type of pavement (Rigid/Flexible). Explain the pros and cons of choosing

a Rigid and Flexible pavement.

15

10

You have to construct a road in hilly areas of Uttarakhand between Rishikesh to Srinagar.

Explain the factors would you consider for alignment for newly established road. How will you

provide the drainage to the pavement? Explain the challenges an engineer have to face in

construction of a road in hilly regions.

15


Courses

359

CLE385 Earthquake Engineering L T P C


Pre-requisites --

Co-requisites --

COURSE OBJECTIVES

(cdv) To enable the students to understand the elements of earthquake engineering.

(cdvi) To teach the students about SDOF and MDOF systems.

(cdvii) To teach the students about the earthquake resistant design of multi-storeyed structures.

COURSE OUTCOMES


(cdviii) Understand the elements of earthquake engineering.

(cdix) Compute design moments and shears for framed structure as per IS: 1893.

(cdx) Calculate free vibrations and forced vibrations of different degree of freedom and dynamic response to time dependent forces.


Students will learn about the elements of earthquake engineering and the concepts of theory of vibrations, free vibrations of differ-ent degree of freedom and dynamic response to time dependent forces. Students will also learn to compute design moments and shears for framed structure as per IS: 1893. Students will understand about earthquake damages and post disaster management. Upon completion, student should be able to compute design moments and shears for framed structure as per IS: 1893 and design the same.

TEXT BOOKS

(cdxi) Anil K. Chopra, (2011), Dynamics of Structures – Theory and Applications to Earthquake Engineering, 4th Edition, Prentice-Hall India Pvt Ltd. ISBN: 0132858037

(cdxii) Agarwal P. &Shrikhande M., (2006), Earthquake Resistant Design of Structures, Prentice-Hall India Pvt Ltd, ISBN: 9788120328921

REFERENCE BOOKS

(cdxiii) Pauley & Priestly (1995), Seismic design of reinforced concrete and masonry buildings, John Wiley & Sons.

(cdxiv) StrattaJ.L. (2000), Manual of Seismic Design, Prentice-Hall India Pvt Ltd.

(cdxv) KramerS.L. (2000), Geotechnical Earthquake Engineering, Prentice-Hall India Pvt Ltd.

COURSE CONTENTS

Unit I:Elements of Earthquakes 9 lecture hours

Elements of Seismology - Earthquakes -Structure of the Earth -History of the Earth -Earthquake Mechanism -Propagation of Seismic Waves -Earthquake Phenomena -Earthquake Measurements -Definitions of magnitude, intensity, epicentre etc; General features of tectonics of seismic regions, seismographs, liquefaction, effect of Tsunami.

Unit II:Free and Forced Vibrations 9 lecture hours

Dynamic Loads-D’Alembert’s Principle and inertia forces-Stiffness and flexibility of elastic structures - Theory of Vibrations - Free vibrations of single degree, two degree and multi degree freedom systems - computations of dynamic response to time dependent forces- mass and stiffness matrices – natural frequencies - Plate Tectonics Theory.

360


Unit III:Earthquake Resistant Design 9 lecture hours

Principles of Earthquake Resistant Design - Response spectrum theory. Application of response spectrum theory to seismic design of structures.

Unit IV:Earthquake Damages 9 lecture hours

Earthquake Damages to Various Civil Engineering Structures - Case Histories Earthquake-Earthquake response of structures.

Unit V:Post Disaster Management 9 lecture hours

Post disaster measures – Post disaster management.

Mode of Evaluation:

Components

Theory

Internal

SEE

Marks 50 50

Total Marks 100





1 Understand the elements of earthquake engineering. 1

2 Compute design moments and shears for framed structure as per IS:

1893. 2

3 Calculate free vibrations and forced vibrations of different degree of freedom and dynamic

response to 3

time dependent forces.

En

gin

eeri

ng K

no

wle

dg

e

Pro

ble

m a

nal

ysi

s

Des

ign

/dev

elo

pm

ent

of

solu

tio

ns

Con

du

ct i

nv

esti

gat

ions

co

mple

x p

roble

mso

f

Mo

der

n t

oo

l u

sag

e

Th

e en

gin

eer

and s

oci

ety

En

vir

on

men

t an

d s

ust

ain

abil

ity

Eth

ics

Ind

ivid

ual

or

team

wo

rk

Co

mm

un

icat

ion

Pro

ject

man

agem

ent

and

fin

ance

Lif

e-lo

ng

Lea

rnin

g

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

CLE385 Earthquake Engineering 1 2 1






Name:

Admission No:

Batch No:

361


Course : CLE385 –Earthquake Engineering






SECTION A

1.

(a) During an earthquake why primary wave reaches earth surface before surface wave?

(b)Does stiffness depend on geometry and material properties?

(c) “All varying loads are not dynamic loads”, justify it.

(d) Is foundation on saturated soil vulnerable to earthquake? Give the appropriate reason.

(e) India has an organization which work for disaster management. Do you know the name of

this organization?

1x5 = 5

2. (a) What do you understand by multiple degree of freedom (MDOF) system?

(b) Write down the properties of mass matrix.

2.5x2=5

SECTION B

3.

(a) There were many foundations which failed during an earthquake without failing their super

structures. Explain the phenomenon in detail.

(b)A single storey building resting on homogenous soil undergoes an earthquake excitation of

magnitude 6.6 in reactor scale. Derive an expression for it. Consider soils have uniform

stiffness and damping.

2x10=20

SECTION C


4. The 2004 Indian Ocean earthquake occurred at 00:58:53 UTC on 26 December with

an epicenter off the west coast of Sumatra, Indonesia. The event is known by the scientific

community as the Sumatra–Andaman earthquake. The resulting tsunami was given various

names, including the 2004 Indian Ocean tsunami, South Asian tsunami, Indonesian tsunami,

the Christmas tsunami and the Boxing Day tsunami. Explain briefly the major effects of that

tsunami.

10

5. Write a detailed note on response spectrum theory and its application to seismic design of

structures.

10

6. Describe in details about the computations of moments and shear for earthquake resistant framed

structures.

10

7. a) Consider an earthen dam which had failed during an earthquake in the past and make a

short note on it covering main causes of failure and effects of its.

b) A reinforced concrete building situated in Kathmandu, Nepal was subjected to an

earthquake. How it responded?

10

8.

The Ministry of Home Affairs whose primary purpose is to coordinate response to natural

disasters and for capacity-building in disaster resiliency and crisis response. An agency was

established through the Disaster Management Act enacted by the Government of India in

December 2005.The Prime Ministeris the de facto chairperson of NDMA. The agency is

responsible for defining the measures and managements of post disaster. Explain the measures

and management of post disaster in a brief note.

10

SECTION D

9. Discuss the method by which the response of MDOF system is reduced to response of SDOF

system.

15

10

Determine the natural frequencies of vibration and corresponding time period fora single bay

three storied building of width 4 m and constant storey height of 3 m. The building has lumped

floor masses and storey stiffnesses (Top to Bottom) as follows: m1 = 0.2 kN sec2 /mm; m2 =

0.3 kN sec2 /mm; m3 = 0.25 kN sec2/mm k 1 = 70 kN / mm; k2 = 120 kN / mm; k3 = 200 kN /

mm.

15



CLE386 Structures on Expansive Soils L T P C



Co-requisites

COURSE OBJECTIVES

(cdxvi) To understand problems related to expansive soils.

(cdxvii) To identify preventive measures for mitigating effect of soil expansion on structures founded on expansive soil.

COURSE OUTCOMES


(cdxviii) Know the physical & mineralogical properties of expansive soil.

(cdxix) Predict heave and shrinkage.

(cdxx) Conduct tests for identification of swelling soil.

(cdxxi) Design suitable method for improving properties of expansive soil.

CATALOG DESCRIPTION

Expansive soils are soils that expand when water is added, and shrink when they dry out. This continuous change in soil volume causes homes built on this soil to move unevenly and crack. Each year in the United States, expansive soils cause $2.3 billion in damage to houses, other buildings, roads, pipelines, and other structures. This is more than twice the damage from floods, hur-ricanes, tornadoes, and earthquakes combined.

TEXT BOOKS

(cdxxii) Swami Saran (2008), Analysis and Design of sub structures 2nd edition, Limit State Design, Oxford & IBH Publishing Co. Pvt Ltd., 66, Janpath, New Delhi. ISBN: 978-81-204-1700-7.

REFERENCE BOOKS

(cdxxiii) F.H.Chen (1995), Foundations in Expansive Soils, Elseivier Publications. ISBN:978-04-444-3036-6.

(cdxxiv) R.E.Peck, W.E.Hansen&T.H.Thornburn (2004), Foundation Engineering, John Wiley. ISBN: 978-04-716-7585-3.

(cdxxv) Varghese P.C (2009), Foundation Engineering 1st Edition, Prentice-Hall of India Private Limited. ISBN: 978-81-203-2652-1.

COURSE CONTENT

Unit I: Origin and Occurrence of Expansive Soils 9 lecture hours

Occurrence and distribution in India - Moisture equilibrium - Soil, structure, environmental interaction - Distress symptoms case histories.

Unit II: Identification of Expansive Soils 9 lecture hours

Soil Structure - Clay mineralogy Swell potential - Field exploration - laboratory tests for identification.

Unit III: Prediction of heave – Osmotic and Matric suction 9 lecture hours

Methods of prediction of heave - Empirical methods - double and oedometer tests - soil moisture suction - field observations - shrinkage.


Unit IV:Remedial foundation Techniques 9 lecture hours

Design considerations-Individual and continuous footings - stiffened mats, under reamed piles, Codal provisions.

Unit V: Chemical stabilization and Special Foundation 9 lecture hours

363

Mechanical alteration – Sand cushion technique - CNS concept – Chemical stabilization with lime, flyash and cement – Special foundations – Under-reamed piles – Straight-shafted drilled piers - Belled piers – Granular pile-anchors.

Mode of Evaluation: The theory performance of students is evaluated.

Components

Theory

Internal

SEE

Marks 50 50

Total Marks 100





Mapping between Cos and

POs



1 Know the physical & mineralogical properties of expansive soil. 1

2 Predict heave and

shrinkage. 2

3 Conduct tests for identification of swelling soil. 4

4 Design suitable method for improving properties of expansive soil 3

En

gin

eeri

ng

Kn

ow

led

ge

Des

ign

/dev

elo

pm

ent

of

solu

tio

ns

Co

nd

uct

in

ves

tig

atio

nso

f co

mp

lex

pro

ble

ms

Mo

der

n t

oo

l u

sag

e

The

engin

eer

and s

oci

ety

En

vir

on

men

t an

d s

ust

ain

abil

ity

Eth

ics

Ind

ivid

ual

or

team

wo

rk

Co

mm

un

icat

ion

Pro

ject

man

agem

ent

and f

inan

ce

Lif

e-lo

ng

Lea

rnin

g

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

CLE386 Structures on Expansive Soils 1 1 2 1


.MODEL QUESTION PAPER

Name:

Admission No:

Batch No:


Course : CLE 386 - Structures on Expansive Soils






SECTION A

1.

(a) Is black cotton soil is expansive soil?

(b)Draw structure of montmorillonite and kaolinite clay minerals.

(c) An oedometer test is used to measure the_____________ property of soil.

(d)Is Sand Cushion technique is used for improvement of soft clay characteristics?

(e)Write importance of Granular pile anchors.

1

1

1

1

1

2. (a) Explain about Special foundations used for the construction of civil engineering structures.

(b) Elaborate about swelling potential and Free Swelling Index.

2.5x2=5

SECTION B

3.

(a) Explain the mechanism of soil structure interaction for swelling soils. Also enlist the

problems due to swelling.

(b) Enlist the chemical stabilizers used for stabilization of expansive soil. Explain mechanisms

for any two chemical stabilizers for stabilizing expansive soil.

2x10=20

SECTION C


4. Explain in detail about Clay mineralogy with the help of proper structure of montmorillonite,

illite and kaolinite minerals and also explain about Swell potential.

10

5. Enlist the methods of prediction of heave and explain in detail, also explain about the soil

moisture suction.

10

6. Describe in detail about design considerations of Individual and continuous footings, also write

the merits and demerits of individual and continuous footings.

10

7. Elaborate about moisture content and initial dry density of expansive soil. How initial moisture

content and initial dry density effects swelling pressure of expansive soil?

10

8.

Explain about oedometer test. Draw a chart explaining each stage of swelling of expansive soil

in an oedometer test.

10

SECTION D

9. Explain about drilled pier foundation. How will you calculate uplift force for drilled pier

foundation in expansive soil?

15

10

You have been appointed as an assistant engineer byMaharashtra Public Service Commission

and you have been assigned a project for construction of multistory building in the area where

the soil is black cotton soil which is an expansive soil, so suggest the type of foundation which

will be most suitable for that site and also suggest the techniques to improve the bearing capacity

of the soil.

15



CLE461 Advance Hydraulic Structures Design L T P C



Co-requisites --

COURSE OBJECTIVES

1. To enable students about the design and operation of hydraulic structures.

(cdxxvi) To acquire skills to design dams, flood control structures and canal diversion works.

(cdxxvii) To Understand about canal lining requirements, reservoir maintenance and up-stream and downstream bank protection works etc.

COURSE OUTCOMES


(cdxxviii) Design of canal diversion work involving head works, upstream and downstream bank protection works.

(cdxxix) Design of dams and flood control structures.

(cdxxx) Concept of spillways and stilling basins.

CATALOG DESCRIPTION

A hydraulic structure is structure submerged or partially submerged in any body of water, which disrupts the natural flow of water. They can be used to divert, disrupt or completely stop the flow. An example of a hydraulic structure would be a dam, which slows the normal flow rate of the river in order to power turbines. A hydraulic structure can be built in rivers, a sea, or any body of water where there is a need for a change in the natural flow of water.

Hydraulic structures may also be used to measure the flow of water. When used to measure the flow of water, hydraulic struc-tures are defined as a class of specially shaped, static devices over or through which water is directed in such a way that under free-flow conditions at a specified location (point of measurement) a known level to flow relationship exists. Hydraulic structures of this type can generally be divided into two categories

TEXT BOOKS

(cdxxxi) Varshney R. S. (2009),Theory and Design of Irrigation Structures Vol. I,Nam Chand & Brothers, ISBN: 9788185240732.

(cdxxxii) Sahasrabudhe, S. R. (2011), Irrigation Engineering and Hydraulics Structures, 3rd Edition, S K Kataria & Sons, ISBN: 9789350141311.

REFERENCE BOOKS

(cdxxxiii) Usdi (2011), Design of Small Dams, 3rd Edition, SBS Publishers, ISBN: 9788190309806.

(cdxxxiv) Pavel Novak, Moffat A. and Novak P. (2006), Hydraulic Structures, 3rd Edition, Spons Architecture Price Book, ISBN: 9780415250719.

COURSE CONTENT

Unit I: Canal Head Works 10 lecture hours

Introduction, layout, selection of site for diversion head work, various components and their functions, design of weirs and bar-rages on permeable foundation, Bligh’s creep theory, Khosla’s method of independent variables, use of Khosla’s charts, silt ejectors and their design principles.

Unit II:Canal Falls 7 lecture hours

Necessity and location of canal falls, types, design of Sarda and Glacis falls, energy dissipation devices and arrangement.


Unit III: Canal Regulation & Drainage Works 10 lecture hours

367

Canal head regulators and cross regulators, their functions and design concepts, types of cross drainage works and their selection, design aspects of aqueducts, siphon aqueducts, supper passages, canal siphon and level crossings.

Unit IV : Storage Works 10 lecture hours

Investigation and planning for reservoirs, capacity and yield, storage works, types of dams and their choice, selection of suitable site. Gravity dams: Design aspects of gravity dams, stability criteria and foundation treatment.

Earth dams: Design aspects of earth dams, simple design, seepage through earth dams, control seepage, design of filters.

Arch dams: Constant angle and constant center arch dams (simple design and sketch), buttress and multiple arch dams (principle and sketch).

Unit V: Spillway and Stilling Basins 8 lecture hours

Introduction, spillway capacity, different types, energy dissipation below spillways, stilling basins: type I and II, gates and valves aerators.

Mode of Evaluation: The theory and lab performance of students are evaluated separately.

Components

Theory

Internal

SEE

Marks 50 50

Total Marks 100



1 Design of canal diversion work involving head works, upstream and downstream bank protection works. 3, 6, 7

2 Design of dams and flood control structures. 3

3 Concept of spillways and stilling basins. 2

En

gin

eeri

ng

Kn

ow

led

ge

Pro

ble

m a

nal

ysi

s

Des

ign

/dev

elo

pm

ent

of

solu

tio

ns

Co

nd

uct

in

ves

tig

atio

nso

f co

mp

lex

pro

ble

ms

Mo

der

n t

oo

l u

sag

e

Th

e en

gin

eer

and s

oci

ety

En

vir

on

men

t an

d s

ust

ain

abil

ity

Eth

ics

Ind

ivid

ual

or

team

wo

rk

Co

mm

un

icat

ion

Pro

ject

man

agem

ent

and

fin

ance

Lif

e-lo

ng

Lea

rnin

g

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

CLE461 Advance Hydraulic Structures

Design 1 2 1 1



Course Code: CLE461 Course Title: Advance Hydraulic Structures Design





SECTION A

1.

(a) The floor of an off taking canal is kept higher than the river. Give logical reason.

(b) A weir is designed for u/s side having water at maximum pool level and d/s side having no

water. Explain logically.

(c)Energy dissipater is generally provided below most of the hydraulic structures. Give logical

reason.

(d)Canal escape is provided at the end of a canal. Justify your answer.

(e)A filter is generally provided at the toe of an earthen dam. Give reason.

1x5 = 5

2. (a) Draw a neat sketch of the layout of a diversion structure, showing all its components.

(b) Differentiate between low and high gravity dam. Also derive the relation for maximum

height of a low gravity dam

2.5x2=5

SECTION B

3.

(a) Design a suitable head regulator for a barrage for the following data:

Average bed level of river= 257.0 m; HFL (before construction of barrage) = 262.2 m

Permissible afflux = 1.0 m; Pond level = 260.6 m

FSL in canal= 180 cumecs; Bed level of canal = 257.2 m

Safe exit gradient for canal bed material = 1/5

Anticipated maximum FSL of canal = 257.2 m

(b)Define a stilling basin. Explain in detail various types of stilling basins used with hydraulic

structures.

2x10=20

SECTION C


4. Discuss, in detail, the various protection works provided at u/s and d/s of a diversion work.

Give their specifications as per Indian standards.

10

5. A rectangular channel with a slope of 1 in 200 and a depth of 2.0 m carries a flow of 64

cumec/m. Estimate sequent depth length of jump and energy loss in the hydraulic jump.

10

6. Design a sarda type fall for the following data:

U/S bed level = 105.0 m; D/S bed level= 103.5 m; U/S FSL = 106.8 m; D/S FSL= 105.3 m

Bed width of channel= 30 m; Side slope of channel = 1:1; U/S berm level = 17.4 m; Safe

exit gradient = 1/5

10

7. Discus the factors that govern the site selection for a dam 10

8. Explain in detail the procedure to fix reservoir capacity. 10

SECTION D

9. River Ganga is a perennial type of river that caries water throughout the year, but there is quite

fluctuation during peak monsoon and off monsoon seasons. You have been appointed as a

Disaster Mitigation Engineer for the middle zone of the Ganga river catchment (From Kanpur

to Patna). As a disaster manager, discuss various methods to control floods in order to make

area safe.

15

10

Suppose you are hired by Punjab Irrigation Department. As a civil engineer you are required to

maintain an existing irrigation system in the state. Discuss the procedure you will adopt.

15


CLE462 Tunnel Engineering L T P C



Co-requisites

COURSE OBJECTIVES

(cdxxxv) To understand rock mass classification.

(cdxxxvi) To understand tunneling methodologies.

(cdxxxvii) To deal with various tunneling problems.

COURSE OUTCOMES


(cdxxxviii) Classify rocks and rock masses.

(cdxxxix) Give suitable reinforcement techniques in tunnelling.

(cdxl) Judge tunnelling methods as per suitability of site.


Tunnels are dug in different kinds of grounds, from soft sand to hard rock. The type of excavation is chosen by the type of ground. There are two additional ways of excavation: quarry and ‘cut and cover’. In quarry which includes further two methods that are DBM (Drill Blast Mucking) & TBM (Tunnel Boring Machine) the tunnel path is drilled in a horizontal way. This system requires a deep tunnel that’s built in a firm rock. In the ‘cut and cover’ system, a tunnel is dug in the ground and, afterwards, a roof is built above the tunnel. This system fits tunnels that are close to the ground like road tunnels and infrastructure.Building tunnels is a large civil engineering project that could cost very high. The planning and building of a long tunnel may take many years.

TEXT BOOKS

(cdxli) Z T Bieniawski (1989), Rock Mechanics Design in Mining &Tunneling, Balkema Publishers. ISBN: 978-90-619-1530-0.

(cdxlii) Jager, G. (2009), Rock Mechanics and Engineering, Cambridge University Press. ISBN: 978-05-211-0338-1.

REFERENCE BOOKS

(cdxliii) Hock, E. and Brown, E.T. (1980), Underground excavation in rock, Institute of Mining and Metallurgy.

(cdxliv) Swami Saran (2006), Analysis and Design of sub structures, Limit State Design, Oxford & IBH Publishing Co. Pvt Ltd., New Delhi. 978-04-154-1844-7.

(cdxlv) J O Bickel & T R Kuesel, Tunnel Engineering Handbook, CBS Publishers & Distributors. ISBN: 978-81-239-0543-3.

COURSE CONTENT

Unit I: Rock mass classification 9 lecture hours

Classification and index properties of rocks, Rock strength and failure criteria, initial stresses in rocks, influence of joints and their orientation in distribution of stresses- deformability of rocks.

Unit II: Underground reinforcements 9 lecture hours

Simple engineering applications in rock mechanics, underground openings, rock slopes, foundations, mining subsidence, Rock bolt systems- installation techniques, testing of rock bolts, choice of rock bolts.

Unit III: Tunnel engineering 9 lecture hours

Necessity, planning of tunnels, site investigation for tunnels, types of tunnels, tunnel alignment and grade, size and shape of a tunnel.

Unit IV: Methods of tunnelling 9 lecture hours

Methods of tunnelling in hard rock - full face method - heading and bench method - drift method - different methods of tunneling in soft soils including compressed air and shield tunneling - shafts in tunnels - ventilation of tunnel and various methods - lining of tunnels.

Unit V: Tunneling problems 9 lecture hours

Problems in tunnel constructions, boom tunnelling machines, full face tunnel boring machines; support of tunnels; adverse ground conditions; ground treatment and hazards in tunnelling.

Mode of Evaluation: The performance of students is evaluated.

Components

Theory

Internal

SEE

Marks 50 50

Total Marks 100





1 Classify rocks and rock

masses. 1

2 Give suitable reinforcement techniques in tunnelling. 3

3 Judge tunnelling methods as per suitability of

site. 4, 7

En

gin

eeri

ng K

no

wle

dg

e

Pro

ble

m a

nal

ysi

s

Des

ign

/dev

elo

pm

ent

of

solu

tio

ns

Co

ndu

ct i

nv

esti

gat

ion

sof

com

ple

x p

rob

lem

s

Mo

der

n t

oo

l u

sag

e

Th

e en

gin

eer

and s

oci

ety

En

vir

on

men

t an

d s

ust

ain

abil

ity

Eth

ics

Ind

ivid

ual

or

team

wo

rk

Co

mm

un

icat

ion

Pro

ject

man

agem

ent

and

fin

ance

Lif

e-lo

ng

Lea

rnin

g

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

CLE462 Tunnel Engineering 1 1 1 2






Course Code: CLE462 Course Title: Tunnel Engineering





SECTION A

1.

(a) Metamorphic rocks are formed by transformation of existing rocks by the action of ----------

----- and --------------.

(b) If the RQD (%) value vary from 75% to 90% then the rock quality will be---------------.

(c) How faults in rocks are recognised in the field?

(d) A tunnel is found more advantageous as compared to the alternate routes because it:

i. Remains free from snow.

ii. Reduces the cost by reducing the route distance.

iii. Reduces the maintenance cost.

iv. All the above.

(e)For full face method of tunneling, the excavation to be done is generally divided into how

many sections.

i. Two sections.

ii. Three sections.

iii. Four sections.

iv. Five sections.

1x5 = 5

2. (a) Explain about dip and strike in a rock strata with the help of block diagram.

(b) State the advantages of tunnels and horse-shoe shape section of tunnels.

2.5x2=5

SECTION B

3.

(a)Explain how the tunnel construction in rock differs from tunnelling in soft ground. Also

describe full face method of tunnelling in rock with merits and demerits of it.

(b)Describe with the help of neat sketch the procedure to determine the tensile strength of rock

mass.

10

[10

SECTION C


4. Name and explain the agent which causes metamorphisms. Also explain different types of

metamorphisms.

10

5. What do you understand by internal stresses in rock mass? Explain indirect method for the

determination of internal stresses in a rock mass?

10

6. Explain the different methods of tunnelling in soft soils including compressed air and shield

tunnelling.

10

7. Explain different types of support of tunnels and specify the conditions for which the particular

support system is best suitable.

10

8.

Discuss about rock mass rating (RMR) system and enlist the parameters that are used to classify

a rock mass using RMR system.

10

SECTION D

9. With neat sketch, explain the sequence of operation of driving tunnels in soft ground using liner

plates without stiffeners. Also explain Heading and bench method of tunnelling in rock.

15

10

You and your friends went to spend holidays in Jammu and your train crossed the Pir Panjal

Railway Tunnel and you felt that there was no proper ventilation system in that tunnel, so as an

engineer enlist the requirements of a ventilating system in the tunnel. Explain briefly various

methods for dust suppression during tunnelling.

15


CLE463 Applications of Matrix Methods in Structural Analysis L T P C



Co-requisites

COURSE OBJECTIVES

(cdxlvi) To understand the basic concepts of flexibility method and stiffness method.

(cdxlvii) To distinguish between force method and displacement method.

(cdxlviii) To understand the behaviour of plane trusses & plane frames.

COURSE OUTCOMES


(cdxlix) Know the concept of static and kinematic indeterminacy.

(cdl) Understand the concept of flexibility method and stiffness method.

(cdli) Analyze plane trusses & plane frames.


Students learn the behaviour of indeterminate structures, concepts of static indeterminacy and kinematic indeterminacy. Students understand the use of flexibilitymatrix method and stiffness matrix method for analyzing structures. Students also learn the use of software package STAAD – PRO. Upon completion, students should be able to analyse structures by flexibility matrix method and stiffness matrix method and use STAAD – PRO software package for analysing indeterminate structures.

TEXT BOOKS

(cdlii) Pundit G.S., & Gupta S.P., (2008), Structural Analysis (A matrix approach), Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Ltd.

(cdliii) Amin Ghali, Adam M Neville and Tom G Brown, “Structural Analysis: A Unified Classical and Matrix Approach”. Sixth Edition, 2007, Chapman & Hall.

REFERENCE BOOKS

(cdliv) DevdasMenon,”Advanced Structural Analysis”(2009), Narosa Publishing House

(cdlv) DevdasMenon,”Structural Analysis”(2008), Narosa Publishing House, 2008

(cdlvi) A.S.Meghre& S.K.Deshmukh, “Matrix Methods of Structural Analysis” (2010) Charotar Publishing House Pvt. Ltd.

(cdlvii) Kanchi M. B. “Matrix Methods of Structural Analysis” (2002), Wiley Eastern Limited, New Delhi,

(cdlviii) Ganju T. N. “Matrix Structural Analysis using Spreadsheets” (2002),TMH Publishing Co. Ltd. New Delhi.

COURSE CONTENT

Unit I: Introduction to Flexibility Matrices and Stiffness Matrices 9 lecture hours

Static and kinematic indeterminacy - stiffness and flexibility coefficients-flexibility and stiffness matrices- relationship between flexibility and stiffness matrices- properties of stiffness and flexibility matrices - concept of co-ordinates-Classification of Structures

– Stability-Settlement of supports- solution of simple problems.

Unit II: Analysis of Beams 9 lecture hours

Flexibility and stiffness matrices for beams - solution of problems - bending moment diagram.

Unit III: Analysis of Plane Truss 9 lecture hours

Flexibility and stiffness matrices for plane truss - solution of problems - internal forces due to thermal expansion - lack of fit.


Unit IV: Analysis of Plane Frame 9 lecture hours

Flexibility and stiffness matrices for plane frame - solution of problems - bending moment diagram.

Unit V: Use of Software Packages 9 lecture hours

371

Analysis of beam, plane truss & plane frame by STAAD-PRO.


Components

Theory

Internal

SEE

Marks 50 50

Total Marks 100





1 Understand the concept of kinematic indeterminacy, static indeterminacy, flexibility matrix and

stiff- 1

ness matrix.

2 Analyse continuous beams, plane frames and pin jointed plane

trusses. 2

3 Calculate flexibility matrix and stiffness matrix for different types of structures and use STAAD

– 3

PRO software package.

En

gin

eeri

ng K

no

wle

dg

e

Pro

ble

m a

nal

ysi

s

Des

ign

/dev

elo

pm

ent

of

solu

tio

ns

Co

nd

uct

in

ves

tig

atio

nso

f co

mp

lex

pro

ble

ms

Mo

der

n t

oo

l u

sag

e

Th

e en

gin

eer

and s

oci

ety

En

vir

on

men

t an

d s

ust

ain

abil

ity

Eth

ics

In

div

idu

al o

r te

am w

ork

C

om

mu

nic

atio

n

Pro

ject

man

agem

ent

and

fin

ance

Lif

e-lo

ng

Lea

rnin

g

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

CLE463 AMMSA 1 2 1




372



Name:

Admission No:

Batch No:


Course : CLE463-Applications of Matrix Methods In Structural Analysis




SECTION A

1.

(a) ‘Static indeterminacy deals with forces’. Justify your answer.

(b) ‘Flexibility is inverse of stiffness’. Give reasons.

(c) ‘Stiffness matrix method is a kinematic method’. Write your comments.

(d) ‘Plane structures lie in vertical plane’. Justify your answer.

(e) ‘All joints of a plane frame are rigid’. Give reasons.

1x5 = 5

2. (a) State the properties of flexibility matrix.

(b) Define d. o. f.

2.5x2=5

SECTION B

3.

(a) Determine the stiffness matrix with reference to the coordinates for the beam shown

in figure 1. EI is constant.

(b) Determine the flexibility matrix with reference to the coordinates for the beam shown

in figure 1. EI is constant.

2x10=20

SECTION C


4. Distinguish between pin jointed frame structures and rigid jointed frame structures. 10

5. Analyze the beam shown in figure 2 by flexibility matrix method. EI is constant. 10

6. Analyze the beam shown in figure 2 by stiffness matrix method. EI is constant. 10

7. Analyze the plane truss shown in figure 3 by flexibility matrix method. AE is constant for all

members.

10

8.

Analyze the plane truss shown in figure 3 by stiffness matrix method. AE is constant for all

members.

10

SECTION D

9. Calculate the unknown joint displacements for the plane frame shown in figure 4 by

stiffness matrix method. EI is constant.

15

10.

Write a STAAD PRO programming for analyzing the plane frame shown in figure 4. EI is

constant.

15


Courses

375

CLE464 Design with STAAD Pro L T P C


Pre-requisites CLE342, CLE353

Co-requisites --

COURSE OBJECTIVES

(cdlix) To teach the students to understand the details of STAAD – PRO software package.

(cdlx) To enable the students to know the behaviour of RCC and Steel structures.

(cdlxi) To enable the students to design different components of structures.

COURSE OUTCOMES

(cdlxii) Understandthe details of STAAD – PRO software package.

(cdlxiii) Knowthe behaviour of RCC and Steel structures.

(cdlxiv) Knowthe bending moment diagram drawn in tension face and shear force diagram.

(cdlxv) Designdifferent components of structures.


Students will learn the details of STAAD - PRO software package and know the behaviour of RCC and Steel structures. Students will understand the bending moment diagram, drawn in tension face and shear force diagram. Upon completion, students should be able to design different components of RCC and Steel structures.

TEXT BOOK

1. V.N.Vazirani&M.M.Ratwani, (1998), Analysis of Structures, Khanna Publishers

REFERENCE BOOKS

(cdlxvi) R.L.Jindal, (1996), Indeterminate Structures, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing House.

(cdlxvii) G.S.Pandit& Gupta S.P., (1998),. Structural Analysis (A matrix approach), Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Ltd.

(cdlxviii) Wang C.K., (1996), Matrix Method of Structural Analysis, Jon Wiley publications.

COURSE CONTENT


1. Design of combined footing.

2. Design of raft footing.

3. Design of retaining wall.

4. Design of water tank.

5. Design of 20 m span steel roof truss.

6. Design of plate girder.

376



Components

Laboratory

Internal

SEE

laboratory

Marks 50

50

Total Marks 100



Sl. Course Outcomes (COs) Mapped Programme Outcomes

No.

1 Understand the details of STAAD – PRO software

package 5, 10

2 Know the bending moment diagram drawn in tension face and shear force

diagram 9

3 Design different components of structures 5

En

gin

eeri

ng

Kn

ow

led

ge

Pro

ble

m a

nal

ysi

s

Des

ign

/dev

elo

pm

ent

of

solu

tio

ns

Co

nd

uct

in

ves

tig

atio

nso

f co

mp

lex

pro

ble

ms

Mo

der

n t

oo

l u

sag

e

Th

e en

gin

eer

and s

oci

ety

En

vir

on

men

t an

d s

ust

ain

abil

ity

Eth

ics

Ind

ivid

ual

or

team

wo

rk

Co

mm

un

icat

ion

Pro

ject

man

agem

ent

and

fin

ance

Lif

e-lo

ng

Lea

rnin

g

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

CLE464 Design with STAAD Pro 2 1 1






Course Code: CLE464 Course Title: Design with STAAD PRO


Time: 1 Hour 30 Minutes Max. Marks:50

Note: All questions in Section A and C are compulsory. Attempt any four question from section B.


SECTION A

1.

(a) ‘Raft foundation is always necessary in sandy areas.’ Write your comments on the statement.

(b) ‘Main reinforcements resist bending moment’. Give reasons.

(c)‘Heels and toes are required for stability in retaining walls’. Justify your answer.

(d)’Design of slab depends upon aspect ratio’. Give reasons.

(e)’Purlins are very important components in roof trusses’. Justify your answer.

(f) ‘Stiffeners are always required in plate girders’. Write your comments on the statement.

1x6 = 6

SECTION B


2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

Write a program in STAAD PRO for the design of combined footing for two columns of size

300x300mm, 1.5m apart.

Draw a neat sketch of a 4 m high cantilever retaining wall showing its all components.

Write a program in STAAD PRO to design a six span continuous deep beam (each span = 6 m).

The girder is carrying an udl of 120 kN/m.

Draw a neat sketch of plate girder showing its all components.

Write a short note on subgrade modulus of soil.

8X 4=32

SECTION C

7. An industrial roof truss is to be built in NCR region with the following data:

Plan area 20 m x 50 m,

Roof slope = 13degree

Type of roofing = G.I Sheeting,

Spacing of truss = 3 m

Height of column = 9 m

Calculate the wind forces on the roof truss and design a suitable purlin section.

12 X1

=12


Courses

377

CLE465 Dynamics of Structures L T P C



Co-requisites --

COURSE OBJECTIVES

(cdlxix) To teach the students about the analysis of Single Degree of Freedom system (SDOF) and multi degree freedom system(MDOF).

(cdlxx) To enable the students to understand the basic principles of vibration analysis.

COURSE OUTCOMES


(cdlxxi) Understand the SDOF and MDOF systems.

(cdlxxii) Analyse SDOF and MDOF systems.

(cdlxxiii) Understand periodic, harmonic and impulsive loading.


Students will learn the SDOF and MDOF systems and different types of load e.g. periodic, harmonic and impulsive loading. Stu-dents will also learn the analysis of SDOF and MDOF systems and free and forced vibration of beams. Upon completion, students should be able to analyse SDOF and MDOF systems for different types of loadings.

TEXT BOOKS

(cdlxxiv) Mario Paz, (2006), Structural Dynamics: Theory Computation, Second Edition, CBS Publication, ISBN 10: 8123909780.

(cdlxxv) Anil K. Chopra, (2011), Dynamics of Structures – Theory and Applications to Earthquake Engineering, 4th Edition, Prentice-Hall India Pvt Ltd. ISBN: 0132858037

REFERENCE BOOKS

(cdlxxvi) Clough R. M. and Ponian, Dynamics of Structures –McGraw Hill Co.New Delhi.

(cdlxxvii) Craig R.R , Structural Dynamics – An Introduction to Computer Methods, John Wiley

COURSE CONTENT

Unit I:Introduction of SDOF System 9 lecture hours

Single Degree of Freedom Systems - Analytical Models - Equation of Motion - Free Vibration – Damping - Types of damping - Types of damping - Response to harmonic loading - Resonance - Support motion – Transmissibility - Vibration isolation .

Unit II:Periodic & Impulsive Loading 9 lecture hours

SDOF system subjected to periodic & impulsive loading - Fourier series loading - Rectangular pulse - Introduction to Frequency Domain analysis

Unit III:Numerical Analysis of SDOF System 9 lecture hours

SDOF systems subjected to general dynamic loading - Duhamel’s integral - Application to simple loading cases - numerical evalu-ation of response integral.

378


Unit IV:MDOF Systems 9 lecture hours

MDOF systems - selection of DOFs - formulation of equations of motion - Structure matrices - Static condensation - Free Vibra-tion Eigen Value problem - Frequencies and Mode Shapes - Determination of natural frequencies and mode shapes by Stodola-Vianello method - Rayleigh method Orthogonality conditions.

Unit V:Vibration of Beams 9 lecture hours

Distributed- parameter Systems Free and forced Vibration of beams.


Components

Theory

Internal

SEE

Marks 50 50

Total Marks 100





1 Understand the SDOF and MDOF systems. 1

2 Analyse SDOF and MDOF systems. 2

3 Understand periodic, harmonic and impulsive loading. 3

En

gin

eeri

ng K

no

wle

dg

e

Pro

ble

m a

nal

ysi

s

Des

ign

/dev

elo

pm

ent

of

solu

tio

ns

Con

du

ct i

nv

esti

gat

ions

co

mple

x p

roble

mso

f

Mo

der

n t

oo

l u

sag

e

Th

e en

gin

eer

and s

oci

ety

En

vir

on

men

t an

d s

ust

ain

abil

ity

Eth

ics

Ind

ivid

ual

or

team

wo

rk

Co

mm

un

icat

ion

Pro

ject

man

agem

ent

and

fin

ance

Lif

e-lo

ng

Lea

rnin

g

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

CLE465 Dynamics of Structures 1 2 1





Name:

Admission No:

Batch No:


Course : CLE465- Dynamics of Structures




Note: All questions in Section A, B and D are compulsory. Attempt any four question from section

C.Assume missing data suitably, if any.

SECTION A

1.

(a)Define elastic system.

(b)Define inelastic system.

(c)Define Damping force.

(d)Define Damping ratio.

(e)Define Natural frequency.

1x5 = 5

2. (a)Define periodic vibration.

(b)Define transmissibility ratio.

2.5x2=5

SECTION B

3.

(a)Write short note on logarithmic decrement.

(b)Write short note on Dynamic magnification factor.

2x10=20

SECTION C


4. What is damped single degree of freedom system? Write down the equation of motion for

under-damped system.

10

5. Bring out the differences between free vibration and forced vibration. 10

6. Write down the equation of motion for damped harmonic excitation of single degree of freedom

system.

10

7. Discuss in details about Raleigh’s method. 10

8.

Explain D Alembert’s principle. Write the steps involved in finding the natural frequency for

undamped free vibration of any structure.

10

SECTION D

9. A vibrating system consist of a weight of W = 10 lb and a spring with stiffness k = 20 lb/in is

viscously damped so that the ratio of two consecutive amplitudes is 1.00:0.85. Determine (a) the

natural frequency of the undamped system, (b) the logarithmic decrement, (c) the damping ratio,

(d) the damping coefficient and (e) the damped natural frequency.

15

10. Write in details about multi degrees of freedom system. 15

CLE467 Planning and Scheduling with Primavera Software L T P C


Pre-requisites --

Co-requisites --

COURSE OBJECTIVES

1.To know the concept of work breakdown structure.

2.To understand the basics of resource levelling and inventory control.

3.To develop a better understanding about project planning and scheduling techniques.

COURSE OUTCOMES


1.Develop the work breakdown structure of a project.

2.Integrate and apply the theoretical concepts and techniques to develop a project plan.

3.Schedule and control the project with the help of Primavera software.


This course intends to impart the knowledge of planning, scheduling and controlling of construction projects. Students will learn various techniques to schedule the project such as PERT, CPM, line of balance method etc. Through this course students will learn to schedule and control the project activities through Primavera software.

TEXT BOOKS

1.Chitkara ,K. K. (2010), “Construction Project Management : Planning, Scheduling and Controlling”, Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing Company Limited ISBN 9780070680753.

REFERENCE BOOKS

1.Jha Kumar Neeraj (2013), “Construction Project Management”, Pearson Education India ISBN 9788131732496.

2.R. L. Peurifoy and C. J. Schexnayder (2008), “Construction Planning, Equipment and Methods”, Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing Company Limited.ISBN 9780073401126.

COURSE CONTENT

Unit I: Introduction to Project Planning and Scheduling 8 lecture hours

Introduction to Projects- Project Management, Importance of planning, Scheduling and Controlling, Introduction to Primavera software.

Unit II: Time Planning 5 lecture hours

Time planning- Project work break down – determining activity involved- assessing activity duration, Activity cost – earned value.

Unit III: Project work Scheduling 10 lecture hours

Work Scheduling, Bar chart method, Concept of CPM-PERT,CPMVs PERT, line of Balance method of scheduling.

Unit IV: Resource Planning 6 lecture hours

Scheduling construction manpower - manpower resource levelling, Material Planning – ABC classification of construction mate-rial- Planning material Inventory.

Unit V: Project Control 5 lecture hours

Project time control, cost control, Project information communication.


Components

Theory Laboratory

Internal

SEE Internal

SEE

Theory and laboratory

Marks 50

50 50

50

Total Marks 100 100

Scaled Marks 75 25 100





1 Develop the work breakdown structure of a

project. 11

2 Integrate and apply the theoretical concepts and techniques to develop a project

plan. 2,11

3 Schedule and control the project with the help of Primavera

software. 5, 6

En

gin

eeri

ng K

no

wle

dg

e

Pro

ble

m a

nal

ysi

s

Des

ign

/dev

elo

pm

ent

of

solu

tio

ns

Co

nd

uct

in

ves

tig

atio

nso

f co

mp

lex

pro

ble

ms

Mo

der

n t

oo

l u

sag

e

Th

e en

gin

eer

and s

oci

ety

En

vir

on

men

t an

d s

ust

ain

abil

ity

Eth

ics

Ind

ivid

ual

or

team

wo

rk

Co

mm

un

icat

ion

Pro

ject

man

agem

ent

and

fin

ance

Lif

e-lo

ng

Lea

rnin

g

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

CLE467

Planning and Scheduling

1

1 1

2

with Primavera Software




CLE468 Bridge Engineering L T P C



Co-requisites --

COURSE OBJECTIVES

1. To understand the design and codal concepts of different types of bridges.

COURSE OUTCOMES


1.Understand IRC Code.

2.Design and detailing of plate girder and steel truss bridges.

3.Design and detailing box culvert.

4.Design piers, abutments etc.

CATALOG DESCRIPTION

A bridge is a structure built to span physical obstacles such as a body of water, valley, or road, for the purpose of providing pas-sage over the obstacle. There are many different designs that all serve unique purposes and apply to different situations. Designs of bridges vary depending on the function of the bridge, the nature of the terrain where the bridge is constructed and anchored, the material used to make it, and the funds available to build it.

TEXT BOOKS

1.Victor D. J. (2008), Essentials of Bridge Engineering, 6th Edition, Oxford University Press, ISBN: 9788120417175.

2.Ramachandra (2004), Design of Steel structures, 4th Edition, Standard Publishers Distributors, ISBN: 9780071544115.

REFERENCE BOOKS

1.Duggal S. K. (2008), Design of Steel Structures, 3rd Edition, Tata McGraw-Hill, ISBN: 9780070260689.

2.IRC Bridge Code.

COURSE CONTENT

Unit I: 10 lecture hours

Site selection, various types of bridges and their suitability, loads, forces and IRC bridge loading and permissible stresses, Design of RC bridges under concentrated loads using effective width and Pigeauds Method.

Unit II: 7 lecture hours

Courbon’s method of load distribution. Detail design of slab culvert.

Unit III: 10 lecture hours

T-beam bridge, box culverts.

Unit IV : 9 lecture hours

Design and detailing of plate girder and steel Truss type bridges.

Unit V: 9 lecture hours

Design of piers and pier caps. Abutments and bearings.


Components

Theory

Internal

SEE

Marks 50 50

Total Marks 100





1 Understand IRC Code. 1

2 Design and detailing of plate girder and steel truss bridges. 1, 3

3 Design and detailing box culvert. 2, 3

4 Design piers, abutments etc. 3

En

gin

eeri

ng K

no

wle

dg

e

Pro

ble

m a

nal

ysi

s

Des

ign

/dev

elo

pm

ent

of

solu

tio

ns

Co

ndu

ct i

nv

esti

gat

ion

sof

com

ple

x p

rob

lem

s

Mo

der

n t

oo

l u

sag

e

Th

e en

gin

eer

and s

oci

ety

En

vir

on

men

t an

d s

ust

ain

abil

ity

Eth

ics

Ind

ivid

ual

or

team

wo

rk

Co

mm

un

icat

ion

Pro

ject

man

agem

ent

and

fin

ance

Lif

e-lo

ng

Lea

rnin

g

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

CLE468 Bridge Engineering 1 1 2





Name:

Admission No:

Batch No:


Course : CLE468- Bridge Engineering




Note: All questions in Section A, B and D are compulsory. Attempt any four question from section

C.Assume missing data suitably, if any.


1. (a) Explain why the construction of box culvert proves to be uneconomical if its span exceeds 6m. [1X5=5]

(b) Justify the use of Lift Bridge.

(c) Differentiate tracked vehicle and wheeled vehicle

(d) Give reason the successful functioning of a bridge primarily depends on the design on the

design of its bearings.

(e) Mention the permissible velocity for different types of beds of river.

2. (a) Differentiate between skew bridge and square bridge. [2X2.5=5]

(b) State the parameters to be considered while proposing type of bridge.

PART – B (10X2 = 20 Marks)

3. (a) Give explanation for the various loads which are to be considered in the design of a bridge. [2X10=20]

(b) Design a Simply Supported RCC deck slab for IRC Standard Class A loading with the following data:

Kerb width: 225 mm

Thickness of wearing coat: 75 mm

Clear Span : 08 meters

Clear Roadway width: 06 meters

Thickness of piers: 01 meters

PART – C (10X4 = 40 Marks)


4. Discuss Pigeaud’s Method of design with Pigeaud’s Curve. Write the limitations of Pigeaud’s Method. [10]

CLE401 Industrial Waste Treatment and Disposal L T P C



5. Illustrate the components of a bridge. Mention the function of each of them [10]

6. Define bearings and mention the purpose of providing bearings in a bridge with all its types. [10]

7. Explicate Courbon’s method for distribution of live load on longitudinal beam. [10]

8. Define Abutment with the functions. Explain in detail about its classification, according to layout in plan

and according to the type of superstructure. [10]

PART – D(15X2 = 30 Marks)

9. Design a T Beam bridge for the following data: [15]

Clear width of roadway =7.5 m.

Span c/c of bearings = 16 m

Live load = One load of Class AA.

Average thickness of wearing coat = 80 mm

10. Design a box culvert having inside dimensions of 3.5m x 3.5 m. The box culvert is subjected to a super imposed [15]

dead load of 10 kN/m2 and live load 40 kN/m2. Assume unit weight of soil as 18kN/m2 and angle of repose of

300.Use M25 concrete and Fe415 steel.

Table 1

B/L K for Simply

Supported Slab

B/L K for Simply

Supported Slab

0.1 0.40 0.7 2.12

0.2 0.80 0.8 2.24

0.3 1.16 0.9 2.36

0.4 1.48 0.1 2.51

0.5 1.72 1.1 2.60

0.6 1.96 1.2 2.64


Co-requisites --

COURSE OBJECTIVES

1.Get the adequate knowledge about phenomena of atmospheric environment and treatment, sources, characteristics and treatment processes of various types of industries.

2.Know the various processes of wastewater treatment of different industries and the engineering requirements for treatment facilities.

3.Design the waste treatment system for the different industry.

COURSE OUTCOMES


1.The solutions of physical, chemical and biological treatment and biosensors applied to biological process control

2.The uses of new techniques for collection, recycling and disposal and treatment of wastewater and solid wastes.

3.The design the wastewater supply and treatment technology.

4.The evaluation and monitoring of the treatment systems according to the different industries.

CATALOG DESCRIPTION

Disposal of waste water generated from the industries is the major concern because of the problems and diseases associated with it. Students learn about types of industries, industrial pollution, characteristics of industrial wastes, waste management approach, waste audit, equalization, neutralization, chemical oxidation and physico-chemical treatment. Upon completion, students should be able to know about the characteristics of the different industrial and design the effluent treatment system for the industry.

TEXT BOOKS

1.Patwardhan A.D. (2008), Industrial Waste Water Treatment, PHI Learning Pvt Ltd. ISBN: 978-81-203-3350-5

2. Nelson, L. Nemerow (2007), Industrial Waste Treatment: contemporary practice and vision for future, Elsevier Butter-worth-Heinemann Publication. ISBN: 9780123724939

REFERENCE BOOKS

1.Woodard & Curran Inc. (2006), Industrial Waste Treatment Handbook, Second Edition, Elsevier Butterworth-Heine-mann Publication. ISBN: 9780750679633

2.Thomas T. Shen (1999), Industrial Pollution Prevention, Springer publications. ISBN: 3540652086

COURSE CONTENT

Unit I:Industrial Pollution 9 lecture hours

Types of industries and industrial pollution – Characteristics of industrial wastes – Population equivalent – Bioassay studies – ef-fects of industrial effluents on streams, sewer, land, sewage treatment plants and human health – Hazardous Wastes – Environmen-tal legislations related to prevention and control of industrial effluents and hazardous wastes – Pollution Control Boards.

Unit II: Waste Management Approach 6 lecture hours

Waste management approach – Waste Audit – Volume and strength reduction – material and process modifications – Recycle, reuse and byproduct recovery – Applications.

Unit III: Liquid Waste Treatment Techniques 9 lecture hours

Equalization – Neutralization – removal of suspended and dissolved organic solids - Chemical oxidation – Removal of dissolved inorganics – Combined treatment of industrial and municipal wastes – Residue management.

Unit IV :Industrial Solid Waste Treatment 6 lecture hours

Physico-chemical treatment – solidification – incineration – Secured landfills – Legal Provisions.

Unit V: Case Studies of Industrial Pollution Control 9 lecture hours

Sources & their Characteristics, waste treatment flow sheets for selected industries such as textiles, tanneries, dairy, sugar, paper, distilleries, steel plants, refineries, fertilizer, and thermal power plants.

Mode of Evaluation: The theory performance of students is evaluated separately.

Components

Theory

Internal

SEE

Marks 50 50

Total Marks 100





1 The solutions of physical, chemical and biological treatment and biosensors applied to biological 1

process control

2 The uses of new techniques for collection, recycling and disposal and treatment of wastewater and 3

solid wastes.

3 The design the wastewater supply and treatment technology. 3

4 The evaluation and monitoring of the treatment systems according to the different industries. 4, 9

En

gin

eeri

ng

Kn

ow

led

ge

Pro

ble

m a

nal

ysi

s

Des

ign

/dev

elo

pm

ent

of

solu

tio

ns

Co

nd

uct

in

ves

tig

atio

nso

f co

mp

lex

pro

ble

ms

Mo

der

n t

oo

l u

sag

e

Th

e en

gin

eer

and s

oci

ety

En

vir

on

men

t an

d s

ust

ain

abil

ity

Eth

ics

In

div

idu

al o

r te

am w

ork

Co

mm

un

icat

ion

Pro

ject

man

agem

ent

and f

inan

ce

Lif

e-lo

ng

Lea

rnin

g

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

CLE401 IWTD 1 2 1 1




CLE402 Air and Noise Pollution L T P C


Pre-requisites --

Co-requisites --

COURSE OBJECTIVES

1.To understand the aspects of atmospheric pollution and its flow.

2.To know about the issues such as atmospheric composition, monitoring, acidic deposition, urban air quality

3.To understand the use and application of air quality models for the identification of plume flow.

COURSE OUTCOMES


1.The main chemical components and reactions occur in the atmosphere and examine the factors responsible for perturbing this.

2.The Implementation of the methods for monitoring and modeling spatial and temporal patterns of pollution

3.The air pollution issues at a range spatial scales and how these are relaxed.

4.The environmental impacts of atmospheric pollutants and assess their concentration.

CATALOG DESCRIPTION

Increased air and noise pollution is the common impact of industrialization lead to the several dangerous and untreatable impacts on human beings. Students learn about air pollutants, particulates and gaseous pollutants, effects of air pollution on human be-ings, elements of atmosphere and dispersion of pollutants, meteorological factors, principles and design of air pollution control measures, air quality monitoring, air pollution control measures, sources of noise pollution, environmental and industrial noise and effects of noise pollution.

TEXT BOOKS

1.M N Rao& H V N Rao (2007), Air Pollution, Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing Company, 26th reprint, New Delhi. ISBN: 0074518718

2.Noel De Nevers (2010), Air Pollution Control Engineering, 2nd Edition, Waveland Press, Inc., Long Grove, Illinois. ISBN: 978-1577666745

REFERENCE BOOKS

1.Singal, S.P. (2000), Noise Pollution and Control, First Edition, Narosa Publishing House, New Delhi.ISBN: 8173193630

2.Rao C.S. (2006) Environmental Pollution Control Engineering, 2nd edition, New Age International,New Delhi. ISBN: 9788122418354

3.William L.Heumann (1997), Industrial Air Pollution Control Systems, McGraw Hill Professional, New York.ISBN: 9780070314306

COURSE CONTENT

Unit I:Sources and Effects of Air Pollution 6 lecture hours

Classification of air pollutants – Particulates and gaseous pollutants – Sources of air pollution – Source inventory – Effects of air pollution on human beings, materials, vegetation, animals – global warming-ozone layer depletion, Sampling and Analysis – Basic Principles of Sampling – Source and ambient sampling – Analysis of pollutants – Principles.

Unit II: Transport of Air Pollution 6 lecture hours

Elements of atmosphere and dispersion of pollutants – Meteorological factors – Wind roses – Lapse rate - Atmospheric stability and turbulence – Plume rise – Dispersion of pollutions – Gaussian dispersion models – Applications

Unit III: Control of Air Pollution 9 lecture hours

Concepts of control – Principles and design of control measures – Particulates control by gravitational, centrifugal, filtration, scrubbing, electrostatic precipitation – Selection criteria for equipment, gaseous pollutant control by adsorption & absorption, condensation, combustion – Pollution control for specific major industries.

Unit IV:Air Quality Management 9 lecture hours

Air quality standards – Air quality monitoring – Air pollution control efforts – Zoning – Town planning regulation of new indus-tries – Legislation and enforcement – Environmental Impact Assessment – Methods.

Unit V: Noise Pollution & Control 9 lecture hours

Sound and Noise: Sources of noise pollution – environmental and industrial noise; effects of noise pollution- fundamentals of sound generation - propagation, sound measurement - sound level meters – types, components, Noise prevention & control mea-sures, environmental and industrial noise - noise control legislation.


Components

Theory

Internal

SEE

Marks 50 50

Total Marks 100




1 The main chemical components and reactions occur in the atmosphere and examine the factors 1

responsible for perturbing this.

2 The Implementation of the methods for monitoring and modeling spatial and temporal patterns of 3

pollution

3 The air pollution issues at a range spatial scales and how these are relaxed. 4

4 The environmental impacts of atmospheric pollutants and assess their concentration. 2, 7




En

gin

eeri

ng

Kn

ow

led

ge

Pro

ble

m a

nal

ysi

s

Des

ign

/dev

elo

pm

ent

of

solu

tio

ns

Co

nd

uct

in

ves

tig

atio

ns

of

com

ple

x p

rob

lem

s

Mo

der

n t

oo

l u

sag

e

Th

e en

gin

eer

and s

oci

ety

En

vir

on

men

t an

d s

ust

ain

abil

ity

Eth

ics

Ind

ivid

ual

or

team

wo

rk

Co

mm

un

icat

ion

Pro

ject

man

agem

ent

and

fin

ance

Lif

e-lo

ng

Lea

rnin

g

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

CLE402 Air and Noise Pollution 1 1 1 1 2

CLE403 Groundwater Engineering L T P C



Co-requisites --

COURSE OBJECTIVES

1.To educate on ground water movement analysis & predictions.

2.To understand the concept to increase ground water potential.

3.To identify the sources of the ground water.

COURSE OUTCOMES


1.Identify the ground water flow & prediction.

2.Implement the Methods of improving the ground water potential.

3.Manage the ground water sources.

CATALOG DESCRIPTION

This course covers fundamentals of subsurface flow and transport, emphasizing the role of groundwater in the hydrologic cycle, the relation of groundwater flow to geologic structure, and the management of contaminated groundwater. Introduction and definitions, groundwater storage and supply, Darcy’s Law and its limitation, Dupuit approximation, steady and unsteady flows in confined and unconfined aquifers, radial flow towards wells, storage coefficient and safe yield in a water-table aquifer, design of wells, methods of drilling and construction, development of maintenance of wells.

TEXT BOOKS

1. David Keith Todd (2005), Groundwater Hydrology, Third Edition, John Wiley & Sons Singapore. ISBN: 9780471059370.

REFERENCE BOOKS

1.Raghunath H.M. (2007), Groundwater, Third Edition, New Age International. ISBN: 9788122419047.

2.Abdel-Aziz ismailkashef (2008), Groundwater Engineering, McGraw-Hill International Editions, Newyork. ISBN: 9780071005333.

C

O

U

R

SE CONTENT

Unit I:Occurrence and Movement of Groundwater 10 lecture

hours

Introduction to Hydrologic cycle – Origin and Age of groundwater, classification of groundwater, aquifer - water table - Darcy’s Law, Coefficient of Transmissibility and storage - Flow rates and equation.

Unit II:Well Hydraulics 9 lecture

hours

Geophysical methods, study of radial flow - well flow, Multiple well system - characteristic well losses, open well, tube well, well depth, well screen - head losses through the screen gravel packing and formation stabilization.

Unit III:Analysis and Evaluation of Pumping Test 9 lecture

hours

Definition of terms - static water level, pumping level, drawdown – residual, drawdown pumping rate -automatic water level re-corder - time drawdown analysis - distance drawdown analysis, Jacob’s methods, pumping test methods.

Unit IV :Pollution of Groundwater 8 lecture hours

Injection methods-monitoring: - Cement lime, Lime-flyash and chemical stabilization, Deep mixing techniques.

Unit V:Groundwater Assessment and Budgeting 9 lecture hours

Hydrological equilibrium - rain gauge network, runoff procedure for conducting infiltration test – artificial recharge, rainwater harvesting – calculation of groundwater storage capacity and groundwater potential.

Mode of Evaluation: The subject understanding of students will be evaluated through CAT1, 2

& 3 and semester end examinations.

Components

Theory

Internal

SEE

Marks 50 50

Total Marks 100

391





1 Identify the ground water flow &

prediction. 1

2 Implement the Methods of improving the ground water

potential. 1,2

3 Manage the ground water sources. 2, 3

En

gin

eeri

ng

Kn

ow

led

ge

Pro

ble

m a

nal

ysi

s

Des

ign

/dev

elo

pm

ent

of

solu

tio

ns

Co

nd

uct

in

ves

tig

atio

nso

f co

mp

lex

pro

ble

ms

Mo

der

n t

oo

l u

sag

e

The

engin

eer

and s

oci

ety

E

nv

iro

nm

ent

and

su

stai

nab

ilit

y

Eth

ics

Ind

ivid

ual

or

team

wo

rk

Co

mm

un

icat

ion

Pro

ject

man

agem

ent

and f

inan

ce

Lif

e-lo

ng

Lea

rnin

g

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

CLE403 Ground water Engineering 1 2 1






Course Code: CLE403 Course Title: Ground Water Engineering





SECTION A

1.

(a) ‘The perched water table is false water table’. Justify the statement.

(b) The drawdown curve represents the water table in the vicinity of the pump.

Explainlogically.

(c)Groundwater is not pure form of water. Give logical reason.

(d)A well penetrated into a confined aquifer is a pressure well. State whether true or falls.

Explain logically.

(e)A screen must be provided at the end of well. Give reason.

1x5 = 5

2. (a) Draw a neat sketch of drawdown curve for a pumping well showing all components.

(b)Define specific yield. Give the relation between specific yield and specific retention.

2.5x2=5

SECTION B

3.

(a) Discuss in detail, the methods used for groundwater recharge.

(b)Discuss various geological factors that govern the occurrence of ground water.

2x10=20

SECTION C


4. Enumerate various geological formations related to groundwater engineering. 10

5. A well penetrates into an unconfined aquifer having a saturated depth of 100 m. The discharge

from the well is 250 litres/minute at 12 m drawdown. Assuming equilibrium flow condition and a

homogenous aquifer, estimate the discharge at 18 m drawdown. The distance from the well where

drawdown influences are not appreciable may be taken to be equal for both the cases.

10

6. Discuss various methods used for groundwater exploration. Write down their merits and demerits. 10

7. Define pumping test. Explain, in detail, the parameters that are studied during this test. 10

8. Enlist the factors that are responsible for polluting groundwater. Discuss the parameters used to

assess the pollution of ground water.

10

SECTION D

9. The Ministry of Water Resources Development has appointed you as Water Resources Engineer

for U. P. region. You are supposed to assess the water potential of state. Enlist various methods

15

and techniques to enhance ground water potential of the state.

10

Suppose you are hired by Punjab Irrigation Department. In few places the water requirement of

crop is not met by canal itself. As a water resources engineer you are required to maintain the

irrigation requirement of the state. Discuss the factors you should keep in mind while allowing

groundwater to be used for irrigation.

15

CLE404 River Engineering L T P C



Co-requisites --

COURSE OBJECTIVES

1.To teach about river and its behaviour.

2.To provide details of river restoration.

3.To educate student about natural channels and its design.

COURSE OUTCOMES


1.Classify rivers and flood plains

2.Understand the behaviour of river as well as restoration

3.Complete the analysis of flow and sediment data of a channel.

CATALOG DESCRIPTION

In this course, student will learn about the river and its classification, River Channel patterns, Straight river channels, Instability of rivers, Hydraulic geometry, Mechanics of Alluvial Rivers, Rivers and restoration structures, Channel Design Analysis, Time Series, and Analysis of flow, Sediment and channel geometry data, Classification of River Training, Types of training.

TEXT BOOKS

1. Howard H. Chang (2008), Fluvial Processes in River, Krieger Publishing Company, ISBN-9781575243023.

REFERENCE BOOKS

1.Margaret S. Petersen (1985) River Engineering, Prentice Hall. ISBN - 9780137813520.

2.P.Ph. Jansen, L. van Bendegom, J. van den Berg and M. de Vries (1994), Principles of River Engineering: The non-tidel alluvial river, VSSD publications, ISBN-9789065621467.

3.P. Y. Julien, (2002), River Mechanics, Cambridge University Press. ISBN - 9780521529709.

4.Richard D. Hey, C. R. Thorne, Malcolm D. Newson (1998), Applied Fluvial Geomorphology for River Engineering and Management, John Wiley & Sons, ISBN – 9780471969686.

5.David Stevenson (2012),The Principles and Practice of Canal and River Engineering, Cambridge University Press, ISBN 9781108057721.

COURSE CONTENT

Unit I:Introduction 6 lecture hours

Introduction, classification of Rivers, Mechanics of alluvial rivers including channel and flood plainfeatures, Sediment transport and budgets, River morphology and various classification schemes.

Unit II: Behavior of Rivers 6 lecture hours

Behavior of Rivers: Introduction, River Channel patterns, Straight river channels, causes, characteristics and shapes of meanders and control, cutoff, Braided Rivers, Bed forms, Instability of rivers, Hydraulic geometry, Delta formation and control.

Unit III: River Restoration 9 lecture hours

Mechanics of Alluvial Rivers, Rivers and restoration structures, Socio‐cultural influences and ethics of stream restoration.

Unit IV:Channel Design and analysis 9 lecture hours

Bio‐engineering Techniques, Classification review, Natural Channel Design Analysis, Time Series, and Analysis of flow, Sediment and channel geometry data.

Unit V: River Training and Protection Works 9 lecture hours

River Training and Protection Works: Introduction, Classification of River Training, Types of training.


Components

Theory

Internal

SEE

Marks 50 50

Total Marks 100





1 Classify rivers and flood plains. 1

2 Understand the behaviour of river as well as

restoration 3,5

3 Complete the analysis of flow and sediment data of a

channel. 2,3

En

gin

eeri

ng

Kn

ow

led

ge

Pro

ble

m a

nal

ysi

s

Des

ign

/dev

elo

pm

ent

of

solu

tio

ns

Co

nd

uct

in

ves

tig

atio

nso

f co

mp

lex

pro

ble

ms

Mo

der

n t

oo

l u

sag

e

Th

e en

gin

eer

and s

oci

ety

E

nv

iro

nm

ent

and

su

stai

nab

ilit

y

Eth

ics

Ind

ivid

ual

or

team

wo

rk

Co

mm

un

icat

ion

Pro

ject

man

agem

ent

and

fin

ance

Lif

e-lo

ng

Lea

rnin

g

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

CLE404 River Engineering 1 1 2 1






Course Code: CLE404 Course Title: River Engineering





SECTION A

1.

(a) Give logical reason for a river to have wavy shape (in plan).

(b) Guide banks are provided at a place where a hydraulic structure is constructed. Give reason.

(c)State whitch part of a river have most steady flow and why?

(d) Construction of levees is an efficient method for protection against flood. Explain logically.

(e)Delta is formed by a river before it joins the sea. Give reason.

1x5 = 5

2. (a) Define delta. Explain its formation with a neat sketch.

(b)Enlist commonly adopted methods of river training.

2.5x2=5

SECTION B

3.

(a) Give a detailed classification of rivers.

(b)Discuss types of sediment transport in rivers and the bed forms developed.

2x10=20

SECTION C


4. Discuss, in detail, the various protection works provided at u/s and d/s of a diversion work. Give

their specifications as per Indian standards.

10

5. Discuss the effect of river meandering. 10

6. Define river training. Discuss in detail, various methods used for this purpose. 10

7. Discuss, in detail, the stages of the development of a river. 10

8. Explain the factors that affect river morphology. 10

SECTION D

9. River Ganga is a perennial type of river that caries water throughout the year, but there is quite

fluctuation during peak monsoon and off monsoon seasons. You have been appointed as a

Disaster Mitigation Engineer for the middle zone of the Ganga river catchment (From Kanpur to

Patna). As a disaster manager, discuss various methods to control floods in order to make area

safe.

15

10 Suppose you are hired by Punjab Irrigation Department. As a civil engineer you are required to

maintain an existing irrigation system in the state. After inspection it was concluded that another

15

canal should be off taken from the river at some suitable location.

Discuss the procedure you will adopt and the river training works necessary.

CLE405 Open Channel Flow L T P C



Co-requisites --

COURSE OBJECTIVES

1.To educate on various types of flow in open channel.

2.To understand the concept of open channel flow.

3.To identify the various flow in channel.

COURSE OUTCOMES


1.Solve the engineering problems in case of open channel.

2.Calculate the flow parameters under different flow conditions.

3.Distinguish between various flows.


Topics include principles of open channel flow and its classification, Energy and momentum principles, Channel transition, The Chezy’s and Manning’s Formulas, Determination of Mannings coefficient. Computation of uniform flow, gradually varied flow: basic assumptions and theory of gradually varied flow, rapidly varied flow, Non-linear and Non-prismatic Flow: element of hydrau-lic jump, basic characteristics of jumps.

TEXT BOOKS

1. Subramanya, K. (2008) Flow in Open Channels, 3rd ed., Tata McGraw-Hill. ISBN – 9780070699663.

REFERENCE BOOKS

1.V.T.Chow (2009), Open Channel Hydraulics, Blackburn Press. 9781932846188.

2.Asawa, G.L., (2010), Fluid Flow in Pipes and Channels, CBS Publishers. ISBN – 9788123917238.

3.Chanson, H., (2004), The Hydraulics of Open Channel Flow: An Introduction, Elsevier Scientific. ISBN- 9780750659789.

4.M. HanifChaudhry (2007), Open Channel Flow, Springer, ISBN- 978-0387301747.

5.Henderson, F.M., (1966) Open Channel Flow, PHI, ISBN - 9780023535109.

C

O

U

R

S

E

C

ONTENT

Unit I:Introduction 7

lecturehours

Basic concepts of free surface flows, velocity and pressure distribution, Mass, energy and momentum principle for prismatic and non-prismatic channels, Review of Uniform flow: Standard equations, hydraulically efficient channel sections, compound sections, Energy-depth relations: Concept of specific energy, specific force, critical flow, critical depth, hydraulic exponents, and channel transitions.

Unit II: Gradually Varied Flow 10

lecture hours

Equation of gradually varied flow and its limitations, flow classification and surface profiles, Control sections, Computation meth-ods and analysis: Integration of varied flow equation by analytical, graphical and advanced numerical methods, Transitions of subcritical and supercritical flow, flow in curved channels.

Unit III: Rapidly Varied Flow 10 lecture hours

395

Characteristics of rapidly varied flow, Classical hydraulic jump, Evaluation of the jump elements in rectangular and non-rectangu-lar channels on horizontal and sloping beds, Hydraulic jump in gradually and suddenly expanding channels, submerged hydraulic jump, rolling and sky jump, use of jump as an energy dissipater, Flow measurement: by sharp crested and broad crested weirs, critical depth flumes, sluice gate, Free over fall.Rapidly varied unsteady flow: Equation of motion for unsteady flow, “Celerity” of the gravity wave, deep and shallow water waves, open channel positive and negative surge.

Unit IV:Spatially Varied Flow 9 lecture hours

Basic principles, Differential SVF equations for increasing and decreasing discharge, Classifications and solutions, Numerical meth-ods for profile computation, Flow over side-weir and Bottom-rack.

Unit V: Non-linear and Non-prismatic Flow 9 lecture hours

Flow in channel of non-linear alignment and non-prismatic channel sections, Design considerations for sub critical and super critical flows.


Components

Theory

Internal

SEE

Marks 50 50

Total Marks 100





1 Solve the engineering problems in case of open channel. 1,2

2 Calculate the flow parameters under different flow conditions. 2,3

3 Distinguish between various flows. 1

En

gin

eeri

ng

Kn

ow

led

ge

Pro

ble

m a

nal

ysi

s

Des

ign

/dev

elo

pm

ent

of

solu

tio

ns

Co

nd

uct

in

ves

tig

atio

nso

f co

mp

lex

pro

ble

ms

Mo

der

n t

oo

l u

sag

e

Th

e en

gin

eer

and s

oci

ety

E

nv

iro

nm

ent

and

su

stai

nab

ilit

y

Eth

ics

Ind

ivid

ual

or

team

wo

rk

Co

mm

un

icat

ion

Pro

ject

man

agem

ent

and

fin

ance

Lif

e-lo

ng

Lea

rnin

g

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

CLE405 Open Channel Flow 1 2 1






Course Code: CLE405 Course Title: Open Channel Flow





SECTION A

1.

(a) Enlist the flow measuring devices used in open channels.

(b)A spatially varied flow may be considered steady. Explain logically.

(c) A lined canal is prismatic. Write your comments.

(d) A control section in open channel is used as flow measuring section. Give reason

(e) Hydraulic jump is a rapidly varied flow. Give reason.

1x5 = 5

2. (a) Draw M1type of GVF profile for different open channel flow conditions.

(b)Define a control section. Enlist various control sections in open channels

2.5x2=5

SECTION B

3.

(a) Enumerate various types of flows in open channels. Support your answer with the help of

mathematical relations and neat sketches.

(b)A rectangular channel 7.5 m wide has a uniform flow depth of 2.0 m and has a bed slope of 1

in 2500. At the d/s end of the channel a weir is constructed that raises the water surface at a

section by 0.80 m. Determine the water surface slope at this section. Assume Manning’s n =

0.025

2x10=2

0

SECTION C


4. Enlist various methods applied to study water surface profiles in an open channel flow. Discuss

any one of them in detail.

10

5. A rectangular channel with a slope of 1 in 250carries a flow at of 55 cumec/m at a depth of 2.0

m.Mention the type of hydraulic jump form in the channel. Compute the parameters of the jump.

10

6. Discuss various types of water surface profiles in open channels. 10

7. State the assumptions made in the derivation of dynamic equation for steady gradually varied

flow in an open channel. Derive the equation in general and give its various forms.

10

8.

Discuss the application of specific energy and specific force curves in the design of hydraulic

channels.

10

SECTION D

9. As an engineer you need to compute the discharge in upper ganga canal passing through Jawan

(Aligarh). Discuss in detail the factors you should take while fixing the site for measuring

15

station. Also discuss the method that may be used.

10

Suppose you are hired by a hydropower company. As a civil engineer you are required to design

a conduit to take water from reservoir to the turbine. Enlist the various alternatives. Discuss each

with its merits and demerits. Discuss other related hydraulic structures required in each

alternative.

15

CLE406 Mass Transport Management L T P C



Co-requisites --

COURSE OBJECTIVES

1.To teach the concepts of MRTS and their importance, the accessories involved in MRTS.

2.To develop the students skills to have better understanding about the finance management, route surveys and evaluation.

COURSE OUTCOMES


1.Learn the basic principles of MRTS and their importance so as to apply perfectly in the Management issues.

2.Demonstrate the ability to understand the accessories required for MRTS, bus terminals and the organization and opera-tion.

3.Understand the principles and implement new methods in financing, revenues and have good public relations.

4.Prepare route surveys and planning, schedules and evaluate a system with the acquired knowledge.


It is important to know the basics of MRTS. Here we have to study about the organizational structures, financing-budgeting, route surveys and accessories for MRTS.

TEXT BOOKS

1.Glaister.S., (1995), Fundamentals of Transport economics, BasiclBalckwell, Oxford, ISBN-9780312311520.

2.Khisty.C.J., and Lall.B.K., (2003) “Transportation Engineering”, Indian Edition, Prentice-Hall of India , ISBN-9788120322127.

REFERENCE BOOKS

1.Stubbs.P.C. et al., (1984), Transport Economics, Allen and Ulbwin, Boston, ISBN-9780043381212.

C

O

U

R

S

E

C

O

NTENT

Unit I: Importance of MRTS 10 lecture hours

Structures of urban areas – provision of transport facilities – different mass transportation systems – basic management issues.

Unit II: Organizational Structures 6 lecture hours

Organizational structures – management by objectives – delegation of powers – man power planning.

Unit III: Financing-Budgeting 9 lecture hours

Methods of financing – budgeting and recounting – fare structures – replacement programmes, fare collected system – revenue leakage and prevention. Incentives – public relations.

Unit IV:Route Surveys 10 lecture hours

Route surveys and planning – preparation of schedules and duty roasters – travel time accident studies.

Unit V: Accessories for MRTS 10 lecture hours

9

System evaluation measures – utility designs – depot locations – bus terminals – organisation and operation – store inventories.


Components

Theory

Internal

SEE

Marks 50 50

Total Marks 100




Outcomes

1 Learn the basic principles of MRTS and their importance so as to apply perfectly in the

Manage- 1

ment issues.

2 Demonstrate the ability to understand the accessories required for MRTS, bus terminals and the 1

organization and operation.

3 Understand the principles and implement new methods in financing, revenues and have good

pub- 11

lic relations.

4 Prepare route surveys and planning, schedules and evaluate a system with the acquired

knowledge. 6

En

gin

eeri

ng K

no

wle

dg

e

Pro

ble

m a

nal

ysi

s

Des

ign

/dev

elo

pm

ent

of

solu

tio

ns

Co

nd

uct

in

ves

tig

atio

nso

f co

mp

lex

pro

ble

ms

Mo

der

n t

oo

l u

sag

e

Th

e en

gin

eer

and s

oci

ety

En

vir

on

men

t an

d s

ust

ain

abil

ity

Eth

ics

In

div

idu

al o

r te

am w

ork

Co

mm

un

icat

ion

Pro

ject

man

agem

ent

and

fin

ance

Lif

e-lo

ng

Lea

rnin

g

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

CLE406 Mass Transport Management 1 1 2






Course Code: CLE406 Course Title: Mass Transport Management





SECTION A

1.

Fill in the blanks/ mark True or False

(a)Bus Rapid Transit system is more suitable in mixed traffic (T/F). Justify your comment.

(b)Nearest Neighbor Procedure (NNP) method based on the cost or distance of traveling from

the last-visited node to the closest node in the network (T/F). Justify your answer with suitable

reasons.

(c)Mass Rapid Transit system is most suitable for Delhi traffic condition (T/F). Justify your

comment.

(d)Revenue leakage’ occurs when a service is delivered but not billed yielding into non-

collection of payments for the services not billed. (T/F). Justify your answer with suitable

reasons.

(e) Give some practical examples used in Delhi for Automated Fare collection system.

1x5 = 5

2. Define the following terms

(a) Bus Rapid Transit system

(b)Mass Rapid Transit system

2.5x2=5

SECTION B

3.

(a)Explain the different types of operation involves in mass transportation system and

management.

(b) Differentiate betweenMRT vs. BRT. Which System makes sense for developing cities?

2x10=20

SECTION C


4. Enlist the various type of Accessories required for the construction and management of MRTS. 10

5. Two vehicles travelling in the same lane have masses 3000 kg and 2500 kg. The velocity of rear

vehicles after striking the leader vehicle is 25 kmph and the velocity of leader vehicle is 56

kmph. The coefficient of restitution of the two vehicle system is assumed to be 0.6. Determine

the pre-collision speed of the two vehicles.

10

6. Enlist various types of mass transportation systems available in India with suitable examples. 10

7. Write down the role of the of the traffic engineer in accident study.

10

8. The Motor vehicle consumption in a city is 5.082 million liters; there were 3114 motor vehicle 10

fatalities, 355,799 motor vehicle injuries, 6,721,049 motor vehicle registrations and an estimated

population of 18,190,238. Kilometer of travel per liter of fuel is 12.42 km/liter. Calculate

registration death rate, population death rate and accident rate per vehicle km.

SECTION D

9. Suppose you are appointed as highway engineer in Central Public Work Department (CPWD)

and you have to plan a mass rapid transport system for New Delhi. What are the provision to

provide a MRT system would you consider to design a suitable well managed system. Explain

the pros and cons of choosing a MRT system for Delhi traffic condition.

15

10

You have been appointed as a traffic engineer to study the problem of increasing number of

accidents on the National Highway 2 between Delhi to Agra. What are the traffic and accidental

data would you consider to identifying the basic causes of accidents and suggest means to

overcome the deficiencies that lead to such accidents.

15

CLE407 Operation and Management of Irrigation and Drainage Systems L T P C



Co-requisites --

COURSE OBJECTIVES

1.To help the students to understand the principles and operations of various methods of water management in irrigation system.

2.To teach students about the principles of water logging and water shed management.

3.To teach importance of the reservoir planning, water laws, operational strategies and farmer’s role in operation

and man-agement of irrigation systems.

COURSE OUTCOMES


1.Develop the skills to compute the irrigation demand and suggest proper methods of meeting the demand from available supply.

2.Demonstrate the conjunctive use of surface and ground water by selecting proper irrigation system with its optimal oper-ating strategy.

3.Develop skills for managing water logged areas and proper utilization of water available in water shed.

4.Learn to suggest or design proper water conveying systems, scheduling of water releases to command area from impound-ed reservoir etc.

5.Develop skill in reservoir planning and its optimal operational strategy with farmer’s participation in line with existing water laws.


In this course, following topic will be discussed: Irrigation and drainage issues; water management schemes; conjunctive use of water; deficit irrigation; water table management; water delivery control systems; water logging and salinity control; irrigation and drainage systems operation and maintenance; land improvement and reclamation; performance indicators and evaluation; water conflicts resolution; socio-economic, institutional and environmental aspects; cost/benefit analysis.

TEXT BOOKS

1. A. M. Michael. (2007), Irrigation: Theory and Practice 2nd ed., Vikas Publication House. ISBN-9788125918677.

R

E

F

E

R

ENCE BOOKS

1. S.K. Garg (2011), Irrigation Engineering and Hydraulic Structures, Khanna Publishers. ISBN-

9788174090478 2. H.M. Raghunath (2011), Irrigation Engineering. Wiley Publications. ISBN - 9788126528813. 3. M. Michael. (2007), Irrigation: Theory and Practice 2nd ed., Vikas Publication House. ISBN-

9788125918677. 4. P. N. Modi (2008), Irrigation Water Resources and Water Power Engineering 7th Ed.

Standard Book House. ISBN-9788189401290.

COURSE CONTENT

Unit I:Irrigation System Requirements 10 lecture hours

Irrigation System Requirements: Irrigation system requirements – gravity and lift irrigation – supply and demand of water – crop-ping pattern – estimation of total and peak crop water requirements – effective and dependable rainfall – allowable deficits – ir-rigation efficiency.

Unit II: Irrigation Scheduling 8 lecture hours

399

Irrigation Scheduling: Frequency of irrigation – methods of scheduling irrigation – developing typical schedules – case studies – water conveyance systems – water measurements.

Unit III: Drainage Area 8 lecture hours

Drainage Systems- Filtration Area and Filtration Flow – Calculating Schemes. Filtration Area Characteristics, Types of Drainages. Protection of the Agricultural Land from external Superfluous Subsurface Water.

Unit IV:Drainage Systems 9 lecture hours

Drainage Systems-Protection of the Agricultural Land From Internal Superfluous Subsurface Water, Closed Tube Systematic Drainage – Main Parameters. Regulating and Transfer Networks.Construction of the Drainage.Typical Structures, Tube Systematic Drainage – Main Parameters.Regulating and Transfer Networks.

Unit V: Operation and Management of Irrigation Systems 10 lecture hours

Operation: Operational plans – main canals, laterals and field channels – water control and regulating structures – physical and administrative control – water law. Farmers involvement: Farmers role in system operation – farmers committee for water distribu-tion, On-farm management and maintenance of the irrigation system – Government – farmer partnership in irrigation.


Components

Theory

Internal

SEE

Marks 50 50

Total Marks 100




1 Develop the skills to compute the irrigation demand and suggest proper methods of meeting the 2

demand from available supply.

2 Demonstrate the conjunctive use of surface and ground water by selecting proper irrigation system 6

with its optimal operating strategy.

3 Develop skills for managing water logged areas and proper utilization of water available in water shed. 6, 7

4 Learn to suggest or design proper water conveying systems, scheduling of water releases to command 2, 3

area from impounded reservoir etc.

5 Develop skill in reservoir planning and its optimal operational strategy with farmer’s participation in 11

line with existing water laws.

En

gin

eeri

ng

Kn

ow

led

ge

Pro

ble

m a

nal

ysi

s

Des

ign

/dev

elo

pm

ent

of

solu

tio

ns

Co

nd

uct

in

ves

tig

atio

nso

f co

mp

lex

pro

ble

ms

Mo

der

n t

oo

l u

sag

e

Th

e en

gin

eer

and s

oci

ety

En

vir

on

men

t an

d s

ust

ain

abil

ity

Eth

ics

Ind

ivid

ual

or

team

wo

rk

Co

mm

un

icat

ion

Pro

ject

man

agem

ent

and f

inan

ce

Lif

e-lo

ng

Lea

rnin

g

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

CLE407 OMIDS 2 1 2 1 1






Course Code: CLE407 Course Title: Operation and Management of Irrigation & Drainage Systems





SECTION A

1.

(a) The unit of any Liquid isLitre but generally in irrigation practices we use mm as irrigation

water unit. Why?

(b) Cropping period is always more than base period. Why?

(c)Water logging and ponding are taken as synonymous but are different. How?

(d)Drip irrigation can be considered as surface and subsurface irrigation both. Justify the

statement?

(e) Irrigation can be used as leaching medium. Justify?

1x5 = 5

2. (a) Define irrigation and explain its necessity in India.

(b) Discuss various types of irrigation system.

2.5x2=5

SECTION B

3.

(a) Define duty and explain in detail the various factors affecting duty. How can duty be

improved? Explain.

(b) Define Land Reclamation and briefly explain the Land Reclamation Process?

2x10=20

SECTION C


4. The left canal of a tank irrigation scheme carries a discharge of 10 cumecs and has a culturable

commanded area of 800 hectares. The intensity of Rabi crop is 70% and the base period is 110

days. The right canal of this scheme carries a discharge of 24 cumecs and has a culturable

commanded area of 15000 hectares. The intensity of Rabi crop is 80%and the base period is 110

days. Compare the efficiency of two canal system.

10

5. Briefly discuss the various methods of tile drainage system and explain the term "Leaching

Ratio (LR)".

10

6. Define drainage coefficient and Explain the surface drain design criteria? 10

7. Describe the ill effects of water logging and anti-measures of water logging? 10

8.

Wheat is to be grown in field having a field capacity equal to 27% and the permanent wilting

point is 13%. Find the storage capacity in 80 cm depth of soil, with the dry unit weight of the

soil is 1.5 gm/cc. if the irrigation water is to be supplied when the average soil moisture false

to18%, find the water depth required to be supplied to the field if the field application efficiency

is 80%. What is the amount of water needed at the canal outlet if the water lost in the water

course and the field channel is 15% of the outlet discharge.

10

SECTION D

9. A stream of 135 l/sec was diverted from a canal and 100 l/sec were delivered to the field. The

effective depth of root zone was 1.8 m. The runoff loss in the field was 432 m3. The depth of

water penetration varies linearly from 1.8 m at the end of the field to 1.2 m at the tail end.

Available moisture holding capacity of the soil is 20 cm/m depth of soil. Determine

(i) the water conveyance efficiency

(ii) Water application efficiency

(iii) Water storage efficiency and

(iv) Water distribution efficiency.

Irrigation was started at moisture extraction level of 50% of the available moisture.

15

10.

A certain crop is grown in an area of 3000 hectares which is fed by a canal system. The data

pertaining to irrigation are as follows.

Field capacity of soil =26%

Optimum moisture =12%

Permanent wilting point =10%

Effective depth of root zone =80cm

Relative density of the soil =1.4

If the frequency of irrigation is 10 days and the overall efficiency is 23% , find

(i)the daily consumptive use

(ii) the water under discharge in m3/sec, required in the canal feeding the area.

15

COURSE OBJECTIVES

CLE408 Water Resources System Engineering L T P C



Co-requisites --

1.To provide information about need of water resources engineering in India and teach basic concepts of surface and ground water hydrology and irrigation aspects.

2.To teach various optimization techniques.

3.To provide information about water resources engineering structures.

COURSE OUTCOMES


1.Understand the components of planning and management in water resources.

2.Use various optimization methods.

3.Use linear and dynamic programming of water resource problems.

CATALOG DESCRIPTION

The course introduces the concepts of systems techniques in water resources planning and management.Introduction, System Components, Planning and management, Modeling of water resources systems, Constrained and unconstrained optimization, Linear programming, Dynamic programming with applications to water allocation, capacity expansion, Multi - objective optimiza-tion, Review of probability theory, Uncertainty and reliability analysis, Stochastic optimization - Chance constrained LP, Stochastic DP with applications, Surface water quality control;Simulation - Reliability, Resiliency and Vulnerability of water resource systems.

TEXT BOOKS

1.Jain S.K. and Singh V.P., (2003) ‘Water Resources Systems Planning and Management’, Elsevier, The Netherlands. ISBN – 9780444514295.

2.Hamdy A. Taha(2006). Operations Research: An Introduction, Prentice Hall, ISBN- 9780131889231.

REFERENCE BOOKS

1.Loucks D.P, Stedinger J.R and Haith D.A, (1981) ‘Water Resources Systems Planning and Analysis’, Prentice Hall, USA, 1981. ISBN – 9780139459238.

2.Mays L.W and Tung Y-K, (2002) ‘Hydrosystems Engineering and Management’, Water Resources Pubns, 1992. ISBN – 9781887201322.

COURSE CONTENT

Unit I: Introduction and Basic Concepts 8 lecture hours

Introduction, System Components, Planning and management, Concept of a system, Advantages and limitations of systems ap-proach, Modeling of Water Resources Systems, Simulation and optimization, Economics in water resources, Challenges in water sector.

Unit II: Introduction to Optimization 8 lecture hours

Objective function, Maxima, minima and saddle points, convex and concave functions, Constrained and unconstrained optimiza-tion using calculus, Lagrange multipliers, Kuhn-Tucker conditions.

Unit III: Linear & Dynamic Programming and Applications 10 lecture hours

General form of LP, Standard and Canonical forms of LP, Elementary transformations, Graphical method, Feasible and infeasible solutions, Simplex method, Dual and sensitivity analysis, LP problem formulation, Reservoir sizing and Reservoir operation using LP, Introduction, multistage decision problem, Recursive Equations, Principle of optimality, Discrete DP, Curse of Dimensionality, Water allocation problem.

Unit IV:Multi-objective & Stochastic Optimization 9 lecture hours

Position, Velocity and Acceleration – Rectilinear motion – Curvilinear motion of a particle – Tangential and Normal components

– Radial and Transverse components – Rotation of rigid bodies about a fixed axis – General plane motion – Absolute and relative motion method – Instantaneous centre of rotation in plane motion. Linear momentum – Equation of motion – Angular momen-tum of a particle and rigid body in plane motion – D’Alembert’s principle.

Unit V: Simulation 10 lecture hours

Principle of work and energy for a particle and a rigid body in plane motion – Conservation of energy - Principle of impulse and momentum for a particle and a rigid bodies in plane motion – Conservation of momentum – System of rigid bodies – Impact - direct and central impact – coefficient of restitution.


Components

Theory

Internal

SEE

Marks 50 50

Total Marks 100





1 Understand the components of planning and management in water resources. 6

2 Use various optimization

methods. 1

3 Use linear and dynamic programming of water resource problems. 1,2

En

gin

eeri

ng

Kn

ow

led

ge

Pro

ble

m a

nal

ysi

s

Des

ign

/dev

elo

pm

ent

of

solu

tio

ns

Co

nd

uct

in

ves

tig

atio

nso

f co

mp

lex

pro

ble

ms

Mo

der

n t

oo

l u

sag

e

Th

e e

ng

inee

r an

d s

oci

ety

En

vir

on

men

t an

d s

ust

ain

abil

ity

Eth

ics

Ind

ivid

ual

or

team

wo

rk

Co

mm

un

icat

ion

Pro

ject

man

agem

ent

and f

inan

ce

Lif

e-lo

ng

Lea

rnin

g

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

CLE408

Water Resources System

Engineering 1 2 1






Course Code: CLE408 Course Title: Water Resources Systems Engineering





SECTION A

1. a)Dutyof an irrigated field is ------ per unit discharge.

b) The unit of specific yield of an aquifer is ------.

c) The master depletion curve is used for------.

d) Isochrone is contour lines of equal -----.

e) The common example of acuicludeaquifer is -----.

1x5=5

2. (a) Derive the relationship

Δ = 8.64× B/D.

(b) Define surface tension and capillarity, then explain the capillary rise for mercury and water.

2.5x2=5

SECTION B

3.

(a)What do you understand by balancing depth? Draw the sketch of it and derive the

relationship between side slopes in cutting, embankment and depth of flow.

(b) Design a concrete lined channel to carry a discharge of 20 cumecs at a slope of 1 in 10000.

The side slopes of the channel are 1.25:1 and Manning’s N may be taken as 0.014.

2x10=20

SECTION C


4. With the help of a neat sketch explain infiltration gallery. Then, Explain permeability and

transmissibility.

10

5. Explain briefly the different types and forms of precipitation? 10

6. Discuss various methods of irrigation and state the advantages of each method. 10

7. Define and explain the following terms as used in relation to water requirement of crops. (i)

Base period and cropping period, (ii) Intensity of irrigation and (iii) Cash crops (iv) Permanent

Wilting Point, (v) Saturation Capacity of soil.

10

8.

In a certain area paddy crop requires 14 cm of depth of water at an interval of 10 days for a base

period of 110 days; Whereas wheat crop requires 9.0 cm of depth of water after 35 days with a

base period of 140 days. Determine the delta of paddy crop and duty of wheat crop of that area.

10

SECTION D

9. As a water resource engineer, you have been provided an ordinate of a 3 hr. Unit Hydrograph

(UH). Find the ordinates of a 6 hr. UH for the same basin. Also sketch this UH and explain that

15

how you can utilize this UH on a different area, mentioning various suitable conditions.

Time in hour: 0 3 6 9 12 15 18 21 24 27 30

Ordinates in m3/sec: 0 10 25 20 16 12 9 7 5 3 0

10 As a watershed development engineer you are provided details of a catchment. A 4 hour rain of

average intensity 1.2 cm/hr falls over a fern leaf type catchment. The time of concentration from

the lives AA, BB, CC and DD are 1, 2, 3 and 4 hour respectively to the site, O where the

discharge measurements are made. Values of coefficient of runoff are 0.5, 0.6 and 0.7 for the

1st, 2nd and 3rd hours of rainfall and attain a constant value of 0.8 after 3 hours. The area

represented by the isochrones AA, BB, CC and DD are 20ha, 30ha, 50ha and 40ha respectively

and shown in figure. Determine the discharge at site O during different time periods using

rational method.

15

CLE409 Soil Dynamics and Machine Foundation L T P C



Co-requisites --

COURSE OBJECTIVES

1.To understand the fundamentals of soil dynamics.

2.To know the behavior of the machine foundations and its design.

3.To design foundations so as to mitigate the effect of seismic activities.

COURSE OUTCOMES


1.Solve geotechnical earthquake engineering problems.

2.Identify the pattern of wave propagation, attenuation of seismic waves.

3.Study the parameters of the soil under dynamic conditions

4.Design vibration isolation.


Soil dynamics clearly say that the soil is subjected to dynamic force so the wave propagation is important consideration in the soil media. Therefore it has been necessary to understand the dynamic properties of soil and its parameters. Types of vibrational motion have also been discussed.

The main used of the dynamic motion in the soil is used for the machine foundation. So design procedure and dissipation of energy by vibrational isolation has to be studied in this section.

TEXT BOOKS

1.Swami Saran (2010), Soil Dynamics and Machine Foundations 2nd edition, Galgotia Publications Pvt Ltd. ISBN: 978-81-751-5441-4.

REFERENCE BOOKS

1.Prasad (2011) Advanced Soil Dynamics and Earthquake Engineering, Prentice Hall, New Delhi. ISBN: 978-81-203-2670-5.

2.Srinivasulu.P. &Vaidyanathan.C. (1998), Hand book on Machine Foundations, McGraw Hill Publications. ISBN: 978-00-709-6611-6.

3.M. Das (2010), Principles of Soil Dynamics 2nd Edition, Cengage Learning Canada. ISBN: 978-04-954-1135-2.

4.IS Code Provisions I.S.2974, 1987 Part I to IV – Practice of Design and Construction of Machine Foundations.

COURSE CONTENT

Unit I: Types of Vibratory Motion 7 lecture hours

Vibratory motion-terminology- Single degree freedom system -Free and Forced vibrations with and without damping; Transient response of single degree freedom system.

Unit II: Wave Propagation in Soil media 7 lecture hours

Wave propagation in an elastic homogeneous isotropic medium - Rayleigh, Shear and compression waves - waves in elastic half space and its equation.

Unit III: Dynamic Properties of Soils 9 lecture hours

Coefficient of elastic, uniform and non-uniform compression and shear - effect of vibration on the dissipative properties of soils - determination of dynamic properties of soil – Codal provisions.

Unit IV:Design Procedures of Machine Foundations 9 lecture hours

Dynamic loads - simple design procedures for foundations under reciprocating machines – machines producing impact loads - ro-tary type machines- Codal provision.

Unit V: Vibration Isolation 9 lecture hours

Vibration Isolation Technique; Mechanical isolation - Foundation Isolation - isolation by location – isolation by barriers - active and passive isolation tests.


Components

Theory

Internal

SEE

Marks 50 50

Total Marks 100


Mapping between COs and

POs


Outcomes

1

Solve geotechnical earthquake engineering

problems. 2

2 Identify the pattern of wave propagation, attenuation of seismic waves. 3

3 Study the parameters of the soil under dynamic conditions 1

4 Design vibration isolation. 3

En

gin

eeri

ng

Kn

ow

led

ge

Pro

ble

m a

nal

ysi

s

Des

ign

/dev

elo

pm

ent

of

solu

tio

ns

Co

nd

uct

in

ves

tig

atio

nso

f co

mp

lex

pro

ble

ms

Mo

der

n t

oo

l u

sag

e

E

nv

iro

nm

ent

and

su

stai

nab

ilit

y

Eth

ics

Ind

ivid

ual

or

team

wo

rk

Co

mm

un

icat

ion

Pro

ject

man

agem

ent

and f

inan

ce

Lif

e-lo

ng

Lea

rnin

g

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

CLE409 Soil Dynamics and Machine Foundation 1 1 2



Course Code: CLE409Course Title:Soil Dynamics and Machine Foundation





SECTION A

1.

(a) Is any un-damped system exit?

(b) Are waves get amplified in Soil? Justify your answer.

(c)Distinguish between Rayleigh waves and Love waves.

(d) How can you differentiate dynamic and live load?

(e) How active isolation differ from passive isolation?

1x5 = 5

2. (a) List the name of tests which generally used to determine dynamic properties of soil.

(b) Write a short note on damping.

2.5x2=5

SECTION B

3.

(a) Derive an expression for the wave propagation velocity of a longitudinal wave in an

unconstrained elastic rod with Young’s modulus, E, Poisson’s ratio , and density ρ.

Neglect the effects of radial displacements.

(b) Discuss the degrees of freedom of rigid block foundation and explain the salient points in

‘linear elastic weightless method’ and ‘elastic half-space method’ of analysis of rigid block

foundation.

2x10=20

SECTION C


4. Write a note on Free Vibrations and Forced Vibrations. Starting from fundamentals, discuss the

equations of motion for over damped, critically damped and under damped systems.

10

5. What do you understand about wave propagation in elastic half space? Discuss the

characteristics of body waves and surface waves with neat sketches.

10

6. Define coefficient of elastic uniform compression. Explain how it is determined from the block

resonance test.

10

7. The following particulars give the data for design of a foundation for impact machine. Weight of

ram = 16.5 kN, height of fall of ram = 0.7 m, weight of anvil and frame (without ram) = 350 kN,

efficiency of drop, η = 0.80, coefficient of restitution, e = 0.6, steam pressure,ps= 800 kN/m2,

area of piston, Ap = 0.15 m2,limiting frequency of anvil Wna = 230 rad/s, limiting natural

frequencies of the combined system, Wn1 = 280 rad/s, Wn2 = 80 rad/s, coefficient of rigidity of

pad, k2 = 25 x 105 kN/m and anvil base area, A2 = 3 m2. Estimate the following: (i) velocity of

10

the dropping parts, (ii) velocity of the anvil motion, (iii) amplitude of vibration of the

foundation, (iv) amplitude of vibration of the anvil and (v) the dynamic stress in the elastic pad.

8.

In Ghaziabad, there are many buildings which face continuous vibrations due to busy railway

track. What are the measures you will suggest for different storey building?

10

SECTION D

9.

A cyclic plate load test was carried out on a soil deposit to estimate the elastic coefficients for

the design of a compressor foundation. The test was carried out at a depth of 3m using a 0.6m x

0.60m test plate. For the data given below, plot the stress versus elastic settlement relationship

and determine the coefficient of elastic uniform compression at (i) 0.6m x 0.6m plate area and

(ii) 10m2 footing area. Take

Poisson’s ratio = 0.35 and unit weight of soil = 18 kN/m3.

Stress in kN/m2 50 100 150 200 250 300 350

Elastic Settlement in mm 0.05 0.28 0.52 0.8 1.06 1.34 1.6

15

10

If you had checked the foundation of the generator installed in the campus whose dimensions are

1.5m x0.75m x0.7 m by by vibration test and found a resonance frequency of 20 Hz in the

vertical direction. The mass of the oscillator used was 100 kg. The mass density of the test block

material is 2400 kg/m3. Using Barkan’s approach determine the coefficient of uniform

compression

15

CLE230 Hydraulics and Hydraulic Machines L T P C



Co-requisites --

COURSE OBJECTIVES

1.To understand the working principles of hydraulic machinery

2.To know the design of used for supplying water and generating power and also various structures designed for storage and for the development of irrigation system.

3.To know the irrigation systems and its applications

COURSE OUTCOMES


1.Identify the pump required for different purposes.

2.Classify the turbines and explain design criteria based on water availability

3.Design the head work and escape in an irrigation system

4.Design the drops and outlet for the cannel system

CATALOG DESCRIPTION

Hydraulics and Hydraulic Machines is an essential part of civil engineering. Following topics are discussed in this curriculum: Introduction to impact of jets, type of pump and turbines, characteristic curves and specific speed of pumps and turbines, indicator diagram, design of weir and canal regulator, dams, reservoirs, spillways and hydropower structures.

TEXT BOOKS

1. S.K. Garg (1997), Irrigation Engineering & Hydraulic Structures”, Khanna Publishers. ISBN-9788174090478

REFERENCE BOOKS

1.V.T.Chow (1996), Open Channel Hydraulics, McGraw Hill Publishing Company. ISBN-9781932846188

2.P. N. Modi and S. M. Seth (2011), Hydraulics and Fluid Mechanics including Hydraulic Machines, Standard Publications. ISBN- 9788189401269.

3.R. K. Bansal (2010), A Textbook of Fluid Mechanics and Hydraulic Machines 9th Edition Laxmi Publication, ISBN-9788131808153

COURSE CONTENT

Unit I: Impact of Jet on Vanes and Pumps 9 lecture hours

Impact of Jet on flat and curved vanes – Pumps-Types, Centrifugal Pump-Velocity triangle, characteristic curves, specific speed, applications, Reciprocating pump – Types – Indicator diagram-Acceleration and friction, air vessels.

Unit II: Turbines 10 lecture hours

Classification - Pelton Turbine, Francis Turbine, Kaplan Turbine-Velocity Triangle, Characteristic Curves-Specific Speed -Govern-ing of Turbines.

Unit III: Irrigation Structures 10 lecture hours

Diversion headwork – components – weir– Design of vertical drop weirs – Bligh’s theory – Khosla’s theory, Divide wall, fish ladder – Design criteria, U/s & D/s protection works. Types of canals, Head regulators – cross regulator - canal falls – canal transitions – cross drainage works, Evacuation & flood proofing– sediment control and silt exclusion devices.

Unit IV: Dams and Reservoirs 7 lecture hours

Reservoir yield- storage capacity, Strategies & operation, Sedimentation- causes, effect & control measures. Dams, factors govern-ing their selection-Classification, Elementary design of gravity dam - Earthern dam, arch dams- spill ways, energy dissipators, spill way gates – Important Dams in India

Unit V: Hydropower Structures 9 lecture hours

Components – penstock - pumping storage – pipe line engineering – cavitations – water hammer – remedies.


Components Theory

Internal SEE

Marks 50 50

Total Marks 100

0




1 Identify the pump required for different purposes. 1

2 Classify the turbines and explain design criteria based on water

availability. 1, 2, 3, 6, 7

3 Design the head work and escape in an irrigation

system. 2, 3

4 Design the drops and outlet for the cannel system 2, 3

En

gin

eeri

ng

Kn

ow

led

ge

Pro

ble

m a

nal

ysi

s

Des

ign

/dev

elo

pm

ent

of

solu

tio

ns

Co

ndu

ct i

nv

esti

gat

ion

s o

f co

mp

lex

pro

ble

ms

Mo

der

n t

oo

l u

sag

e

Th

e en

gin

eer

and s

oci

ety

En

vir

on

men

t an

d s

ust

ain

abil

ity

Eth

ics

Ind

ivid

ual

or

team

wo

rk

Co

mm

un

icat

ion

Pro

ject

man

agem

ent

and

fin

ance

Lif

e-lo

ng

Lea

rnin

g

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

CLE230 Hydraulics and Hydraulic Machines 2 2 3 3 2





Name:

Admission No:

Batch No:

1.

(i) Bligh’s theory for the analysis seepage flow is used for small works. Give reason.

(j) The bed level of the off taking canal is kept higher than the bed of the river. Justify

the statement.

(k) A reciprocating pump is suitable for high head and low discharge, why?

(l) The downstream sheet pile provided below an impervious floor of a hydraulic

structure is deeper than upstream one. Justify its reason.

(m) Reaction turbines are provided with draft tube. Explain in brief.

1x5 = 5

2. (n) Explain in brief the working principle of a centrifugal pump.

(o) Enlist the components of a reaction turbine.

2.5x2=5

SECTION B

3.

e. Define a pump. Explain in detail, the various types of positive displacement pump. f. Enumerate the factors that govern the site selection for a reservoir.

2x10=20

SECTION C


4. Differentiate between Bligh’s and Khosla’s theory for the design of impervious floor.

10

5. Define a dam. Give a detailed classification of dam. 10

6. Enlist the various types of canals. Enumerate the hydraulic structures 10

7. A turbine with an overall efficiency of 75% is to be installed in a hydropower plant. The head and discharge available at the plant are 155m and 25m3/s respectively. If the specific speed of the turbine is 130, determine unit quantities for the turbine.

10

8.

Determine the rate of flow of water through a penstock of diameter 2.5 m and length 110 m when one end of the pipe is connected to a reservoir and other end is open to atmosphere. The pipe is horizontal and the height of water in the reservoir is 157 m from the centre of the pipe. Consider all minor losses also and take coefficient of friction in the pipe, f=0.009.

10

SECTION D

9. Define the main components of an impulse turbine. Derive a relation for the hydraulic efficiency of a Pelton turbine. Show that the maximum efficiency occurs at speed ratio, U/V1 = 0.5, where U is the velocity of Pelton wheel and V1 is the absolute velocity of jet.

15

10. Following figure shows the longitudinal section of a weir constructed on sand over a North Indian River. For the hydraulic structure calculate:

(a) Average hydraulic gradient (b) Uplift pressure at points A, B and C

Compute the thickness of the floor required to be provided at these points

15

CLE491 Technical Proficiency in Civil

Engineering -III L T P C


Pre-requisites All civil engineering courses till VI Semester

Co-requisites --

COURSE OBJECTIVES

1. To enhance technical competency of graduating students in concrete technology and

designing steel structures

2. To reinforce their learning in air and noise pollution, and control systems.

3. To enhance their learning of green building, designing norms and practices.

4. To inculcate holistic approaches adopted in civil engineering practices

5. To make them proficient in using software for effective planning and designing civil

engineering systems.

6.To strengthen technical skills of graduating students for higher success in interview and

employability.

7. To make graduates most competent in their profession.

COURSE OUTCOMES


1. Apply knowledge of computing, science and mathematics, and engineering theory in the modelling, design and solving

to real world problems.

2. Adopt holistic approaches and emerging concepts in solving real life civil engineering problems.

3. Employ modern planning and designing techniques, practices, computing tools and software for solving engineering problems.

4. Design complex civil engineering structures, green buildings and systems.

5. Establish themselves in engineering profession as competent and leading professionals.


The technical course is designed to build the competency of graduating civil engineering students in

concrete technology, mix design, designing of steel structures and components, controlling the air and noise

pollutions, concepts of hydraulics.

The course also aims to make them proficient enough in adopting the holistic approaches and emerging

concepts in designing structures and civil engineering systems. Additionally, it offers offer the breadth of

education and depth of training necessarY for attaining successes in corporate sectors and leadership in the

profession.

TEXT BOOKS

1. Shetty, M.S. (2010), Concrete Technology, S. Chand & Company Ltd. ISBN:

9788121900034.

2. IS: 10262-2009, Guidelines for concrete mix design proportioning, BIS, New Delhi.

3. Rao C.S. (2006), Environmental Pollution Control Engineering, New Age International,

ISBN: 9788122418354.

4. Arcadio P Sincero, Gregoria A Sincero (2009), Environmental Engineering : A Design

Approach, PHI Learning, ISBN: 9788120314740.

REFERENCE BOOKS

1. Neville. A.M. (2010) Specification of Properties of Concrete, Standard Publishers Distributors.

ISBN- 9780273755807

2. George Tchobanoglous, Donald R. Rowe, Howard S. Peavy, Environmental Engineering,

McGraw-Hill Publishing Co.,

ISBN: 9780071002318.

3. P. AarneVesilind, Susan M. Morga (2004), Introducing to Environmental Engineering, Nelson

Engineering, ISBN:

9780534378127.

COURSE CONTENT

MODULE I: Concrete Technology 6 hours

Basics of mix design, design of members subjected to flexure, shear, compression and torsion by limit state methods, basic elements of prestressed concrete, analysis of beam sections at transfer and service loads. Steel structures: Analysis and design of tension and compression members, beams and beam columns, column bases; simple and eccentric beam–column connections, plate girders and trusses; plastic analysis of beams and frames.

MODULE II: Hydraulics, Air and Noise Pollution 6 hours

Types of air pollutants, their sources and impacts, air pollution meteorology, air pollution control, air quality

standards and limits impacts of noise, permissible limits and measurement of noise pollution, and controls.

Characteristics, generation, collection and transportation of municipal solid wastes, engineered systems for

solid waste management, 4/5/6-R concept. Concepts of hydrology, velocity triangles, characteristics of pumps

and turbines, and their applications.

MODULE III: Finite Element Modelling 6 hours

Plane strain analysis. Structural analysis of bar, truss, column and beam using ANSYS, STADD-Pro and other

computing tools.

MODULE IV: Modern Software in Green Building Design 6 hours

Green Building norms – International & National, Planning and Scheduling of Multi storied building, Road

Project, Preparing the resource sheet, different reports available in Primavera, Introduction to photogrammetry

and remote sensing, EDM/Total Station/GPS.

MODULE V: Problem Practice in Civil Engineering 6 hours

Conceptual and technical skill questions on concrete technology, emerging pollutants, and designing of steel

structural components , hydraulic systems, controls for air & noise pollution, FEM and application of related

software in solving civil engineering problems.

Mode Of Evaluation:

Components Theory

Internal SEE

Marks 50 50

Total Marks 100



En

gin

eeri

ng K

no

wle

dg

e

Pro

ble

m a

nal

ysi

s

Des

ign

/dev

elo

pm

ent

of

solu

tion

s

Co

ndu

ct i

nv

esti

gat

ion

s o

f co

mp

lex

pro

ble

ms

Mo

der

n t

oo

l u

sag

e

Th

e en

gin

eer

and s

oci

ety

En

vir

on

men

t an

d s

ust

ain

abil

ity

Eth

ics

Ind

ivid

ual

or

team

wo

rk

Co

mm

un

icat

ion

Pro

ject

man

agem

ent

and

fin

ance

Lif

e-lo

ng

Lea

rnin

g

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

CLE49

1

Technical

Proficiency

in Civil

Engineerin

g-III

2 3 3 3 3 3 3 1 2 3




CLE452 CAD Lab- II L T P C


S. N. Course Outcomes (COs)

Mapped

Programme

Outcomes

1 Apply knowledge of computing, science and mathematics, and engineering theory in the

modelling, design and solving to real-world problems

1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 12

2 Adopt holistic approaches and emerging concepts in solving real life civil engineering

problems

1, 6, 7, 12

3 Employ modern planning and designing techniques, practices, computing tools and software

for solving engineering problems

3, 5, 12

4 Design complex civil engineering structures, green buildings and systems 2, 3, 4, 6, 7, 12

5 Establish themselves in engineering profession as competent and leading professionals 9, 10, 12

Pre-requisites CLE313 , CLE413

Co-requisites --

COURSE OBJECTIVE

1. To make the students understand the design and drawing of different concrete and steel structures.

2. To enable the students to know the practical applications of this subject. 3. To enable the students to understand & visualize the shear force diagram and bending

moment diagram and different design methodologies. COURSE OUTCOMES


1. Know the behaviour of structures.

2. Understand & visualize the shear force diagram and bending moment diagram drawn in tension face and different design methodologies.

3. Design & draw different RCC and steel structures.


Students will understand about the behaviour of structures. Students will analyze any type of

plane structure and draw the shear force diagram and bending moment diagram in tension face. Finally they

will understand different design methodologie and design & draw different RCC and steel structures..

TEXT BOOKS

1. Gambhir, M.L., (2011), “Fundamentals of Reinforced Concrete Design”, Prentice-Hall of

India. ISBN: 9788120330481.

2. Ramachandra (2004), Design of Steel structures, Vol. I & Vol. II, 4th Edition, Standard

Publishers Distributors, ISBN:

9780071544115.

REFERENCE BOOKS

1. Varghese (2005), Advanced Reinforced Concrete Design, Prentice-Hall of India.

2. Gurcharan Singh (2005), Design of R.C.C. Structures in S. I. Units, Standard Publishers

Distributors.

3. B. C. Punmia (2003), Design of reinforced concrete structures, Lakshmi Publishers.

4. IS:456 & SP:16

5. Vazirani V. N., Ratwani M. M. and Mehra H. (2012), Design and Analysis of Steel

Structures, 18th Edition, Oscar

Publications, ISBN: 9788174092953.

6. Syal I. C. (2009), Design of Steel Structures, Standard Publishers Distributors, New Delhi,

ISBN: 9788180141270.

7. Ramchandra (2006), Non Linear Analysis of Steel Structures, Standard Publishers

Distributors, ISBN:9788180140785.

8. IS: 800 & Steel Table.


1. Design and drawing of RCC continuous beam.

2. Design and drawing of an interior slab panel.

3. Design and drawing of RCC Tee beam along with slab.

4. Design and drawing of RCC staircase.

5. Design and drawing of combined footing.

6. Design and drawing of built-up steel beam.

7. Design and drawing of steel plate girder.

8. Design and drawing of gantry girder.

9. Design and drawing of steel roof truss.

10. Design and drawing of chimney.

Mode Of Evaluation:

Components

Theory

Laboratory

Internal SEE

Marks 50 50

Total Marks 100


En

gin

eeri

ng K

no

wle

dg

e

Pro

ble

m a

nal

ysi

s

Des

ign

/dev

elo

pm

ent

of

solu

tion

s

Co

ndu

ct i

nv

esti

gat

ion

s o

f co

mp

lex

pro

ble

ms

Mo

der

n t

oo

l u

sag

e

Th

e en

gin

eer

and s

oci

ety

En

vir

on

men

t an

d s

ust

ain

abil

ity

Eth

ics

Ind

ivid

ual

or

team

wo

rk

Co

mm

un

icat

ion

Pro

ject

man

agem

ent

and

fin

ance

Lif

e-lo

ng

Lea

rnin

g

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

CLE45

2

CA

D

Lab-

II

2 2 2 2 1





Engineering -II L T P C



Mapped

Programme

Outcomes

1 Know the behaviour of structures 1, 3

2 Understand & visualize the shear force diagram and bending moment diagram drawn in

tension face and different design methodologies.

1, 3

3 Design & draw different RCC and steel structures.

3, 5, 9 , 10


Pre-requisites All civil engineering courses till V Semester

Co-requisites --

COURSE OBJECTIVES

1.To enhance their technical competency in foundation engineering and structural analysis.

2. To strengthen their designing skills for traffic monitoring and managing systems.

3. To make them skilful in designing foundation and analyzing structures.

4. To prepare students for effective use of software for managing traffic systems.

5. To make graduate most competent in solving real life civil engineering problems.

6. To attain better success in corporate interview and their profession.

COURSE OUTCOMES


1. Apply the concepts of foundation engineering and structural analysis for designing the

components of various structures.

2. Design strong foundations and efficient traffic management systems.

3. Write computer programmes for solving real civil engineering problems.

4. Use modern software designing structural components and traffic management problems.


The course is designed to make the student competent analysing complex foundation

engineering and structural engineering problems. It also strengthens their proficiency in writing computer

programmes and using modern software for monitoring and managing the traffic. Additionally, the course is

structured to fortify their analytical and designing skills required for solving real civil engineering problems

related to foundation engineering, structural engineering and traffic engineering

TEXT BOOKS

1.Vazirani & Ratwani (2003), Analysis of Structures, Vol. 1 & II, Khanna Publishers, ISBN:

0125249853.

2. Varghese P.C (2009), Foundation Engineering 1st Edition, Prentice-Hall of India Private

Limited. ISBN: 978-81-203-2652-1

3. B.C. Punmia, Ashok Kr. Jain (2005), Soil Mechanics and Foundations Sixteenth Edition,

Laxmi Publications. ISBN: 978-81- 700-8791-5.

4. Kadiyali.L.R. (2008), Traffic Engineering and Transportation Planning, Khanna Publishers,

ISBN-9788174092205.

5.Chakroborthy Partha, and Das Animesh, (2003), Principles of Transportation Engineering,

Eighth Printing, Prentice-Hall of India, ISBN-9788120320840.

REFERENCE BOOKS

1. S. Ramamrutham (2004), Theory of Structures, 5thEdition, Dhanpat Rai Publications,

ISBN: 978041528091

2. C. S. Reddy (2010), Structural Analysis, 3rd Edition, Tata McGraw Hill, ISBN:

9780070702769.

3. Kenneth M. Leet, Gilbert A, Uang C. M. (2010), Fundamentals of Structural Analysis, 4th

Edition, Tata McGraw Hill, ISBN: 9780071289382

4. Donald P Coduto, William A. Kitch, Man-chu Ronald Yeung (2010), Geotechnical

Engineering: Principles and Practices 2nd revised Edition, Pearson Education. ISBN: 978-01-313-

5425-8.

5. Joseph E. Bowles (2006), Foundation Analysis and Design 5th edition, McGraw-Hill, New York. ISBN: 978-00-711-8844-9. 6.Garber. Nicholas J., and Hoel. Lester A., (2009), Traffic & Highway Engineering, Fourth

Edition, Cengage Learning, ISBN-9780495082507.

COURSE CONTENT

MODULE I: Structural Analysis 6 hours

Analysis of statically determinate trusses, arches, beams, cables and frames using energy principles and

analytical methods.

MODULE II: Foundation Engineering and Traffic Management

6 hours

Sub-surface investigations, earth pressure theories, effect of water table, stability of slopes,

foundation types.Traffic characteristics, theory of traffic flow, intersection design, traffic signs and signal

design, highway capacity.

MODULE III: IT Skills and Computer Programming 6 hours

Data type and structures and their design, array, stack queue, computer graphics, Java programming,

and their applications in solving civil engineering problems.

MODULE IV: Applications of Software in Civil Engineering Design 6 hours

Computer aided design in civil engineering, engineering design principles, interactive design using

workstations, and software in Civil Engineering.

MODULE V: Problem Solving Practices 6 hours

Technical skill questions on structural analysis, foundation engineering, traffic management and application of

related software in solving civil engineering problems.

Mode Of Evaluation:

Components Theory

Internal SEE

Marks 50 50

Total Marks 100




Mapped

Programme

Outcomes

1 Apply the concepts of foundation engineering and structural analysis for designing the components of

various structures

1, 2, 3, 4

2 Design strong foundations and efficient traffic management systems 2 , 3, 4, 5, 6

3 Write computer programmes for solving real civil engineering problems 2, 5

4 Use modern software designing structural components and traffic management problems 2, 3

En

gin

eeri

ng K

no

wle

dg

e

Pro

ble

m a

nal

ysi

s

Des

ign

/dev

elo

pm

ent

of

solu

tion

s

Co

ndu

ct i

nv

esti

gat

ion

s o

f co

mp

lex

pro

ble

ms

Mo

der

n t

oo

l u

sag

e

Th

e en

gin

eer

and s

oci

ety

En

vir

on

men

t an

d s

ust

ain

abil

ity

Eth

ics

Ind

ivid

ual

or

team

wo

rk

Co

mm

un

icat

ion

Pro

ject

man

agem

ent

and

fin

ance

Lif

e-lo

ng

Lea

rnin

g

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

CLE49

1

Technical

Proficiency

in Civil

Engineerin

g-III

2 3 3 2 3 2 1 1 2



3=major part of coursE


L T P C

Engineering -III


Pre-requisites All civil engineering courses till V Semester

Co-requisites --

COURSE OBJECTIVES

1. To strengthen the knowledge base of students in concepts and theories of engineering

mechanic, soil mechanics and fluid mechanics.

2. To make them competent in designing water and wastewater treatment and disposal

systems.

3. To enhance their learning in surveying and site specific field investigations.

4.To prepare students for effective use of design and drawing software.

5.To reinforce their understanding of civil engineering practices.

COURSE OUTCOMES


1. Apply the concepts of engineering mechanics and fluid mechanics in civil engineering.

2. Perform different methods of surveying for application in civil engineering profession.

3. Design efficient water and wastewater treatment processes and disposal systems.

4. Effectively Prepare blue-prints of buildings and other civil engineering structures.

5. Efficaciously write computer programmes in solving real problems.

6. Design highway systems geometrically with different pavements.


The course is structured to strengthen technical skills of students in concepts of engineering

mechanics, soil mechanics, fluid mechanics, surveying, and water pollution for solving real life civil

engineering problems. It also makes them to attain competency in designing unit operations and processes for

water & wastewater treatment and disposal systems, and highways. The course aims to make them proficient

for effective use of software for civil engineering design and drawing.

TEXT BOOKS

1.Vazirani & Ratwani (2003), Analysis of Structures, Vol. 1 & II, Khanna Publishers, ISBN:

0125249853.

2. Varghese P.C (2009), Foundation Engineering 1st Edition, Prentice-Hall of India Private

Limited. ISBN: 978-81-203-2652-1

3. B.C. Punmia, Ashok Kr. Jain (2005), Soil Mechanics and Foundations Sixteenth Edition,

Laxmi Publications. ISBN: 978-81- 700-8791-5.

4. Kadiyali.L.R. (2008), Traffic Engineering and Transportation Planning, Khanna Publishers,

ISBN-9788174092205.

5.Chakroborthy Partha, and Das Animesh, (2003), Principles of Transportation Engineering,

Eighth Printing, Prentice-Hall of India, ISBN-9788120320840.

REFERENCE BOOKS

1. S. Ramamrutham (2004), Theory of Structures, 5thEdition, Dhanpat Rai Publications,

ISBN: 978041528091

2. C. S. Reddy (2010), Structural Analysis, 3rd Edition, Tata McGraw Hill, ISBN:

9780070702769.

3. Kenneth M. Leet, Gilbert A, Uang C. M. (2010), Fundamentals of Structural Analysis, 4th

Edition, Tata McGraw Hill, ISBN: 9780071289382

4. Donald P Coduto, William A. Kitch, Man-chu Ronald Yeung (2010), Geotechnical

Engineering: Principles and Practices 2nd revised Edition, Pearson Education. ISBN: 978-01-313-

5425-8.

5. Joseph E. Bowles (2006), Foundation Analysis and Design 5th edition, McGraw-Hill, New York. ISBN: 978-00-711-8844-9. 6.Garber. Nicholas J., and Hoel. Lester A., (2009), Traffic & Highway Engineering, Fourth Edition, Cengage Learning, ISBN- 9780495082

COURSE CONTENT

MODULE I: Structural Analysis 6 hours

Analysis of statically determinate trusses, arches, beams, cables and frames using energy

principles and analytical methods.

MODULE II: Foundation Engineering and Traffic Management

6 hours

Sub-surface investigations, earth pressure theories, effect of water table, stability of slopes, foundation

types.Traffic characteristics, theory of traffic flow, intersection design, traffic signs and signal design, highway

capacity.

MODULE III: IT Skills and Computer Programming

Data type and structures and their design, array, stack queue, computer graphics, Java programming,

and their applications in solving civil engineering problems.

MODULE IV: Applications of Software in Civil Engineering Design 6 hours

Computer aided design in civil engineering, engineering design principles, interactive design using

workstations, and software in Civil Engineering.

MODULE V: Problem Solving Practices 6 hours

Technical skill questions on structural analysis, foundation engineering, traffic management and

application of related software in solving civil engineering problems.

Mode Of Evaluation:

Components Theory

Internal SEE

Marks 50 50

Total Marks 100




Mapped

Programme

Outcomes

1 Apply the concepts of foundation engineering and structural analysis for designing

the components of various structures

1, 2, 3, 4

2 Design strong foundations and efficient traffic management systems 2 , 3, 4, 5, 6

3 Write computer programmes for solving real civil engineering problems 2, 5

4 Use modern software designing structural components and traffic management problems

2, 3

En

gin

eeri

ng K

no

wle

dg

e

Pro

ble

m a

nal

ysi

s

Des

ign

/dev

elo

pm

ent

of

solu

tion

s

Co

ndu

ct i

nv

esti

gat

ion

s o

f co

mp

lex

pro

ble

ms

Mo

der

n t

oo

l u

sag

e

Th

e en

gin

eer

and s

oci

ety

En

vir

on

men

t an

d s

ust

ain

abil

ity

Eth

ics

Ind

ivid

ual

or

team

wo

rk

Co

mm

un

icat

ion

Pro

ject

man

agem

ent

and

fin

ance

Lif

e-lo

ng

Lea

rnin

g

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

CLE49

1

Technical

Proficiency

in Civil

Engineering

-III

2 3 3 2 3 2 1 1 2




CLE353 CAD Lab - I L T P C


Pre-requisites CLE322 , CLE312

Co-requisites --

COURSE OBJECTIVE

1.To teach the students to understand the details of STAAD - PRO software package.

2. To enable the students to know the behaviour of structures.

3. To enable the students to understand & visualize the shear force diagram and bending

moment diagram.

COURSE OUTCOMES


1.Understand the details of STAAD - PRO software package.


3.Understand & visualize the shear force diagram and bending moment diagram drawn in

tension face.

4. Draw the shear force diagram and bending moment diagram in tension face.


Students will learn the details of STAAD - PRO software package. Students will understand

about the behaviour of structures.Students will analyze any type of plane structure and will draw the shear

force diagram and bending moment diagram in tension face.

TEXT BOOKS

1. V. N. Vazirani & M. M. Ratwani, (1998), Analysis of Structures, Khanna Publishers

REFERENCE BOOKS

1. R. L. Jindal, (1996), Indeterminate Structures, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing House.

2. G. S. Pandit & Gupta S. P., (1998),. Structural Analysis (A matrix approach), Tata McGraw

Hill Publishing Ltd.

3. Wang C. K., (1996), Matrix Method of Structural Analysis, Jon Wiley publications.


1. Analysis of simply supported beam.

2. Analysis of cantilever beam.

3. Analysis of propped cantilever beam.

4. Analysis of continuous beam.

5. Analysis of statically determinate plane truss.

6. Analysis of statically indeterminate plane truss.

7. Analysis of statically determinate plane frame.

8. Analysis of statically indeterminate plane frame.

Mode Of Evaluation:

Components

Theory

Laboratory

Internal SEE

Marks 50 50

Total Marks 100


En

gin

eeri

ng K

no

wle

dg

e

Pro

ble

m a

nal

ysi

s

Des

ign

/dev

elo

pm

ent

of

solu

tion

s

Co

ndu

ct i

nv

esti

gat

ion

s o

f co

mp

lex

pro

ble

ms

Mo

der

n t

oo

l u

sag

e

Th

e en

gin

eer

and s

oci

ety

En

vir

on

men

t an

d s

ust

ain

abil

ity

Eth

ics

Ind

ivid

ual

or

team

wo

rk

Co

mm

un

icat

ion

Pro

ject

man

agem

ent

and

fin

ance

Lif

e-lo

ng

Lea

rnin

g

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

CLE35

3

CA

D

Lab

- I

2 2 3 2 1






Mapped

Programme

Outcomes

1 Understand the details of STAAD - PRO software package. 5 , 9 , 10

2 Know the behaviour of structures. 1, 2 , 5


tension face.

1, 2 , 5

4 Draw the shear force diagram and bending moment diagram in tension face. 1, 2 , 5

CLE342 CAD Lab - I L T P C


Pre-

requisites CLE353 , CLE313

Co-

requisites --

COURSE OBJECTIVE

1.To teach the students to understand the details of STAAD - PRO software package.

\ 2. To enable the students to know the behaviour of structures.

3. To enable the students to understand & visualize the shear force diagram and bending

moment diagram, to design RCC

structures and steel trusses.

COURSE OUTCOMES


1.Understand the details of STAAD - PRO software package.


3.Understand & visualize the shear force diagram and bending moment diagram drawn in

tension face.

4. Draw the shear force diagram and bending moment diagram in tension face.

5. Design RCC structures.


Students will learn the details of STAAD - PRO software package. Students will understand

about the behaviour of structures. Students will analyze any type of plane structure and will draw the shear

force diagram and bending moment diagram in tension face. Finally they will design RCC structures.

TEXT BOOKS

1. Gambhir, M.L., (2011), “Fundamentals of Reinforced Concrete Design”, Prentice-Hall of India.

ISBN: 9788120330481.

2. S Unnikrishna Pillai & Devdas Menon, (2005), Reinforced Concrete Design, Tata Mcgraw Hill,

ISBN: 9780070141100.

3. Varghese, P.C., (2009), Limit State Design of Reinforced Concrete, 2nd ed. ISBN:

9788120320390.

REFERENCE BOOKS

1. Varghese (2005), Advanced Reinforced Concrete Design, Prentice-Hall of India.

2. Gurcharan Singh (2005), Design of R.C.C. Structures in S. I. Units, Standard Publishers

Distributors.

3. B. C. Punmia (2003), Design of reinforced concrete structures, Lakshmi Publishers.

4. IS:456 & SP:16


1. Design of RCC simply supported beam.

2. Design of RCC cantilever beam.

3. Design of RCC propped cantilever beam.

4. Design of RCC continuous beam.

5. Design of statically determinate steel plane truss.

6. Design of statically indeterminate steel plane truss.

7. Design of statically determinate RCC plane frame.

8. Design of statically indeterminate RCC plane frame.

Mode Of Evaluation:

Components

Theory

Laboratory

Internal SEE

Marks 50 50

Total Marks 100


En

gin

eeri

ng K

no

wle

dg

e

Pro

ble

m a

nal

ysi

s

Des

ign

/dev

elo

pm

ent

of

solu

tion

s

Co

ndu

ct i

nv

esti

gat

ion

s o

f co

mp

lex

pro

ble

ms

Mo

der

n t

oo

l u

sag

e

Th

e en

gin

eer

and s

oci

ety

En

vir

on

men

t an

d s

ust

ain

abil

ity

Eth

ics

Ind

ivid

ual

or

team

wo

rk

Co

mm

un

icat

ion

Pro

ject

man

agem

ent

and

fin

ance

Lif

e-lo

ng

Lea

rnin

g

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

CLE35

3

CA

D

Lab

- I

2 2 3 2 1






Mapped

Programme

Outcomes

1 Understand the details of STAAD - PRO software package. 5 , 9 , 10

2 Know the behaviour of structures. 1, 2 , 5


tension face.

1, 2 , 5

4 Draw the shear force diagram and bending moment diagram in tension face. 1, 2 , 5

5 Design RCC structures. 5 , 9 , 10


Engineering -I L T P C


Pre-requisites All civil engineering courses till VI Semester

Co-requisites --

COURSE OBJECTIVES

1.To strengthen the knowledge base of students in concepts and theories of engineering

mechanic, soil mechanics and fluid mechanics.

2.To make them competent in designing water and wastewater treatment and disposal

systems.

3.To enhance their learning in surveying and site specific field investigations.

4. To prepare students for effective use of design and drawing software.

5.To reinforce their understanding of civil engineering practices.

COURSE OUTCOMES


1.Apply the concepts of engineering mechanics and fluid mechanics in civil engineering.

2.Perform different methods of surveying for application in civil engineering profession.

3.Design efficient water and wastewater treatment processes and disposal systems.

4.Effectively Prepare blue-prints of buildings and other civil engineering structures.

5.Efficaciously write computer programmes in solving real problems.

6.Design highway systems geometrically with different pavements.


The course is structured to strengthen technical skills of students in concepts of engineering

mechanics, soil mechanics, fluid mechanics, surveying, and water pollution for solving real life civil

engineering problems. It also makes them to attain competency in designing unit operations and processes for

water & wastewater treatment and disposal systems, and highways. The course aims to make them proficient

for effective use of software for civil engineering design and drawing.

TEXT BOOKS

1. Tayal.A.K. (2009), Engineering Mechanics – Statics and Dynamics, 12th Edition, Umesh Publications, ISBN: 9788188114016.

2. P. N. Modi and S. M. Seth (2011), Hydraulics and Fluid Mechanics including Hydraulic

Machines, Standard Publications. ISBN- 9788189401269.

3. Garg S.K. (2010), Environmental Engineering Vol. I Water Supply Engineering, Khanna Publishers. ISBN: 9788174091208

4. H.S.Peavy, D.R.Rowe & George Tchobanoglous (2005), Environmental Engineering, McGraw-Hill Company, New Delhi. ISBN: 9789380358246

5. Punmia B.C. (2005), Surveying, Volume 1, 16th Edition Laxmi Publications. ISBN: 9788170080794

6. Khanna.S.K., and Justo. C.E.G., (2011), Highway Engineering, Ninth Edition, Nem

. REFERENCE BOOKS

1. Shames I. H. (2006), Engineering Mechanics – Statics and Dynamics, 4th

Edition, Prentice-Hall of India Private limited, ISBN- 9780133569247.

2. V.L. Streeter, (2001), Fluid Mechanics, McGraw Hill Book Co. ISBN –

9780071156004.

3. Metcalf and Eddy (2003), Wastewater Engineering, Treatment and reuse, Tata

McGraw-Hill Edition, Fourth edition. ISBN:9780070495395

4. Subramaniyan R. (2010), Surveying and Levelling, Oxford University Press.

ISBN: 9780195684247.

5. Rao.G.V., (1996), Principles of Transportation and Highway Engineering, Tata

McGraw-Hill Co, ISBN- 9780074623633.

6. Khisty.C.J., and Lall.B.K., (2003), Transportation Engineering, Indian Edition,

Prentice-Hall of India, ISBN- 978812032212.

.

COURSE CONTENT

MODULE I: Concrete Technology

6 hours

Basics of mix design, design of members subjected to flexure, shear, compression and torsion by

limit state methods, basic elements of prestressed concrete, analysis of beam sections at transfer and service

loads. Steel structures: Analysis and design of tension and compression members, beams and beam columns,

column bases; simple and eccentric beam–column connections, plate girders and trusses; plastic analysis of

beams and frames.

MODULE II: Hydraulics, Air and Noise Pollution 6 hours

Types of air pollutants, their sources and impacts, air pollution meteorology, air pollution control,

air quality standards and limits, impacts of noise, permissible limits and measurement of noise pollution, and

controls. Characteristics, generation, collection and transportation of municipal solid wastes, engineered

systems for solid waste management, 4/5/6-R concept. Concepts of hydrology, velocity triangles,

characteristics of pumps and turbines, and their applications.

MODULE III: Finite Element Modelling 6 hours

Plane strain analysis. Structural analysis of bar, truss, column and beam using ANSYS, STADD-

Pro and other computing tools.

MODULE IV: Modern Software in Green Building Design 6 hours

Green Building norms – International & National, Planning and Scheduling of Multi storied

building, Road Project, Preparing the resource sheet, different reports available in Primavera, Introduction to

photogrammetry and remote sensing, EDM/Total Station/GPS.

MODULE V: Problem Practice in Civil Engineering 6 hours

Conceptual and technical skill questions on concrete technology, emerging pollutants, and

designing of steel structural components,hydraulic systems, controls for air & noise pollution, FEM and

application of related software in solving civil engineering problems.

Mode Of Evaluation:

Components Theory

Internal SEE

Marks 50 50

Total Marks 100




Mapped

Programme

Outcomes

1 Apply knowledge of computing, science and mathematics, and engineering theory in the

modelling, design and solving to real-world problems

1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 12

2 Adopt holistic approaches and emerging concepts in solving real life civil engineering

problems

1, 6, 7, 12

3 Employ modern planning and designing techniques, practices, computing tools and software

for solving engineering problems

3, 5, 12

4 Design complex civil engineering structures, green buildings and systems 2, 3, 4, 6, 7, 12

5 Establish themselves in engineering profession as competent and leading professionals 9, 10, 12

En

gin

eeri

ng K

no

wle

dg

e

Pro

ble

m a

nal

ysi

s

Des

ign

/dev

elo

pm

ent

of

solu

tion

s

Co

ndu

ct i

nv

esti

gat

ion

s o

f co

mp

lex

pro

ble

ms

Mo

der

n t

oo

l u

sag

e

Th

e en

gin

eer

and s

oci

ety

En

vir

on

men

t an

d s

ust

ain

abil

ity

Eth

ics

Ind

ivid

ual

or

team

wo

rk

Co

mm

un

icat

ion

Pro

ject

man

agem

ent

and

fin

ance

Lif

e-lo

ng

Lea

rnin

g

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

CLE491

Technical

Proficiency

in Civil

Engineering-

III

2 3 3 3 3 3 3 1 2 3




CLE352 Waste Analysis Laboratory L T P C



Co-requisites --

COURSE OBJECTIVES

1. To gain insight into collection, transfer and transport of municipal solid waste

2. Understand the design and operation of municipal solid waste landfill

3. Understand the design and operation of resource recovery facility

4. Understand the design and operation of waste to energy facility

COURSE OUTCOMES


1. Identify the purpose of waste processing;

2. Explain the processing techniques for reducing the volume and size of wastes;

3.Carry out separation of various components;

4.Discuss the need for dewatering and drying of wastes;

5. Assess technical viability of various processing techniques.


Water is life sustaining resource for each bios including human being and it is turned to

wastewater on or after its use. Inadequate treatment of water poses health risk to consumers and improper

treatment and disposal of wastewater poses risk of contamination of surface and subsurface water-resources.

Therefore, it is essential to make the learn designing principles and concepts for the unit operations involved in

water and wastewater treatments, and basics for modifying the design to make it suitable to the location.

This course also strengthens the drawing skills.

TEXT BOOKS


2. Garg.S.K, (2010), Environmental Engineering-Sewage Disposal and Air Pollution

Engineering, 1st Edition, Khanna Publishers, ISBN- 978-81-740-9230-4.



. REFERENCE BOOKS


2. Hammer & Hammer Jr., Water and Wastewater Technology, 7th Edition, ISBN-978-81-203-4601-7.

3. Rakesh Kumar, R.N.Singh, (2009), Municipal Water and Wastewater Treatment, Teri Press, ISBN: 978-

81-799-3188-2.

4. P.N.Modi, (2008), Sewage Treatment Disposal and Wastewater Engineering, 2nd Edition, ISBN-978-81-

900-8932-4.

5. Shyam. R.Asolekar, Soli. J.Arceivala, Wastewater Treatment for Pollution Control and Reuse, 3rd Edition,

Tata McGraw-Hill Education, ISBN: 978-00-706-2099-5.

COURSE CONTENT

List of Experiments:

1. Determination of Total Organic Carbon of given solid waste sample

2. Determination of moisture content of municipal solid waste

3. Determination of Nitrogen content of municipal solid waste

4. Monitoring and analysis of NOx and SOx in ambient air using High volume samplers

5. Monitoring and analysis of PM10 in ambient air using High volume samplers

6. Analysis of heavy metal (Iron, copper and cadmium) using Atomic Adsorption spectrophotometer

7. Determination of concentration of Ethanol using UV spectrophotometer

8. Fractional Analysis of E-waste and Industrial Solid waste

9. Monitoring and analysis of petrol driven vehicular exhaust- 2 wheeler

10. Monitoring and analysis of diesel driven vehicular exhaust- 4 wheeler

Mode Of Evaluation:

Components Theory

Internal SEE

Laboratory Marks 50 50

Total Marks 100




Mapped

Programme

Outcomes

1 Identify the purpose of waste processing 1,, 3, 6

2 Explain the processing techniques for reducing the volume and size of wastes 1, 2 , 4 , 6

3 Carry out separation of various components 5 , 6 , 7 , 8 , 9 , 10

4 Discuss the need for dewatering and drying of wastes 9 , 10 , 11, 12

CLE453 Design & Drawing (Environment) L T P C


Pre-

requisites CLE227,CLE323

Co-

requisites --

COURSE OBJECTIVE

(1) Understand the basic design principles and concepts of unit operations and processes

involved for treatment of water and wastewater.

(2) Design of unit operations and processes involved in treatment of water and wastewater.

(3) Exposure to layout principles and processes for water and wastewater treatment plants, and

domestic water supply system.

COURSE OUTCOMES


(1) Design the unit operations and processes required for satisfactory treatment of water and

wastewater.

(2) Redesigning the unit operations or processes to make conditions and location specific by

applying physicochemical, biological and engineering principles.

(3) Prepare layout of designed water and wastewater treatment units in a cost effective and

sustainable manner.

(4) Evaluation of performance entire treatment plant in meeting the desired health and

environment related goals.


Water is life sustaining resource for each bios including human being and it is turned to

wastewater on or after its use. Inadequate treatment of water poses health risk to consumers and improper

treatment and disposal of wastewater poses risk of contamination of surface and subsurface water-resources.

Therefore, it is essential to make the learn designing principles and concepts for the unit operations involved in

water and wastewater treatments, and basics for modifying the design to make it suitable to the location. This

course also strengthens the drawing skills.

TEXT BOOKS


2. Garg.S.K, (2010), Environmental Engineering-Sewage Disposal and Air Pollution Engineering, 1st

Edition, Khanna Publishers, ISBN- 978-81-740-9230-4.



REFERENCE BOOKS


2. Hammer & Hammer Jr., Water and Wastewater Technology, 7th Edition, ISBN-978-81-203-4601-7.

3. Rakesh Kumar, R.N.Singh, (2009), Municipal Water and Wastewater Treatment, Teri Press, ISBN: 978-

81-799-3188-2.

4. P.N.Modi, (2008), Sewage Treatment Disposal and Wastewater Engineering, 2nd Edition, ISBN-978-81-

900-8932-4.

5. Shyam. R.Asolekar, Soli. J.Arceivala, Wastewater Treatment for Pollution Control and Reuse, 3rd Edition,

Tata McGraw-Hill Education, ISBN: 978-00-706-2099-5.


1. Design and Drawing of Screens.

2. Design and Drawing of Grit Chamber.

3. Design and Drawing of Flash mixer.

4. Design and Drawing of Sedimentation tank.

5. Design and Drawing of Slow/ Rapid Filters.

6. Design and Layout of Water Supply Network for a town

7. Design and Drawing of Activated Sludge Process.

8. Design and Drawing of Trickling Filters.

9. Design and Layout of Water Treatment Plant for a Town.

10. Design and Layout of Wastewater Treatment Plant for a Town.

Mode Of Evaluation:

Components

Theory

Internal SEE

Marks 50 50 Laboratory

Total Marks 100

CLE254

Fluid Mechanics Laboratory L T P C


Pre-

requisites CLE214

Co-

requisites --

COURSE OBJECTIVE

1. To compare the results of analytical models to the actual behaviour of real fluid flows.

2. To practice standard measurement techniques of fluid mechanics and their applications.

COURSE OUTCOMES


1. Utilize basic measurement techniques of fluid mechanics.

2. Discuss the differences among measurement techniques, their relevance and

applications.

3. Demonstrate practical understanding of friction losses in pipes.


1. Conducting experiments to verify Beronouli’s theorem.

2. Determination of the Coefficient of discharge and coefficient of velocity for the given

Orifice meter.

3. Determination of the Coefficient of discharge of given Venturi-meter.

4. Determination of the Coefficient of discharge of given Rectangular notch.

5. Determination of the Coefficient of discharge of given V- notch.

6. Determination of the Coefficient of discharge and coefficient of velocity for the given

Mouth piece.

7. Determination of head loss in pipes connected in series.

8. Determination of head loss in pipes connected in parallel.

9. Study of fluid flow types using Reynolds apparatus.

10. Determination of drag force at different incidence angle in wind tunnel.

Mode Of Evaluation:

Components

Theory

Laboratory

Internal SEE

Marks 50 50

Total Marks 100


En

gin

eeri

ng K

no

wle

dg

e

Pro

ble

m a

nal

ysi

s

Des

ign

/dev

elo

pm

ent

of

solu

tion

s

Co

ndu

ct i

nv

esti

gat

ion

s o

f co

mp

lex

pro

ble

ms

Mo

der

n t

oo

l u

sag

e

Th

e en

gin

eer

and s

oci

ety

En

vir

on

men

t an

d s

ust

ain

abil

ity

Eth

ics

Ind

ivid

ual

or

team

wo

rk

Co

mm

un

icat

ion

Pro

ject

man

agem

ent

and

fin

ance

Lif

e-lo

ng

Lea

rnin

g

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

CLE25

4

Fluid

Mechanic

s

Laborator

y

2 1 1 1 1






Mapped

Programme

Outcomes

1 Utilize basic measurement techniques of fluid mechanics. 1, 2

2 Discuss the differences among measurement techniques, their relevance and applications. 1, 9

3 Demonstrate practical understanding of friction losses in pipes. 1, 2, 3, 10

4 Carryout the performance analysis of pumps and turbines. 1, 2, 3, 9, 10

CLE244

Hydraulics and Hydraulics

Machines Laboratory

L T P C


Pre-

requisites CLE230

Co-

requisites --

COURSE OBJECTIVE

1. To practice standard flow measurement techniques in open channel and their

applications.

2. To impart the practical knowledge about the performance characteristics of pumps

and turbines.

COURSE OUTCOMES


1. Utilize basic flow measurement techniques in open channels

2. Demonstrate practical understanding of uniform flow in open channels.

3. Carryout the performance analysis of pumps and turbines.


1. To study the impact of jet on various types of vanes

2. To study the performance characteristics of Centrifugal pump.

3. To study the performance characteristics of reciprocating pump.

4. To study the performance characteristics of Pelton turbine.

5. To study the performance characteristics of Francis turbine

6. To study the performance characteristics Kaplan turbine.

7. To determine the Manning’s roughness coefficient for given laboratory flume.

8. To determine the discharge coefficient of broad crested rectangular weir.

9. To determine the discharge coefficient of sharp crested weir.

10. To study the formation of hydraulic jump in laboratory flume.

Mode Of Evaluation:

Components

Theory

Laboratory

Internal SEE

Marks 50 50

Total Marks 100


En

gin

eeri

ng K

no

wle

dg

e

Pro

ble

m a

nal

ysi

s

Des

ign

/dev

elo

pm

ent

of

solu

tion

s

Co

ndu

ct i

nv

esti

gat

ion

s o

f co

mp

lex

pro

ble

ms

Mo

der

n t

oo

l u

sag

e

Th

e en

gin

eer

and s

oci

ety

En

vir

on

men

t an

d s

ust

ain

abil

ity

Eth

ics

Ind

ivid

ual

or

team

wo

rk

Co

mm

un

icat

ion

Pro

ject

man

agem

ent

and

fin

ance

Lif

e-lo

ng

Lea

rnin

g

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

CLE24

4

Hydraulic

s and

Hydraulic

s

Machines

Laborator

y

2 1 1 1 1






Mapped

Programme

Outcomes

1 Utilize basic measurement techniques of fluid mechanics. 1, 2

2 Discuss the differences among measurement techniques, their relevance and applications. 1, 9

3 Demonstrate practical understanding of friction losses in pipes. 1, 2, 3, 10

4 Carryout the performance analysis of pumps and turbines. 1, 2, 3, 9, 10

b.tech civil engineering · 2021. 9. 1. · unit iii: engineering dynamics 10 lecture hours...

Documents